1504-Cochrane SH Permit Spec 2015 04 13

Transcription

COCHRANE SUPPORTED HOUSING – SENIORS
LIVING
515 11TH STREET, COCHRANE, ON
specifications
2015 04 13
issued for Permit
cjp project no 1504
ARCHITECTS
CASTELLAN JAMES + PARTNERS ARCHITECTS INC
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
CGV BUILDERS – DESIGN BUILD CONTRACOTRS
K.LANG ENGINEERING LTD
Cochrane Supported Housing – Seniors Living
515 11th Street, Cochrane, Ontario
project no 1504
SPECIFICATIONS AND
DRAWINGS INDEX
Page 1
Architectural Seal
Castellan James + Partners Architects Inc. has prepared
the following specification sections:
VOLUME 1 of 1: DIVISIONS 0 TO 17
No. of Pages
Title Page
Seals Sheets
Specifications and Drawings Index
Abbreviations
1
1
6
7
00400
1
Site Investigation
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
01015
General Requirements
01030
Final Clean-Up
01300
Submittals
01340
Shop and Interference Drawings
01350
Environmental protection and Safety Requirements
01400
Quality Control
01545
Construction Health and Safety
01546
Fire Safety Requirements
01600
Products and Workmanship
01630
Product Options
01900
General Requirements for Building Envelope
7
2
3
2
4
4
6
3
2
3
2
DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK
02000
02220
02226
02231
02395
02821
1
5
2
2
2
3
Site Work General Requirements
Excavation and Backfilling
Topsoil and Finish Grading
Clearing and Grubbing
Sodding and Seeding
Chain Link Fencing
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE – REFER TO STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL DWGS AND SPECS
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
04200
04700
Masonry
Manufactured Stone
7
2
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05500
Miscellaneous Metals
4
DIVISION 6–WOODS AND PLASTICS
06100
Rough Carpentry
06200
Finish Carpentry
3
6
project no 1504
06210
SPECIFICATIONS AND
DRAWINGS INDEX
Installation of doors and Finished Hardware
Page 2
2
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOSITURE
07120
Bituminous Dampproofing
07195
Membrane Air / Vapour Barriers
07200
Building Insulation
07310
Asphalt Single Roofing
07400
Wood Siding & Metal Soffit
07571
Epoxy Floor Finish
07840
Firestopping and Smoke Seals
07900
Sealants
2
4
3
3
4
2
7
5
DIVISIONS 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08100
Hollow Metal Doors, Frames and Screens
08120
Aluminium Doors
08210
Wood Doors
08337
Folding Security Grilles
08520
Exterior Windows & Doors
08521
Aluminium Curtain Wall and Windows
08710
Finish Hardware
08800
Glass and Glazing
4
3
2
2
5
11
5
3
DIVISIONS 9 - FINISHES
09250
09300
09510
09650
09756
09900
6
3
3
3
1
6
Gypsum Board
Ceramic Tile
Acoustical Ceilings
Resilient Tile Flooring and Base
Concrete Floor Sealing
Painting and Finishing
DIVISIONS 10 - SPECIALTIES
10160
Metal Toilet Partitions
10800
Washroom Accessories
10990
Misc. Specialties
2
5
1
DIVISIONS 11 - EQUIPMENT
11521
Access/Roof Hatch
2
DIVISIONS 12
12480
2
Foot Grilles
DIVISIONS 13 TO 14 - NOT USED
DIVISIONS 15 and 16– MECHANICAL-ELECTRICAL – REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
DIVISIONS 17- NOT USED
END OF SECTION
project no 1504
ABBREVIATIONS
Page 1
1.
Usage of Abbreviations
1.1
Many words or expressions that are repeated frequently on the drawings are abbreviated to reduce the amount of wording that
might obscure the detailing. To avoid misinterpretation, these abbreviations are listed, with their full meaning, in this Section.
1.2
In addition to those noted in Article 2, some other abbreviations, commonly used in Specifications, are separately listed, in Article
4. Refer also to civil, structural, mechanical, electrical drawings and specifications for other abbreviations used in these
documents.
1.3
Abbreviations not listed here may be used in Room and Door Schedules, and technical Sections of the specifications and are
defined in the Schedules and specification sections where they are used.
2.
List of Architectural Drawing Abbreviations
A
ABV
AFF
ACCT CLR
AC
ACU
AC MET D
ACP
AC PLAS
ACT
AWU
AWP
ACL
Above
Above Finished Floor
Accent Colour
Acoustic
Acoustic Ceiling Unit
Acoustic Metal Deck
Acoustic Panels
Acoustic Plaster
Acoustic Tile
Acoustic Wall Unit
Acoustic Wall Panel
Acrylic Cube Louvre
ADH
ADJ
AGG
A/C
AVB
AL or ALUM
AB
AN or ANOD
ARCH
AD
ASPH
ADJ
Adhesive
Adjustable
Aggregate
Air Conditioner
Air Vapour Barrier
Aluminum
Anchor Bolt
Anodized
Architectural
Area Drain
Asphalt
Adjustable
BH
BOT
BL
BR
BLDG
BU
BUR
BH or BLKHD
Bore Hole
Bottom
Bottom Layer
Brick
Building
Built-up
Built-Up Roof
Bulkhead
CEM
CEM BD
CTR
C/L
CC
CT
CMT
Cement
Cement Board
Centre
Centre Line
Centre to Centre
Ceramic Tile
Ceramic Mosaic Tile
B
BE
B
BSMT
B PL
BM
BRG
BLK
BLKG
BD
Baked Enamel
Base
Basement
Base Plate
Beam
Bearing
Block
Blocking
Board
C
CAB
CANT
CPT
CPT T
CI
CB
CLG
Cabinet
Cantilever
Carpet
Carpet Tile
Cast Iron
Catch Basin
Ceiling
project no 1504
ABBREVIATIONS
Page 2
C (cont.’d)
CF
CHAN
CHK
CH PL
CO
CLR
CLOS
COFF
CRC
CW
COL
COMPL
C/W
CONC
CONC BL
Chair Fabric
Channel
Checkered
Checker Plate
Cleanout
Clear
Closet
Coffered
Cold Rolled Channel
Cold Water
Column
Complete
Complete With
Concrete
Concrete Block
CONC/H
CONC/S
CS
CE
COND
CONN
CONST
CONT
CJ or CJT
CONV
CK
CG
CB
CWP
Concrete with Hardener
Concrete with Sealer
Concrete Sealed
Conductive Epoxy
Conduit
Connect or Connection
Construction
Control or Continuous
Control Joint
Convector
Cork
Corner Guard
Cove Base
Crystalline Waterproofing
DR
DWL
DS
DRP
DWG
DF
DD
Door
Dowel
Downspout
Drapery
Drawing
Drinking Fountain
Dutch Door
EP
EP TER
EQUIP
ESO
EXH
EXIST
EM
EXP JT or EJ
EXP
EXP STR
EXT
Epoxy
Epoxy Terrazzo
Equipment
Owner Supplied Equipment
Exhaust
Existing
Expanded Metal
Expansion Joint
Exposed
Exposed Structure
Exterior
FA
FE or FEXT
FH
FHC
FHR
Fire Alarm
Fire Extinguisher
Fire Hose
Fire Hose Cabinet
Fire Hose Rack
D
DP
DL
D or DP
DMNT
DET
DIA
DIM
DO
DIV
Dampproofing
Dead Load
Deep
Demountable
Detail
Diameter
Dimension
Ditto
Division
E
EA
EE
EF
EW
ELEC
EP
EL or ELEV
ELEV
EMERG
ENCL
EQ
Each
Each End
Each Face
Each Way
Electrical
Electrical Panel
Elevation
Elevator
Emergency
Enclosure
Equal
F
FEAT W
FAP
FBRGL
FLD
FIN
Feature Wall
Fibre Acoustic Panel
Fibreglass
Field
Finish or Finished
project no 1504
ABBREVIATIONS
Page 3
F (cont.’d)
FPRG
FRR
FLUOR
FTG
FGL
FF
Fireproofing
Fire-resistance Rating
Fluorescent
Footing
Float Glass
Force Flow Heater
FL
FD
FDN
FR
FUT
Floor
Floor Drain
Foundation
Frame
Future
GRAN T
GF
GB or GBD
GPC
GPW
Granite Tile
Ground Floor
Gypsum Board
Gypsum-Plaster Ceiling
Gypsum-Plaster Wall
HOR EF
HB
HW
HYD
HP
Horizontal Each Face
Hose Bibb
Hot Water
Hydrant
Hydro Pole
INV
Invert
KD
KO
Knockdown
Knockout
G
GALV
GA
GL
GL BLK
GR
GRAN
Galvanized
Gauge
Glass
Glass Block
Grade
Granite
H
HDW
HDWD
HTR
HT or HGT
H
HC
HC WD
HM
HOR
Hardware
Hardwood
Heater
Height
Hollow
Hollow Core
Hollow Core Wood Door
Hollow Metal
Horizontal
I
ID
INS or INSUL
INT
Inside Diameter
Insulation or Insulated
Interior
J
J or JAN
JT
Janitor
Joint
K
KPL
kN
kPa
Kickplate
Kilonewton
Kilopascals
project no 1504
ABBREVIATIONS
Page 4
L
LAM
LDG
LAT
LAV
LAP
Laminate
Landing
Lateral
Lavatory
Lay-in Acoustic Panel
LP
LWB
LIN
LL
LG
Lighting Panel
Light Weight Block
Linoleum
Live Load
Long
MCL
MET DK
METF
MET GRTG
MET GR CLG
MLP
MET LIN CLG
MT
MET T PTN
MIN
MTD
Metal Cubic Louvre
Metal Deck
Metal Flashing
Metal Grating
Metal Grid Ceiling
Metal Lath and Plaster
Metal Linear Ceiling
Metal Threshold
Metal Toilet Partition
Minimum
Mounted
NTS
Not to Scale
OPP
OD
OA
O/H
Opposite
Outside Diameter
Overall
Overhead
PL
PLYWD
PVC
PCT
P or PREC
PCON
PREFAB
PREF
PRFL
PROP L
PA
Plaster or Plate
Plywood
Polyvinyl Chloride
Porcelain Ceramic Tile
Precast
Precast Concrete
Prefabricated
Prefinished
Profile
Property Line
Public Address
M
MH
MR
MACH
MFR
MAS
MAS FL
MO
MAX
MECH
MPa
MWP
MET
Manhole
Marble
Machine
Manufacturer
Masonry
Masonry Flashing
Masonry Opening
Maximum
Mechanical
Megapascal
Membrane Waterproofing
Metal
N
NF
NRC
NIC
Near Face
Noise Reduction Coefficient
Not in Contract
O
OGL
OC
OWSJ
OPNG
OPR
Obscure Glass
On Centre
Open-Web Steel Joist
Opening
Operator
P
PT
PTD
PR
PNL
PF
PARG
PTN
P ACS FLG
PER
PL or PLAS
PLAM
Paint
Painted
Pair
Panel
Panel Fabric
Parging
Partition
Pedestal Access Flooring
Perimeter
Plaster
Plastic Laminate
project no 1504
ABBREVIATIONS
Page 5
Q
QT
Quarry Tile
R
R
RWL
REC
RECEPT
REINF
RCB
RCONC
REQD
REQT
RB
Radius or Resilient
Rainwater Leader
Recessed
Receptacle
Reinforced / Reinforcing
Reinforced Cement Board
Reinforced Concrete
Required
Requirement
Resilient Base
RSF
RA
REV
RM
RSD
RD
RO
RFT
RSF
RST
Resilient Sheet Flooring
Return Air
Revised or Revision
Room
Rolling Steel Door
Roof Drain
Rough Opening
Rubber Floor Tile
Rubber Sheet Flooring
Rubber Stair Treads
SQ
ST
S&U
S&V
SS or ST STL
STD
SPD
STL
STL BM
STL FL DK
STL PL
STN
ST SEW
STR
SVT
SUSP
SWBD
Square
Stain
Stain and Urethane
Stain and Varnish
Stainless Steel
Standard
Standard Proctor Density
Steel
Steel Beam
Steel Floor Deck
Steel Plate
Stone
Storm Sewer
Structure or Structural
Solid Vinyl Tile
Suspended
Switchboard
T
T&B
TOPG
TDD
TRGL
TRANSV
T
TYP
Top
Top and Bottom
Topping
Towel Dispenser Unit
Translucent Glass
Transverse
Tread
Typical
S
SAN
SND
SNR
SAN SEW
SCHED
SCRN
SECT
SVC
SV
SIM
SL
SS
SC WD
STC
SC
SPEC
SF
SFPRG
Sanitary
Sanitary Napkin Dispenser
Sanitary Napkin Receptacle
Sanitary Sewer
Schedule
Screen
Section
Sheet Vinyl Cove
Sheet Vinyl Flooring
Similar
Sliding
Janitor Slop Sink
Solid Core Wood Door
Sound Transmission Class
Special Coating
Specification
Sports Flooring
Sprayed Fireproofing
T
TEL
TP
TMPD
TPGL
TRR
TER
TER T
TSAT
TH
THR
T&G
Telephone
Telephone Panel
Tempered
Tempered Plate Glass
Temperature Rise Rating
Terrazzo
Terrazzo Tile
Thermostat
Thick or Thickness
Threshold
Tongue and Grooved
project no 1504
ABBREVIATIONS
Page 6
U
UCUT
UGRD
U/S
U/F
UNS
Undercut
Underground
Underside
Unfinished
Unless Noted Otherwise
UP or U/P
U
UR
Unpainted
Urethane
Urinal
VEST
VCF
VCT
VT
VWF
Vestibule
Vinyl Coated Fabric
Vinyl Composition Tile
Vinyl Tile
Vinyl Wall Fabric
WD
WD BK
WDV
Wood
Wood Blocking
Wood Veneer
REINF
RC
Reinforcement
Reinforced Concrete
SECT
STIRS
SW
Section
Stirrups
Short Way
T
T&B
TLL
TUL
T&S
Top
Top and Bottom
Top Lower Layer
Top Upper Layer
Temperature & Shrinkage Steel
V
VEF
VOF
Vertical
Vertical Each Face
Vertical Outside Face
WCol
WWF
Wind Column
Welded Wire Fabric
V
V
VB
VENT
VERT
VERT B
VERT EF
Varnish
Vapour Barrier
Ventilated or Ventilation
Vertical
Vertical Blinds
Vertical Each Face
W
WH
WR or WRM
WP
WT
W/
3.
Wall Hydrant
Washroom
Waterproof or Waterproofing
Weight
With
List of Structural Drawing Abbreviations
B
BM
BL.
BUL
Bottom
Beam
Bottom Lower Layer
Bottom Upper Layer
CANT
COL
CONC
Cantilever
Column
Concrete
-DODP
DWLS
DIAG
Ditto
Deep
Dowels
Diagonal
EW
Each Way
H
HEF
HOF
Horizontal
Horizontal Each Face
Horizontal Outside Face
L
LW
Long
Long Way
project no 1504
4.
ABBREVIATIONS
List of Specification Abbreviations
AA
ACI
AISC
ANSI
ASTM
AWI
AWMAC
CAN
CCDC
CEC
CEMA
CGSB
CISC
CLA
CPCA
CPCI
CRCA
CSA
DND
FM
IEEE
IPCEA
NAAMM
NBC
NEMA
NRC
OBC
OGCA
OPSS
SSPC
TTMAC
ULC
The Aluminum Association
American Concrete Institute
American Institute of Steel Construction
American National Standards Institute
American Society of Testing and Materials
Architectural Woodwork Institute
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada
Standards Council of Canada
Canadian Construction Documents Committee
Canadian Electrical Code (published by CSA)
Canadian Electrical Manufacturer's Association
Canadian Government Standards Board
Canadian Institute of Steel Construction
Canadian Lumberman's Association
Canadian Painting Contractors' Association
Canadian Prestressed Concrete Institute
Canadian Roofing Contractor's Association
Canadian Standards Association
Department of National Defence
Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
National Building Code
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
National Research Council
Ontario Building Code
Ontario General Contractors Association
Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications
Steel Structures Painting Council
Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada
Conform to these standards, in whole or in part, as specifically requested in the specifications.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Page 7
Cochrane Supported Housing – Seniors
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 00400
GEO-TECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
AND SITE ASSESSMENT
Page 00400-1
1.
Division One Requirements
1.1
The provisions of all Sections of Division One shall apply to each section of the Specifications, including those of
Divisions 15 and 16.
2.
Geo-technical Investigation
2.1
A Geotechnical Investigation report prepared by CGV Builders for information purposes only. The report was carried out
for CGV Builders for guidance in design and construction of this project.
2.2
The report does not form part of the Contract Documents. It shall be understood that such examination shall be for
reference only and comments and recommendations contained therein shall not be taken as superseding the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
2.3
No responsibility is assumed by the Consultant or by the Owner for the scope or accuracy of the bore-hole logs, and the
soil investigation of this site. The Contractor shall satisfy himself with regards to all matters relating to sub-surface
conditions.
3.
Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Materials
3.1
Should the Contractor encounter buried items containing environmentally hazardous substances such as, but not limited
to, oil tanks, stop work and notify the Consultant immediately. Do not proceed until written instructions have been
received from the Consultant.
3.2
In the event of unexpected discovery of friable material that may contain asbestos, suspend work in area in question and
immediately report, orally and in writing to office of Construction Health and Safety Branch, Ministry of Labour nearest to
work place and to Consultant. The Consultant will authorize remedial work, if any, in writing. Do such remedial work as
addition to Contract.
3.3
In addition to inspection and testing specified to be provided as part of Work or provided by Contractor for its own
verification of Work, CGV Builders may appoint separately an independent inspection and testing company to confirm
asbestos abatement work is satisfactorily performed. The Owner will pay costs of such additional inspection and testing;
except where such additional tests or inspections reveal work not in accordance with Contract then Contractor shall bear
cost of such tests and further tests as required, to verify acceptability of corrected work
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01005
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 01005-1
1.
Division One Requirements
1.1
The provisions of all Sections of Division One shall apply to each section of the Specifications, including those of
Divisions 15 and 16.
2.
Subdivision of Work
2.1
The Specifications have generally been divided into trade divisions, and the trade divisions into sections for the purpose
of ready reference, but a section may consist of more than one (1) Subcontractor or supplier. The responsibility for
determining which Subcontractor or Supplier provided labour, materials, products, equipment and services to complete
the work rests solely with the Contractor.
3.
Contracts
3.1
By CGV Builders
4.
Discrepancies and/or Omissions
4.1
If the Contractor finds discrepancies in, or omissions in the Drawings, Specifications or other Contract Documents or has
any doubt as to the meaning or intent of any part thereof the Consultant shall be notified at once. The Consultant will
send written instructions or explanations. Oral instruction should be relied upon.
5.
Examination
5.1
Make a careful examination of the site of the project, and investigate and be satisfied as to all matters relating to the
nature of the work to be undertaken, as to the means of access and egress thereto and there from, as to the obstacles
to be met with, as to the rights and interests which may be interfered with during the construction of the work, as to the
extent of the work to be performed and any and all matters which are referred to in the Drawings, Specifications and
other Contract Documents, or which are necessary for the full and proper understanding of the work and the conditions
under which it will be performed.
5.2
Before commencing the work of any Section, the work of other Sections upon which it may depend, shall be carefully
examined. Report any defects, which might affect the new work in writing to the Consultant. Commencement of new
work shall imply acceptance of all work by other Sections upon which the new work depends.
6.
Public Utilities and Services
6.1
Verify limitations imposed on project work by presence of utilities and services, and ensure no damage occurs to them.
6.2
Notify service authorities concerned so that they protect, remove, relocate or discontinue them, as they may require.
6.3
Make arrangements and pay for connection charges for services required for project work.
6.4
Locate poles, pipes, conduit, wires, fill pipes, vents, regulators, meters, and sanitary service work in inconspicuous
locations. If not shown on drawings, verify location of service work with Consultant before commencing installation.
7.
Verification of Inverts
7.1
Verify all field service connections to ensure that drainage runs can meet the inverts of the site services.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01005
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 01005-2
7.2
Give notification immediately of any apparent difficulties or discrepancies.
8.
Co-ordination of Other Contractors' Work
8.1
Co-operate with, correlate, co-ordinate this work with that of Other Contractors who may have separate contracts with
the Owner, in order to complete the work as expeditiously as possible.
8.2
Prior to commencement of work, ensure that all Other Contractors are fully conversant with the extent of the Work, the
conditions and materials on the project, the schedule of completion, restrictions to safety, and to access. Also ensure
that all Subcontractors are fully conversant with the extent of work involved with Other Contractors.
8.3
Have regard to work on adjacent lands,.
9.
Building Dimensions and Coordination
9.1
Ensure that all necessary job dimensions are taken and all trades are co-ordinated for the proper execution of the work.
Assume complete responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of such dimensions, and for co-ordination.
9.2
Verify that all work, as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions and positions indicated which maintain
levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out by requirements of the drawings, and ensure that work installed in
error is rectified before construction resumes.
9.3
Check and verify all dimensions referring to the work and the interfacing of all services. Verify all dimensions, with the
trade concerned when pertaining to the work of other trades. Be responsible to see that Subcontractors for various
trades cooperate for the proper performance of the Work.
9.4
Avoid scaling directly from the drawings. If there is ambiguity or lack of information, immediately inform the Consultant.
Be responsible for any change through the disregarding of this clause.
9.5
All details and measurements of any work which is to fit or to conform with work installed shall be taken at the building.
9.6
Advise Consultant of discrepancies and if there are omissions on drawings, particularly but not limited to, reflected
ceiling plans, ceramic tile, and flooring, which affect aesthetics, or which interfere with services, equipment or surfaces
and air distribution pathways required as part of the Displacement Ventilation . DO NOT PROCEED without direction
from the Consultant.
9.7
Ensure that each Subcontractor communicates requirements for site conditions and surfaces necessary for the
execution of the Subcontractor's work, and that he provides setting drawings, templates and all other information
necessary for the location and installation of material, holes, sleeves, insets, anchors, accessories, fastenings,
connections and access panels. Inform other Subcontractors whose work is affected by these requirements and
preparatory work.
9.8
Prepare interference drawings to properly coordinate the work where necessitated. Refer to Section 01340, Shop and
Interference Drawings.
9.9
Where work incorporates metric modular components the following rules apply:
.1
Actual opening dimensions in masonry including doors, windows, walls, louvres and actual room sizes are 10
mm (3/8") greater than nominal dimensions given on Drawings. Actual thicknesses of walls, piers and overall
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01005
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 01005-3
lengths of walls or buildings are 10 mm (3/8") less than nominal dimensions given on Drawings unless
indicated otherwise.
.2
Unless indicated otherwise Drawing details at scales of 1/2” = 1’-0” (1:10) or larger indicate "actual" rather
than "nominal" dimensions.
10.
Labels and Nameplates
10.1
Do not install permanent or permanently attached labels, trademarks, and nameplates in visible locations on materials
and components, unless required for operating instructions or by Jurisdictional Authorities.
11.
Use of Premises Before Substantial Performance
11.1
The Owner shall have the right to enter and occupy the building, in whole or in part, for the purpose of placing fittings
and equipment, or for other use, before completion of the Contract if, in the opinion of the Contractor and Consultant it is
deemed that, such entry and occupancy does not prevent or interfere with the Contractor in the performance of the
Contract. Such entry shall in no way be considered as an acceptance of the Work in whole, or in part, nor shall it imply
acknowledgement that terms of the Agreement are fulfilled.
12.
Lines, Levels, and Existing Survey
12.1
Existing grades and other known conditions of site are shown on Site Plan. This survey information has been
established by personnel engaged by the Contractor. No responsibility is assumed by the Owner or Consultant for
accuracy of this survey information.
12.2
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for and execute complete layout of work to locations, lines and elevations
indicated. Establish other necessary lines and levels, and erect substantial batter boards and maintain their accurate
position.
12.3
The Contractor shall employ an Ontario Land Surveyor to:
.1
Layout new building additions on site and establish a permanent bench mark or widely separated bench
marks, as required by building configuration.
.2
Verify elevations established for each floor as construction proceeds.
.3
Verify relation of building floor elevations to permanent bench marks.
.4
Verify that no restrictions in force, or probable in the near future, are violated by the placement of
construction on the site, or lines of traverse to all public utilities.
.5
Correlate geodetic elevation of bench mark with the elevations in use by all public utilities adjacent to the
project.
.6
Verify accuracy of all site dimensions shown on Drawings.
.7
Provide to the Consultant a survey plan indicating location of building on site.
.8
Provide verification by survey of the permitted and prescribed limits of site disturbance and that no site
disturbance has occurred beyond the defined limits. Refer documents prepared by the owner’s Civil
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01005
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 01005-4
Engineers for construction fences identifying limit of site disturbance, etc.
13.
Examination Before Execution of Work
13.1
Make good defects in the Work on which further execution of work depends.
13.2
Verify dimensions of prepared work before fabrication of that work which is dependent on the prepared work.
13.3
Do not proceed with the execution of the work unless the work, which is to receive it and site conditions are satisfactory.
Commencement of all work of all sections shall imply that prepared work and site conditions are satisfactory.
14.
Specification Reference to Standards and Codes
14.1
Where reference is made to published standards and codes, such references shall be considered to refer to the 2012
edition of The Ontario Building Code for standards.
15.
Air Leakage and Expansion Control
15.1
Recognizing that wall and roof materials are not dimensionally stable, and that they move differentially from the
structural frame, the location of cracks should be anticipated and an airtight diaphragm and/or flexible sealants
incorporated to maintain air-tightness, and to prevent problems due to vapour condensation.
15.2
In addition, connections between structural steel members are not airtight and perimeter connections must be made
airtight.
15.3
Although concealed behind convectors, panelling, wallboard or suspended ceilings, the interior surfaces of exterior walls
and roofs shall be made airtight. Ensure that backup masonry walls are well laid with full mortar joints, and that
wallboard joints are sealed.
15.4
The manner of installation of all pipes, ducts, conduits, and electrical outlets shall be thoroughly co-ordinated to prevent
the occurrence of air leaks: when pipes or conduits run adjacent to exterior walls and are to be furred in, not only shall
the exterior wall be airtight, but it shall be adequately insulated to prevent cold spots on which condensation could occur
in the cold space. Provide a continuous air seal between the airtight part of a wall or ceiling and the frames of all
openings such as windows, doors, hatches, ducts, grilles, louvres, structural steel members and the like.
15.5
As a general rule, the air / vapour barrier must be on the interior (warm) side of the insulation and should be in contact
with it.
15.6
In addition to the specific requirements in each technical section of the Specification, make allowance for expansion
control throughout the construction. Ensure that poured paving and slabs, exterior to the building structure, together
with applied materials are not tight to building face, and that expansion control joints are left to accommodate movement.
15.7
Take particular care in constructing walls around wet areas such as showers, to avoid moisture transfer to adjacent
building areas.
16.
Local Labour and Fair Wages
16.1
Wherever possible, the Contractor shall give preference to the use of local labour, building mechanics, suppliers and
sub-trades. Rates of wages, hours and conditions of work of persons employed on the work shall be in accordance with
Provincial Codes, and as generally recognized and accepted in the locality.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01005
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 01005-5
17.
Locating Services Prior to Placing of Slabs
17.1
Record exact location of all services with dimensions to the Grid Lines and Datum Lines, and show on Record Drawings
prior to placing concrete. DO NOT place concrete until this is done. Co-ordinate Mechanical, Electrical, and concrete
trades.
18.
Sleeving
18.1
Assess requirements for sleeving the structural elements for passing of pipes, conduits and other mechanical or
electrical components, and include all work required for approved interfacing between the structure, all mechanical and
electrical work, and other components of the work.
19.
Concealing of Mechanical and Electrical Components
19.1
Include work required to modify indicated location of pipes, ducts, conduits, and other mechanical or electrical
components to fully conceal such components from view in finished spaces, except where indicated otherwise.
20.
Life and Fire Safety
20.1
Enforce all requirements established by Jurisdictional Authorities and Underwriters for life safety, fire prevention, and fire
protection.
21.
Drainage
21.1
Ensure that positive drainage is provided to roof, floor, away from building, site drains and catch basins, as set in their
final positions, and at all other locations to prevent water infiltration into the building. Provide constant slopes for drained
surfaces to drains and drainage courses.
21.2
Verify the extent of each area served by a drain, or drainage course, to eliminate possible undrained surfaces. Coordinate the work of involved Subcontractors before each of their work proceeds.
22.
Work Not in Contract
22.1
Work not in this Contract (noted N.I.C. on drawings) shall be co-ordinated and managed by the Contractor
23.
Documents at Job Site
23.1
Maintain at job site, one copy each of the following and make same available to the Consultant upon request:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Contract drawings.
Specifications.
Addenda.
Reviewed shop drawings.
Change orders.
Other modifications to Contract.
Field test reports.
Copy of approved work schedule.
Manufacturer's installation and application instructions.
Standards (latest edition) referred to in Specifications.
Living
project no 1504
.11
SECTION 01005
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 01005-6
2012 Ontario Building Code.
24.
Existing Conditions
24.1
Make good surfaces and finishes damaged or disturbed due to Work of this Contract to match existing. Ensure that
material used to repair damage is compatible with existing work.
24.2
Term "make good" shall mean repairing or filling operations performed on existing floors, walls, ceiling or any other
exposed surfaces. Perform cutting and patching where applicable as specified herein. It is intended that finished
surfaces match and line with existing adjoining surfaces.
24.3
Restore Site to condition equal to or, if specified elsewhere, to condition better than existing conditions.
24.4
Restore lands outside of limits of Work which are disturbed due to Work to original condition in addition to complying
with requirements of General Conditions of the Contract.
25.
Cutting and Patching
25.1
Do not cut, drill or sleeve load-bearing members without obtaining Consultant’s written approval for each condition.
25.2
Schedule and coordinate Work to minimize cutting and patching. Cut and patch as required to make work fit. Use
workers qualified in work being cut and patched to ensure that it is correctly done.
25.3
Cut, patch and make good to accommodate Work and to leave Work in finished condition. Cutting in this sense shall
mean actual cutting of components to allow new components to pass through or to provide new openings. Cutting shall
not mean mere drilling of holes to accommodate screws, anchors, bolts or other fasteners as such. Such drilling is part
of Section's installation function.
25.4
Use workers qualified in work being cut and patched to ensure that it is correctly done.
25.5
Make cuts with clean, true, smooth edges to tolerances required and in conformance with industry practice for applicable
class of work. Make patches undetectable in finished work.
25.6
Cutting and patching of existing concrete slab-on-grade shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
be responsible for coordinating the extent to suit the requirements of Divisions 15 and 16.
26.
Windload for Exterior Application
26.1
Design and install framing, hangers, fasteners, supports, and all accessories required to complete the work to withstand
local windloads and/or uplifts. All members shall be of sizes and strength to carry all loads imposed and provide stiffness
required
27.
Clean Up
27.1
Further to the General Conditions, maintain the work in a tidy condition and free from the accumulation of waste
products and debris, other than that caused by the Owner, other Contractors or their employees.
27.2
Conform to all requirements established by jurisdictional authorities for environmental and pollution control.
27.3
Prevent dust from spreading to adjoining properties. Keep roads and sidewalks free from excavated materials, dirt and
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01005
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
debris, snow, and ice.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Page 01005-7
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01030
FINAL CLEAN-UP
Page 01030-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here.
As per Section 01561 Environmental Protection Mitigation Measures
As per Section 1355 Waste and Materials Management
1.2
1.2.1
Description
This Section covers work for final clean-up as applicable to this Project.
1.3
1.3.1
Environmental Practices
Implement environmentally sound practices in this Project by incorporating products that lessen burden on
environment in production, use and final disposition wherever possible. Support implementation of reduction,
reuse and recycling strategies and use of environmentally sound products. Promote use of environmentally
responsible packaging practices by reducing and/or eliminating products with excessive packaging in this
Project.
Employ environmentally sound products which are made, used and disposed of in a manner that significantly
reduces harm to environment. Where possible make product selection criteria based on requirements
CSA Z760-94, Life Cycle Assessment and CSA Z762-95, Design for the Environment. Use products which
improves energy efficiency in its production and use, reduces hazardous by-products, uses recycled material,
and/or product itself can be recycled or reused, and/or in some way is environmentally benign.
Section Section 1355 Waste and Materials Management
1.3.2
1.3.4
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
Dust Control and Cleaning Requirements
unused
Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the latest edition of The Occupational Health and Safety Act.
Hazards Control
.1
Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily.
.2
Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.
.3
Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws:
.1
Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site.
.2
Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, paint thinner, and cleaning agents, in
storm, sanitary drains, streams or waterways.
Waste Disposal
Do not burn rubbish on Site. Obtain approval, and use following off-site disposal alternatives, depending
upon materials involved; burying, composting, recycling, municipal collection, or local dump or sanitary landfill
site.
Section 01355 Waste and Materials Management
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01030
FINAL CLEAN-UP
Page 01030-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
Materials
Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
Follow manufacturers instructions and requirement for cleaning materials and surfaces.
Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
General: as per Division 1 requirements.
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.12
3.2.13
3.2.14
3.2.15
3.2.16
Cleaning work
Execute cleaning to ensure that building interior is cleaned free from accumulations of construction waste
materials, dust, scuffs on walls and floors.
Be responsible for collection and disposal of materials used in final cleaning.
Vacuum-clean all interior spaces of work areas where required.
Obtain from each Subcontractor, instructions which designate proper methods and materials to be used in
final cleaning.
Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw materials
from heights.
Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not
cause harm or nuisance for building occupants.
Employ experienced workers, or professional cleaners, for cleaning.
Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from all sight-exposed
interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish resilient and terrazzo surfaces to designated shine finish.
Clean and polish glass and mirrors.
Clean bulbs and lamps.
Clean diffusers and grilles.
Clean sinks, faucets, and water closets and controls.
Broom-clean paved surfaces; rake clean other ground surfaces.
Final cleaning to be performed only after all other work and trades have been completed and building is ready
for occupancy by Owner.
Conform to all requirements established by jurisdictional authorities for environmental and pollution control.
Immediately report to project manager any deficiencies or damages to finishes, furniture, fixtures or any
surfaces in work area .
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
1.
Submittals During Progress of Construction
1.1
Submit the following during the course of construction:
.1
Construction schedule updates.
.2
Report on any damage, on conditions or problems arising out of receipt of equipment on site.
.3
Samples
.5
Page 01300-1
.1
The Contractor shall submit for the Consultant's approval such standard manufacturers' samples
as the Consultant may reasonably require. Samples shall be labelled as to origin and intended
use in the work and shall conform to the requirements of the contract documents.
.2
Submit samples where specified in each applicable trade section of the Specifications. Unless
specified otherwise make samples of adequate size to represent the material intended for use on
this project.
.3
Where the degrees of marking or colour cannot be adequately be shown in a single sample,
submit a range of samples to show the extremes of colour and marking. Identify samples with
project number, date, and name of Contractor. Materials used in building shall correspond to
approved samples for quality, colour, texture, finish, and thickness.
.4
Where the degrees of marking or colour cannot be adequately be shown in a single sample,
submit a range of samples to show the extremes of colour and marking. Identify samples with
project number, date, and name of Contractor. Materials used in building shall correspond to
approved samples for quality, colour, texture, finish, and thickness.
.5
Submit two (2) samples of each item required unless specified otherwise.
Record Drawings
.1
Maintain, as the work progresses, until project duration, one (1) set of project Record Drawings.
The full size drawings shall be in white prints while the 8-1/2" x 11" detail drawing sheets shall be
in photocopies. Refer to mechanical and electrical for their requirements.
.2
Record accurately on the Record Drawings, all changes to the Contract Documents as
constructed, such as Consultant / Engineer originated changes, Contractor / Subcontractor
originated changes, Site Instructions, Supplementary Instructions, Addenda, instructions by
correspondence and Jurisdictional Authority approvals. Carefully record location of concealed
elements as required for future maintenance, alteration work, and building additions. Delete
information made obsolete by changes, and accurately draw or duplicate instructions and indicate
all changes listed herein. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Specification Divisions for additional
requirements.
.3
Clearly mark each of the project Record Drawings "Project Record Copy". Maintain in good
condition. Make the File Copy available at all times for inspection or use by the Consultant.
.4
Keep the File Record Drawings current and do not record irrelevant information. Do not
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
Page 01300-2
permanently conceal any work until the required information has been recorded.
.5
Submit to the Consultant, the record drawings and one (1) bound photocopy of the Drawing Detail
Sheets with the application for Substantial Performance of the project.
.6
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, Shop and Interference Drawings
and in accordance with Mechanical and Electrical Divisions of the Specifications.
.7
List of Paint Materials: Submit list of paint materials in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and
Finishing.
2.
Submittals When Project is Substantially Performed
2.1
Manufacturer's Data Book and Shop Drawings
.1
Provide the Owner with shop drawings and Manufacturer's Data Books at the completion of the Project.
.2
Shop drawings shall consist of two complete sets of final "REVIEWED" and "REVIEWED AS MODIFIED"
shop drawings, on which corrections have been recorded of changes made during fabrication and installation
of unforeseen conditions. Do not include drawings which were noted "REVISE AND RESUBMIT".
.3
The Manufacturer's Data Book shall consist of two (2) bound copies of hard, black, vinyl-covered loose leaf
binders, to accommodate 8-1/2" x 11" sheets. Binders shall match in all dimensions. A title sheet labelled
"Manufacturer's Data Book" with project name, and the date of Substantial Performance and list of contents
shall precede data. Organize required material into applicable sections of work. Each section shall be
marked by labelled tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividers.
.4
The Manufacturer's Data Book shall contain:
.1
Equipment and operating instructions on all operable equipment and on all mechanical and
electrical equipment, plumbing fixtures, and architectural hardware. Notes shall be typed.
Drawings shall be neatly drafted and inked, or white-printed. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for
additional requirements.
.2
Maintenance instructions for all exterior, and interior floors, walls and ceiling surfaces.
.3
Operating and maintenance instructions for all mechanical and electrical equipment.
.4
Original brochures on all equipment.
.5
Parts lists on all equipment including a list of suppliers.
.6
All additional material used in the project beyond that indicated by brochures listed under the
various sections, showing manufacturers and sources of supply.
.7
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of the designer(s) and major contractor(s) who
worked on the building.
.8
Commissioning data such as air and water flows and regulating valve positions.
Living
project no 1504
2.2
2.3
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
Page 01300-3
Affidavits
.1
Submit to the Consultant affidavits which are specified in other Sections of the Specifications.
.2
Submit affidavits in duplicate, and signed by a responsible officer of the certifying company.
Final Hydro Inspection Certificates/Approval Certificates: Collect the following from each trade whose work requires
Electrical Safety Authority inspection / approval certificates and submit to the Consultant:
.1
Original, final Electrical Safety Authority inspection certificates.
.2
Original approval certificates (CSA, ULC, etc.) for specified equipment.
2.4
Extra Materials: Provide the Owner with extra materials for future maintenance use, as specified in the technical
Sections of the Specifications.
2.5
Plumbing, Heating and Building Inspection Certificates: Submit to the Consultant certificates of Plumbing, Heating and
Building Inspection.
2.6
Record Drawings: Refer to "Record Drawings" and "Record Specifications" articles in this section. For information to be
recorded, submit two copies of "as constructed" drawings showing all changes from the original contract documents.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01340
SHOP AND INTERFERENCE
DRAWINGS
Page 01340-1
1.
Shop Drawing General Requirements
1.1
Where specified or where deemed to be required by the Consultant, submit shop drawings to the Consultant in the
following manner:
1.1.1
Submit one (1) original and five (5) prints of each shop drawing with title block appearing at lower right-hand corner. Do
not fold originals. Submit originals in roll form to enable legible prints to be made.
1.1.2
The use of photographed Consultant's drawings for shop drawing purposes is not acceptable, unless otherwise
approved by Consultant in writing.
1.1.3
Prior to submission to the Consultant the Contractor shall review all shop drawings. By this review the Contractor
represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalogue
numbers, and similar data, or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the
requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be
indicated by stamp, date, and signature of a responsible person. The Shop Drawing shall clearly indicate whether it is
for review or for record purposes.
1.1.4
The Contractor (and Subcontractor(s) where appropriate), shall mark any information requested by the fabricator,
confirm any matters in doubt, check and sign each trade shop drawing, and make any other notations he considers
necessary before submitting to the Consultant for review.
1.1.5
Drawings requiring several or extensive changes will be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT", otherwise one (1) white
print and original will be returned marked "REVIEWED" or "REVIEWED WITH COMMENTS" and shall not be returned
to the Consultant. Drawings marked "NOT REVIEWED" are either not required, or from an unacceptable supplier.
1.1.6
Manufacturer's catalogue cuts will be acceptable, providing they are 8-1/2" x 11" originals, and they indicate all choices
including sizes, colours, model number, options, and other pertinent data. Only three (3) copies need to be submitted to
the Consultant, except for colour sample sheets.
1.2
Shop drawings shall show:
1.2.1
The name of the project.
1.2.2
Kinds of material and finishes.
1.2.3
Sections, arrangements and details which indicate complete construction, as well as all interconnections with other work.
1.2.4
Fabrication and erection dimensions, together with quantities and/or locations.
1.2.5
Assumed design loadings, all dimensions of elements and material specifications for all load-bearing members.
1.2.6
Data verifying that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance and safety of work shown on shop drawings,
as well as other work interconnected.
1.2.7
Proposed chases, sleeves, cuts, and holes in structural members.
1.2.8
The time that the fabricator considers necessary from the date that he receives the Contractor's authority to proceed
(and shop drawing is returned) until the fabricated work will be delivered to the site, and for installation, if appropriate.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01340
SHOP AND INTERFERENCE
DRAWINGS
Page 01340-2
1.2.9
A 4-1/2" x 3" high block for Consultant's review stamp, and another block of the same size for review stamp of
Contractor's Engineer.
1.3
The review by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. The
review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for
which shall remain with the Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the
Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for
information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation, and for
coordination of the work of all trades.
1.4
The review of this drawing and/or any notes added to it, does not constitute authorization to proceed with any work
which, in the Contractor's or Supplier's opinion, will involve extra cost to the Owner.
1.5
In the event of any conflict between the Contract Documents and a shop drawing, the Contract Documents shall govern.
1.6
Keep copies of "reviewed" and "reviewed with comments" shop drawings on site for Consultant's review.
2.
Interference Drawings
2.1
The Contractor shall prepare colour-coded interference drawings in order to properly coordinate the work of all trades,
such as, but not restricted to, plumbing and fire protection, sheet metal and air conditioning, electrical and building
structure.
2.2
Bear all costs involved for the preparation of these drawings and any changes to the drawings necessitated due to
interference discovered by their preparation. Advise all trades and the Consultant of any rerouting or relocation
required.
2.3
If interferences are discovered advise Consultant immediately and do not proceed until adjustments are approved.
2.4
Submit copies of drawings for the Consultant's records.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01350
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Page 01350-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
Description
1.2.1
This Section covers work for protection of environment as applicable to this Project.
1.2.2
Provisions of this Section supplement requirements of Contract Documents.
1.3
Environmental Practices
1.3.1
Implement environmentally sound practices in this Project by incorporating products that lessen burden on environment
in production, use and final disposition. Support implementation of reduction, reuse and recycling strategies and use of
environmentally sound products. Promote use of environmentally responsible packaging practices by reducing and/or
eliminating products with excessive packaging in this Project.
1.4.2
Employ environmentally sound products which are made, used and disposed of in a manner that significantly reduces
harm to environment. Product selection criteria be based on requirements of CSA Z760-94, Life Cycle Assessment and
CSA Z762-95, Design for the Environment. Use product which improves energy efficiency in its production and use,
reduces hazardous by-products, uses recycled material, and/or product itself can be recycled or reused, and/or in some
way is environmentally benign.
1.4
Build Green Products
1.4.1
Build Green Products: Building materials, building finishes, furnishings or specialty products which have a recycled
content originating from industrial, commercial, institutional or household sources, or which demonstrate efficient use of
renewable resources. These products must meet the criteria of the Build Green Labeling Program and demonstrate
current compliance with applicable codes and standards.
1.5
Packaging Requirements:
1.5.1
Implement waste reduction on this Project by using products specified in Contract Documents from manufacturers who
promote reduction and elimination of excessive packaging practices in accordance with Ont. Reg. 104/94. Adhere to
Canadian Code of Preferred Packaging Practices.
1.5.2
Use, where appropriate, combination of packaging materials such as re-usable containers, blanket wrap or cushioning
material provided that all reasonable requirements of materials handling, transportation and storage are observed.
1.5.3
Use packaging materials such as kraft paper and corrugated cartons that is made from reclaimed products to facilitate
recycling of secondary materials.
1.5.4
Use packaging material which clearly displays their recycled content and recyclability.
1.5.5
Ensure packaging materials are removed from Site and disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner.
1.6
Indoor Air Quality
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01350
Page 01350-2
1.6.1
Conform to requirements of CSA Z204-94 - Guidelines for Managing Indoor Air Quality in Office Building (Occupational
Health and Safety) including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.6.2
Commissioning process shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 15; involve Owner, Consultants, SubContractors in performance verification (including temperature control and facility automation systems) and generally as
follows;
.1
check initial operation of all equipment;
.2
verify performance of initial testing and balancing;
.3
review and assembling equipment documentation;
.4
preparation of commissioning brief; and
.5
preparation preliminary operating manual.
1.6.3
Take measures to prevent entry of dust into existing and new HVAC systems throughout construction phase.
1.6.4
Take into consideration use of electrically powered equipment on Site in lieu of gas or propane powered to reduce
possibility of carbon monoxide sickness and odours of gas or propane spreading throughout building.
1.6.5
Schedule sequence of installation of finishing materials to reduce harm to indoor air quality. Provide necessary
ventilation during and after installation of ‘wet’ products such as paints, sealants, adhesives and of ‘packaged dry’
products.
1.6.6
Isolate substances producing hazardous emissions from circulating air. Locate outside air intakes away from potential
sources of contaminations.
1.7
Dust Control and Cleaning Requirements
1.7.1
Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the latest edition of The Occupational Health and Safety Act.
1.7.2
Hazards Control
1.7.3
1.7.4
.1
Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily.
.2
Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.
.3
Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws:
.1
Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site.
.2
Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, paint thinner, excavated material or debris in
storm, sanitary drains, streams or waterways.
Undertake control measures to prevent nuisances due to dust in any phase of construction.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01350
Page 01350-3
1.7.5
Transport dusty materials in covered haulage vehicles
1.7.6
Transport wet materials in suitable watertight haulage vehicles.
1.8
Waste Disposal
1.8.1
Do not burn rubbish on Site. Obtain approval, and use following off-site disposal alternatives, depending upon materials
involved; burying, composting, recycling, municipal collection, or local dump or sanitary landfill site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
2.1.2
Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.2
During Construction
3.2.3
Execute cleaning to ensure that building, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of
waste materials and rubbish. Keep site clear of snow, mud and pooling of water due to severe rain. Ensure that work is
not stopped because of failure to provide access to site.
3.2.4
Wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust.
3.2.5
At reasonable intervals during progress of Work, clean site and public properties and dispose of waste materials, debris
and rubbish.
3.2.6
Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish.
3.2.7
Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public or private dumping areas off
Owner's property.
3.2.8
Vacuum-clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning on an asneeded basis until building is ready for Substantial Performance or occupancy.
3.2.9
Obtain from each Subcontractor, instructions which designate proper methods and materials to be use in final cleaning,
and submit such instructions to the Consultant. Include instructions in Manufacturer's Data Book specified in Section
01300, Submittals.
3.2.10
Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw materials from heights.
3.2.11
Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet,
newly painted surfaces.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01350
Page 01350-4
3.3
Final Cleaning
3.3.1
At completion of Work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials, and clean
all surfaces exposed to view; leave project clean and ready for occupancy.
3.3.2
Employ experienced workers, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning.
3.3.3
In preparation for Substantial Performance or occupancy, conduct final inspection of interior and exterior surfaces
exposed to view, and of concealed spaces.
3.3.4
Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from all sight-exposed interior and
exterior finished surfaces; polish resilient and ceramic surfaces so designated to shine finish. Vacuum carpet.
3.3.5
Clean and polish glass and mirrors.
3.3.6
Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.
3.3.7
Broom-clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
3.3.8
Clean filters, exposed ductwork, and structure.
3.3.9
Clean bulbs and lamps and replace those burned out.
3.3.10
Clean diffusers and grilles.
3.3.11
Clean sinks, faucets, and water closets and controls.
3.3.12
Remove snow and ice from access to building.
3.3.13
Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by Owner.
3.4
Removal of Temporary Facilities
3.4.1
Completely remove temporary facilities from site, including signs and foundations, making good any damage when no
longer required.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
1.
Related Requirements
1.1
Section 01300:
Submission of samples to confirm product quality
1.2
Section 01600:
Material and workmanship quality - reference standards
2.
Independent Testing and Inspection Companies
2.1
Naming of Companies
Page 01400-1
.1
The Consultant will name independent inspection and testing companies to inspect and report on compliance
of Work with the Specifications. For simplicity, independent inspection and testing companies are referred to
in the documents as "Inspector(s)".
.2
Inspection and testing by Inspector(s) is carried out for the Consultant's information and does not relieve the
Contractor from its responsibility to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2.2
Payment: Unless specified otherwise, payment for inspection and testing will be paid by the Owner.
2.3
Work to be Tested and/or Inspected: As listed in individual specification Sections.
2.4
Access to the Work: Representatives of the Inspector(s) shall have access to the Work at all times. The Contractor shall
provide assistance and facilities for such access in order that the Inspector(s) may properly perform its function.
2.5
Extent of Testing: The extent of testing and inspection and the number of tests, if not specified in the applicable technical
section of the Specifications, shall be verified with the Consultant before proceeding. Extra payment for testing and
inspection beyond what the Consultant intends will be the Contractor's responsibility.
2.6
Notification of Work to be Tested: Be responsible for notifying all Inspector(s) as to when they will be required to inspect
the work. Notify Inspector(s) at least 48 hours prior to testing.
2.7
Materials for Testing and Mock-Ups
2.7.1
Submit samples and/or materials required for testing. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence
so as not to cause delay in the Work.
2.7.2
Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and
cure test samples.
2.8
Reports: Inspector(s) will submit copies of inspection and test reports promptly to the Consultant, the Owner, the
Contractor, other applicable Consultants, and jurisdictional authorities.
3.
Contractor's Quality Control
3.1
Obtaining and payment of inspections, tests, or Engineer's stamps required by Code or Ordinances, or by a plan
approval authority and made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, unless
otherwise provided by the Contract Documents.
3.2
Be responsible for inspection or testing performed exclusively for own quality control and convenience, and testing,
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
Page 01400-2
adjustment and balancing of mechanical and electrical systems, and pay all costs associated therewith.
4.
Inspection by Consultant
4.1
Give the Consultant advance notice of shop fabrication, field erection and other phases of the Work so as to afford him
reasonable opportunity to inspect the Work for compliance with contract requirements. Failure to meet this requirement
may be cause for the Consultant to classify the Work as defective.
4.2
Uncover any Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, have the
inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.
4.3
The Consultant may order any part of the Work to be examined if such Work is suspected to be not in accordance with
the Contract Documents. If, upon examination such Work is found not in accordance with the Contract Documents,
correct such Work and pay the cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with the
Contract Documents, the Owner will pay the cost of examination and replacement.
5.
Mock-Ups
5.1
General
5.1.1
Prior to proceeding with the Work, prepare mock-ups as requested in the individual sections of the specifications and in
this section. Include for Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups.
5.1.2
Construct in specified locations or as selected by the Consultant.
5.1.3
Prepare mock-ups for Consultant's review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause
any delay in the Work.
5.1.4
Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no
claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.
5.1.5
Remove mock-ups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to Consultant.
6.
Construction Tolerances
6.1
Unless more restrictive/demanding requirements are specified in other Sections, the following construction tolerances
could be accepted:
.1
"plumb and level" - 3 mm in 3 m (1/8” in 10’-0”).
.2
"square" - 10 seconds more or less than 90 degrees.
.3
"straight" - 3 mm (1/8”) under a 3 m (10’-0”) long straight edge.
.4
Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
7.
Non-Compliance With Inspections and Tests
7.1
If the initial inspections and tests required to establish compliance with the Contract Documents indicates noncompliance with the Contract Documents, subsequent testing or re-inspection occasioned by non-compliance shall be
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
Page 01400-3
performed by the same Inspector(s) and the cost thereof borne by the Contractor.
7.2
Where factual evidence exists that defective workmanship has occurred or that work has been carried out incorporating
defective materials, the Consultant may have tests, inspections or surveys performed, analytical calculation of structural
strength made and the like in order to help determine whether the work must be replaced. Tests, inspections or surveys
carried out under these circumstances will be made at the Contractor's expense, regardless of their results, which may
be such that, in the Consultant's opinion, the work may be acceptable.
7.3
All testing shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code, except where this
would in the Consultant's opinion cause undue delay or give results not representative of the rejected material in place.
In this case, the tests shall be conducted in accordance with the standards given by the Consultant.
7.4
Materials or workmanship which fails to meet specified requirements may be rejected by the Consultant whenever found
at any time prior to final acceptance of the work regardless of previous inspection. If rejected, defective materials or
work incorporating defective materials or workmanship shall be promptly removed and replaced or repaired to the
satisfaction of the Consultant, at no expense to the Owner.
8.
Testing and Demonstration of Operable Equipment and Systems
8.1
Ensure that the Owner's representatives are adequately instructed in all aspects of operation and maintenance of
manual and automated systems and/or equipment, and all tests and adjustments have been performed to ensure
smooth, trouble free operation is achieved, in compliance with Contract Documents.
* * *
END OF SECTION
project no 1504
SECTION 01545
CONSTRUCTION HEALTH
AND SAFETY
Page 01545-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.4
1.4.1
The Contractor shall perform the Work in a safe manner and shall comply with all applicable municipal, provincial, and
federal legislation and any other regulation by authorities having jurisdiction of construction projects and contractual
obligations with the owner. In the event of conflict between any provisions on the above authorities, the most stringent
provision shall apply.
Comply with City of Timmins requirements.
References
The Occupational Health & Safety Act - Occupational Health & Safety Legislation.
Ont. Reg. 213/91 - Regulation for Construction Projects.
Ont. Reg. 516/92 - Regulation for Industrial Establishment.
Ont. Reg. 860/90 - Work Place Hazardous Material Information System (W.H.M.I.S.)
The Environment Protection Act:
.1
Ont. Reg. 347 - Waste Management
.2
Ont. Reg. 346 - Air Emissions
.3
Ont. Reg. 362 - PCBs
.4
Ont. Reg. 630 - Spills
Ont. Reg. 403/97 - Ontario Building Code 1997
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act
Workplace Safety & Insurance Board (WSIB)
CSA S350-M80 – Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures
CAN/CSA-S269.2 - Access Scaffolding for Construction Purposes.
Canadian Electric Code, Part 1 CSA C22.1-1994 (17th Edition).
Information Requirement
Prior to commencement of this contract, the Contractor must provide an Occupational Health and Safety Policy and
Procedures as described in the Occupational Health and Safety Act for review by the Consultant.
The Contractor shall provide a copy of the company's CAD7 Workplace Safety & Insurance Board Rating for review by
the Consultant.
The Contractor shall ensure and provide evidence that any individual with responsibility for the project's implementation
is a competent worker as defined in the Occupational Health and Safety Act for approval by the Consultant.
The Contractor where required by the O.H.S.A. Regulations, shall register the project with the Director of Construction
Health and Safety Branch of the Ministry of Labour within (30) thirty days of undertaking the project and prior to starting
work on the site. A copy of the registration (Notice of Project) must be posted on a visible location on the site and a
copy forwarded to the Consultant.
The Contractor shall propose the name of any competent worker as supervisor with accompanying qualification for
approval by the Consultant.
The Contractor shall draft and present to the Consultant for review an emergency plan to be used in the case of a critical
injury, accident or incident on site. This document must be kept up to date and must be discussed with all trades and
Sub-Contractors working on site.
The Contractor shall provide to the Consultant copies of all inspection reports including all accident/incident reports and
associated documentation.
The Contractor shall provide to the Consultant copies of all PR-13 and PR-14 documentation required.
Construction Safety Measures
The Contractor shall conform to and enforce strict compliance with the Occupational Health & Safety Act and
Construction Regulations, the Environmental Protection Act, Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
project no 1504
1.4.2
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
SECTION 01545
CONSTRUCTION HEALTH
AND SAFETY
Page 01545-2
(WHMIS), Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, and any other pertinent legislation for construction projects.
.1
The Contractor for purposes of the Occupational Health & Safety Act, will be designated as the constructor
for this project and will assume all of the responsibilities of the constructor set out in that Act and its
Regulations.
.2
The Contractor shall monitor the Work to ensure that all applicable Health & Safety Regulations are followed.
Violations will be documented, appropriate action taken, and records kept on file.
.3
The Contractor shall be informed of any minor violations of the Occupational Health & Safety Act or its
Regulations and shall correct such minor violations immediately.
.4
The Consultant or its authorized representative shall stop the Work immediately for any major violation of the
Occupational Health & Safety Act or its Regulations. The Contractor shall not resume the Work until any
such violation has been rectified.
.5
The Contractor shall be responsible for any delay in the progress of the Work due to a violation of legislated
or City health and safety requirements, and shall take the necessary steps to avoid delay in the final
completion of the Work without additional cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall provide a telephone, first aid kit, stretcher, blanket, eye wash station, and any other measures
foreseeable in the site office, or other appropriate location, for emergency use.
Inspections and Reports
The Contractor shall note any preventative or corrective measures taken to uphold site safety on Inspection Reports and
supply them for review by the Consultant if requested.
The Contractor shall ensure, and provide documented evidence that the work is being inspected especially as it relates
to temporary structures, bracing falsework, form work, scaffolds, work platforms, excavations, cranes and hoisting
equipment or any other area requiring inspection under the Occupational Health and Safety Act.
Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling,
storage, and disposal of hazardous materials, and regarding labelling and provision of material safety data sheets
acceptable to Labour Canada and Health and Welfare Canada.
Deliver copies of (MSDS) Material Safety Data Sheets to the Consultant on delivery of materials.
Further to the requirements of the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS), commence application
of flammable, noxious or volatile materials only after the following requirements are met:
.1
Notify the Consultant at least 48 hours in advance of the start of application and receive permission to
proceed.
.2
Provide adequate ventilation during application.
.3
Provide enclosures as required and as directed by the Consultant to contain fumes / vapours within
application area.
.4
Post warning signs and barriers as required by regulations and as directed by the Consultant to restrict
access to application area.
.5
Provide workers with necessary respiration devices to safeguard health.
.6
Provide a suitable number of fire extinguishers immediately adjacent to the area of application for volatile and
flammable materials.
.7
Material Safety Data Sheets are provided directly to the Consultant for all products brought onto Site, as
soon as such materials are brought onto Site where required by the Construction Safety Act. Additional
copies of Material Safety Data Sheets to remain on site.
Notwithstanding the requirements of preceding paragraphs, applications which might affect the well being of any
occupants and workers on Site or disrupt work of other contractors may be rescheduled by the Consultant for evening or
week-end work.
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all information regarding the handling of all materials, avoidance of
spills, cleanup, installation of materials, ventilation, smoking regulations and the like, designed to minimize the levels of
indoor air pollution in the final work shall be communicated to all subcontractors and Safety Committees.
project no 1504
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.7.5
1.7.6
1.7.7
1.7.8
1.7.9
1.7.10
1.7.11
SECTION 01545
CONSTRUCTION HEALTH
AND SAFETY
Page 01545-3
Designated Substance Requirements
The Contractor shall propose a work plan for the removal of designated substances, in accordance with all applicable
legislation, for review and discussion with the Consultant and Sub-Contractors prior to work in this area proceeding.
Where there is a requirement to dispose or store PCBs or other hazardous wastes, the Contractor shall propose a safe
handling plan for review and approval by the Consultant prior to the work in this area proceeding. Permits will have to
be secured by the Contractor, as necessary.
Prior to starting work, the Contractor shall register the project as a hazardous waste site and document the waste
generated providing documentation describing the proposed activities with the Ministry of the Environment and Energy
(MOEE).
The Contractor shall provide evidence of competency with regards to the Environmental Protection Act, Bill 309.
The Contractor shall ensure and provide evidence that all hazardous waste removed from the site is sent to a licensed
waste disposal site by a licensed carrier and advise the Consultant when necessary testing is to be carried out.
The Contractor shall retain copies of all hazardous waste manifests on file.
The Contractor shall establish and provide evidence of having established approved PCB storage facilities to
accommodate waste generated from on-site activities. Provide evidence that registration procedures are being followed.
The Contractor shall ensure that appropriate handling of all waste materials occur.
The Contractor shall perform regular inspections of the work and note the location and description of designated
substances on site and communicate the information to all Sub-Contractors/workers.
The Contractor shall inspect the project daily to monitor compliance with Designated Substances Regulations.
The Contractor shall provide access to the Consultant for review of all inspection reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
Protective Clothing, Equipment and Devices
Comply with requirements of Section 21 - Ont. Reg. 213/91.
The Contractor shall provide six safety helmets at the site for visitors. All visitors must wear safety helmets and
approved safety boots and other equipment as required.
2.2
2.2.1
Fall Protection
Comply with requirements of Section 26 - Ont. Reg. 213/91 and Section 85 - Ont. Reg. 516/92.
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
Housekeeping
Comply with requirements of Section 35-39 - Ont. Reg. 213/91 and Sections 52-58 - Ont. Reg. 213/91.
The Contractor shall implement a daily job site clean up program for all trades to maintain the Work site in a tidy and
safe condition.
.1
Keep work areas, stairways, walkways, clean of obstruction, scrap materials, lumber, rags and other debris.
.2
Pile or stack materials in a orderly manner; wedge or block materials to prevent rolling.
Provide fire extinguishing equipment in sufficient numbers. Have equipment inspected regularly and recharge when
necessary.
2.3.3
2.4
2.4.1
Ventilation and Respiratory Protection
Comply with requirements of Section 46 to 47 - Ont. Reg. 213/91 and Section 127 to 128 -Ont. Reg. 516/92.
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
Signs
Comply with requirements of Section 44 - Ont. Reg. 213/91.
The Contractor shall post signs in prominent locations and in sufficient numbers to warn workers of a hazard on a
project.
The Contractor shall post the Corporation's Safety Awareness Bulletin as supplied by the Consultant
The Contractor shall post signage restricting access to authorized personnel only. Ensure that site access is strictly
controlled.
2.5.3
2.5.4
project no 1504
SECTION 01545
CONSTRUCTION HEALTH
AND SAFETY
Page 01545-4
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
Confined Space
Comply with requirements of Section 60 to 63 - Ont. Reg. 213/91 and Section 67 to 71 - Ont. Reg. 516/92.
The Contractor shall ensure, if the Work involves entering a confined space, procedures as laid out in Sections of Ont.
Reg. 213/91 are followed. Proof of competency shall be provided upon request by the Consultant.
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
Public Way Protection
Comply with requirements of Section 64 to 66 - Ont. Reg. 213/91.
The Contractor shall ensure that every measure foreseeable is taken to protect the general public. Where necessary,
provide covered ways for public passage.
2.8
2.8.1
Access / Egress
2.9
2.9.1
Ladders
Comply with requirements of Section 78 to 84 - Ont. Reg. 213/91 and Section 18, 19 and 73 - Ont. Reg. 516/92.
2.10
2.10.1
2.10.2
2.10.3
Scaffolding and Work Platforms
Design and construct scaffolding in accordance with CSA S269.2.
The Contractor shall ensure that all scaffolding over 15 m (49’-0”) or 10 m (32’-8”), if shell and tube, is designed and
inspected by a Professional Engineer.
2.11
2.11.1
Elevating Work Platforms
Comply with requirements of Section 143 to 149 - Ont. Reg. 213/91 and Sections 51 to 54 Ont. Reg. 516/92.
2.12
2.12.1
2.12.2
Electrical/Mechanical Hazards and Lockout
Comply with requirements of Section 45 and 181 to 195 - Ont. Reg. 213/91 and Sections 40 to 44 - Ont. Reg. 516/92.
Comply with requirements of Sections 48, 60 and 188 - Ont. Reg. 213/91 and Sections 46, 72, 78 to 82 - Ont. Reg.
516/92.
2.13
2.13.1
2.13.2
Roofing
The Contractor shall follow the Safety Guidelines for Roofers issued by the Construction Safety Association of Ontario.
2.14
2.14.1
Demolition
Comply with requirements of Section 212 to 221 Ont. Reg. 213/91, Section 72 - Ont. Reg. 516/92 and CSA S350-M80 –
Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Excavations and Trenches
3.1.1
3.1.2
The Contractor shall coordinate and monitor the Work of all trades involved in trenching related work on the project.
3.1.3
If an excavation affects the stability of adjacent structures, the Contractor shall obtain the services of a Professional
Engineer at his own cost who will specify in writing precautions to be taken to protect the structure affected. This record
shall be maintained on site and strictly adhered to during the work.
3.1.4
Prefabricated, hydraulic or engineered support systems shall be designed by a Professional Engineer and a record shall
be maintained on site which includes the capability of each device.
project no 1504
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
SECTION 01545
CONSTRUCTION HEALTH
AND SAFETY
Page 01545-5
Exits and Occupied Floor Areas
Maintain all exits and accesses to exits serving portions of the building scheduled to be in use by the Owner in the event
of sequential occupancy, including corridors and doorways, free of impediments and obstructions.
Where an exit or access to exit is unavoidably blocked provide an acceptable alternate exit and/or access route, clearly
defined and protected so that it is separated from the construction area by a smoke and dust tight partition equivalent to
a 45 minute fire separation. Proposed alternate exits shall be to the satisfaction of authorities having jurisdiction.
Modifications to Fire Alarm System
Where/as work involves or necessitates modifications, connection and/or ongoing installation work to the fire alarm
system, carefully phase and schedule such work, under the direction and coordination of a technical representative of
the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment, to minimize number and duration of temporary shutdown required.
Whenever a shutdown occurs which may leave all or a portion of the premises without fire alarm protection, notify the
Owner and municipal fire department in advance of the time and estimated duration of such shutdown, so that the
Owner may institute alternate protective measures acceptable to the fire department.
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01546
FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Page 01546-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.
Fire Safety Plan
1.1
All Contractors and their personnel shall be familiar with this section and its requirements.
2.
Fire Department Briefing
2.1
The General Contractor shall coordinate arrangements for the trade Contractors to be briefed on Fire Safety at their prework conference by the Fire Chief before any work is commenced.
3.
Reporting Fires
3.1
Know the location of nearest fire alarm box and telephone, including the emergency phone number.
3.2
Report immediately all fire incidents to the Fire Department as follows:
.1
.2
activate nearest fire alarm box, or
telephone.
3.3
Person activating fire alarm box shall remain at the box to direct Fire Department to scene of fire.
3.4
When reporting a fire by telephone, give location of fire, name or number of building and be prepared to verify the
location.
4.
Interior and Exterior Fire Protection and Alarm Systems
4.1
Fire protection and alarm systems shall not be:
.1
obstructed,
.2
shut off, or
.3
left inactive at the end of a working day or shift without notification and authorization from the Fire Chief or his
representative.
4.2
Fire hydrants, standpipes and hose systems shall not be used for other than fire fighting purposes unless authorized by
the Fire Chief.
5.
Fire Extinguishers
5.1
The Contractor shall supply fire extinguishers, as scaled by the Fire Chief, necessary to protect, in an emergency, the
work in progress and the Contractor’s physical plant on site.
6.
Blockage of Roadways
6.1
The Fire Chief shall be advised of any work that would impede fire apparatus response. This includes violation of
minimum overhead clearance, as prescribed by the Fire Chief, erecting of barricades and digging of trenches.
7.
Smoking Precautions
7.1
Although smoking is not permitted in hazardous areas, care must still be exercised in the use of smoking materials in
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01546
Page 01546-2
non-restricted areas.
7.2
Smoking is not permitted within the existing building.
8.
Rubbish and Waste Materials
8.1
Rubbish and waste materials are to be kept to a minimum.
8.2
The burning of rubbish is prohibited.
8.3
All rubbish shall be removed from the work site at the end of the work day or shift or as directed.
8.4
Extreme care is required where it is necessary to store oily waste in work areas to ensure maximum possible cleanliness
and safety.
8.5
Greasy or oily rags or materials subject to spontaneous combustion shall be deposited and kept in an approved
receptacle and removed as required.
9.
Flammable Liquids
9.1
The handling, storage and use of flammable liquids are to be governed by the current National Fire Code of Canada.
9.2
Flammable liquids such as gasoline, kerosene and naptha may be kept for ready use in quantities not exceeding 45
litres provided they are stored in approved safety cans bearing the Underwriter’s Laboratory of Canada or Factory
Mutual seal of approval. Storage of quantities of flammable liquids exceeding 45 litres for work purposes, requires the
permission of the Fire Chief.
9.3
Transfer of flammable liquids is prohibited within buildings or on jetties.
9.4
Transfer of flammable liquids shall not be carried out in the vicinity of open flames or any type of heat-producing devices.
9.5
Flammable liquids having a flash point below 38oC such as naptha or gasoline shall not be used as solvents or cleaning
agents.
9.6
Flammable waste liquids for disposal, shall be stored in approved containers located in a safe ventilated area.
Quantities are to be kept to a minimum and the Fire Department is to be notified when disposal is required.
10.
Hazardous Substances
10.1
If the work entails the use of any toxic or hazardous materials, chemicals and/or explosives, or otherwise creates a
hazard to life, safety or health, work shall be in accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada.
10.2
The Fire Chief is to be advised, and a ‘Hot Work’ permit issued in all cases involving welding, burning or the use of blow
torches and salamanders, in buildings or facilities. Special precautions are necessary to safeguard life and property
from damage by fire or explosives.
10.3
Wherever work is being carried out in dangerous or hazardous areas involving the use of heat, fire watchers, equipped
with sufficient fire extinguishers shall be provided. The determination of dangerous or hazardous areas along with the
level of precaution necessary for Fire Watch shall be at the discretion of the Fire Chief. Contractors are responsible for
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01546
Page 01546-3
providing fire watch service for their work on a scale established and in conjunction with the Fire Chief at the pre-work
conference.
10.4
Where flammable liquids, such as lacquers or urethanes are to be used, proper ventilation shall be assured and all
sources of ignition are to be eliminated. The Fire Chief is to be informed prior to and at the cessation of such work.
11.
Questions and/or Clarifications
11.1
Any questions or clarification on Fire Safety in addition to the above requirements shall be directed to and cleared
through the Fire Chief.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01600
PRODUCTS AND WORKMANSHIP
Page 01600-1
1.
General
1.1
Obtain specified construction materials and equipment from suppliers in the same locality as the project as much as
possible.
1.2
Do not substitute materials, equipment or methods different from that shown on Drawings and specified, without written
approval of Consultant. Make application for approval of substitution to Consultant.
1.3
Use only materials, components and equipment which are in production. If so requested provide a precise model and
shop drawings for viewing by Consultant.
1.4
Manufacture, pack, ship, deliver and store materials and equipment so that no damage occurs to structural and
functional qualities and finished appearances.
1.5
Ensure that materials, while transported, stored, or installed, are not exposed to an environment which would increase
their moisture content beyond the maximum specified, or in a manner detrimental to their function or appearance, or
both.
2.
Transportation and Handling of Materials
2.1
Schedule early deliveries of materials to enable work to be executed without delay. Before delivery, arrange for
receiving at site.
2.2
Deliver packaged materials and equipment and store until use, with manufacturer's seals and labels intact.
2.3
Label packaged goods to describe contents, quantities, and other information as specified.
3.
Storage and Protection of Materials
3.1
Store materials on site or in storage sheds with secure protection against all harmful environmental conditions. Prevent
damage, adulterations, staining, and soiling of materials while stored.
3.2
Store manufactured materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3
Store steel, lumber, masonry units, precast concrete work, and similar materials on platforms raised clear of ground.
3.4
Store finished materials and woodwork under cover at all times.
3.5
All damaged materials will be rejected for use and thereupon shall be immediately removed from site.
3.6
Note: DO NOT store any material on roofing which will cause damage to membrane. This applies to lumber, steel, wood
cases, pipes, conduits, insulation, concrete block or any other materials.
4.
Anchoring Devices
4.1
In addition to requirements for fastening devices specified in the technical Sections of the Specifications, include for all
fastenings, inserts, anchors, and accessories required for execution of work, and be entirely responsible for their
installation.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01600
PRODUCTS AND WORKMANSHIP
Page 01600-2
4.2
Unless specified otherwise in the technical sections of the Specifications, use metal fastenings of same material as the
metal component they are anchoring, of metal which will not set up electrolytic action which could cause damage to
fastenings or components under moist conditions. In general, use non-corrosive or hot-dipped galvanized steel as
exterior anchors for windows, roofing, sheet metal, and anchors occurring on or in an exterior wall or slab or interior wet
areas such as showers, janitors, garbage rooms, kitchens, or similar spaces where moisture will be present.
4.3
If exposed fastenings and accessories are allowed by the Documents in finished areas, use fastenings and accessories
of same texture, colour and finish as base metal on which they occur. Keep such exposed fastenings and accessories
to a minimum, spaced and laid out evenly and neatly and cut off to make them as inconspicuous as possible, but still
provide necessary securement.
4.4
Install anchoring devices in such a manner as to provide positive, permanent anchorage of unit to be anchored in
position. Space anchors within limits of their capacities. Select all anchoring devices to have a safety factor of four (4)
against failure for their design load.
4.5
Install fastenings of permanent type. Do not install wood plugs.
4.6
Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not permitted.
4.7
The use of explosive powder tools will not be permitted under any circumstances unless equipped with a device which
positively prevents free flight of the stud.
5.
Workmanship and Qualifications of Workers
5.1
Use competent experienced workers, thoroughly skilled in the trade in which they are performing work.
5.2
Strictly follow manufacturer's written instructions, directions and specifications when performing the work. If instructions
are not available, obtain directions from the manufacturer in writing before proceeding. The proceeding of work without
this direction is the Contractor's responsibility. It is the Contractor's responsibility to conform to Code requirements in the
event that manufacturer's instructions and directions conflict with the Ontario Building Code.
5.3
Be responsible for obtaining up-to-date changes in manufacturer's application procedures.
6.
Workmanship
6.1
Notify the Consultant in writing if these Specifications and/or Drawings conflict in any way with manufacturer's
instructions. The Consultant will then rule which specifications shall be followed. If applicable, a copy of those
instructions shall be made available at job site.
* * *
END OF SECTION
project no 1504
SECTION 01630
PRODUCT OPTIONS
Page 01630-1
1.
Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere
Generally, but not limited to the following:
1.1 Section Submittals
1.2 Section 01340, Shop drawings.
1.3 Section 01600, Products and Workmanship
2.
Product Options (including substitutions)
General:
The specifications reflect a base bid template, wherein it is recognized that (other) materials and /or products exist
which may comply with project requirements in addition to the technical requirements of the design as reflected in the
construction documents. The Contractor has options.
Products referenced in the specifications do not relieve the contractor of the responsibility to prove compliance of those
products. The products and/or materials reflected in the construction documents represent probable representations at
the time of preparing construction documents.
Contractor's Options :
1. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting project specification standards and
requirements, by any manufacturer.
2. In order to establish standards of quality, the Consultant has in the Specifications, referred to certain products by
name and catalogue number. Where the drawings have shown specific detailing, dimensions, ratings,
characteristics and other performance criteria the details are based on one specific manufacturer and not
combinations of more than one.
3. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturer's, select the product and manufacturer deemed
to be most suitable for the requirements of the project
4. For products specified by naming one or more products, but indicating the phrase "or alternate approved by
Consultant" after specified product, Contractor must submit request for substitution, for any product not specifically
named.
5. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer the contractor may propose product options
subject to the conditions described herein.
6. For products not specifically named, compliance with the construction documents is implied.
Substitution(s) for ‘Cause” and/or ‘Convenience’:
The Contractor (and all sub-contractors) must demonstrate, by way of their submissions, that any/all products and/or
substitutions are made as substitutions for ‘cause’ in support of the project and the intent of the contract documents.
Substitutions deemed as substitutions for ‘convenience’ will not be considered and allowed.
The distinction made regarding substitution for ‘cause’ or ‘convenience’ identified for substitution or options is intended to
allow the contractor to access the marketplace for legitimate options and it is intended to discourage frivolous,
inadequately researched or untimely substitutions.
2.1
During bidding, the Consultant will consider written requests from prime bidders for product options , received at least
seven (7) working days prior to bid closing date; requests received after that time will not be considered nor will requests
without complete documentation be considered.
2.2
All considerations/requests for product options and /or, for substitution be it during bidding or at construction stage shall
include complete data substantiating compliance with the Contract Documents. The onus and responsibility resides with
the contractor to demonstrate product option compliance.
For Cause: Demonstrate rational/reason for substitution and/or Product Option proposed. Submit in writing.
For products:
2.2.1
2.2.2
project no 1504
SECTION 01630
PRODUCT OPTIONS
Page 01630-2
.1
.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.
Manufacturer's literature:
.1
Product description,
.2
Performance test data.
.3
Reference standards.
.3
Samples.
.4
Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, and date of installation, where possible
For construction methods:
.1
Detailed description of proposed method.
.2
Drawings illustrating methods.
Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified.
For Construction Schedule: Support documentation vis a vis any impact on project schedule.
For Cost Consideration (s): Indicate whether Product Option or a proposed substitution is cost saving, cost neutral or a
cost increase. Submit cost back-up. Provide additional information as requested by consultant.
Relation to (any) separate contracts.
2.3
In making request for substitution and/or Product Options, the Contractor represents:
.1
Substitution for ‘Cause’
.2
Contractor has thoroughly investigated proposed product or method, and determined that it is equal or
superior in all respects to that specified.
.4
Contractor will provide the substitution with the same guarantee as that for product or method specified.
.5
Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, making such changes as may be
required for work to be complete in all respects.
.6
Requests for substitutions during construction shall state what cost difference if any, will be made in the
Contract Price for each substitution, should it be accepted.
2.4
Substitutions and/or Product Options will not be considered if:
.1
Substitution for ‘Cause’ is not demonstrated, whereupon the consultant will reject the proposed substitution
.2
They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or project data submittals without formal request.
.3
Acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.
2.5
Costs associated with Substitutions and/or Product Options considered and accepted by the Consultant and /or owner
that require revisions to the construction documents and/or additional co-ordination will be charged to the Contractor and
deducted by way of a change order and payment made directly to the Consultant.
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01900
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
BUILDING ENVELOPE
Page 01900-1
1.
1.1
Description of Work
This Section includes parameters for the general design and performance for the work of Sections which comprise, or
interface, with the building envelope for walls, floor and roof systems including but not limited to concrete, wood
cladding, masonry cladding, soffits, aluminum and vinyl windows, entrances and roofing.
2.
2.1
2.1.1
Design
General
Design and engineer, as required in the individual specifications Sections, fabricate, erect, and/or install building
envelope in compliance with the 2012 Ontario Building Code, and other regulations and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
Take into account construction tolerance limitations, creepage, deflection and other movements of the structure.
Accommodate, by means of expansion and contraction provisions, any movement in the building envelope assemblies
themselves and between the assemblies and the building structure. Allow for expansion and contraction of components
caused by ambient temperature range, surface temperature variation of components, wind, seismic forces, structural
deflection and racking; without causing misalignment of joints, breakage of joints and air/vapour barriers, water and air
penetration through the assembly, glass breakage, or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
Method of attachment to the structure shall take into account site peculiarities so that site and air vibrations or normal
temperature movements of the building do not loosen, weaken and/or fracture the connection between building
envelope assembly components and the structure or between the components themselves.
Reinforce building envelope assembly components, as required, so that the members can safely sustain design loads.
Assemble and secure assemblies in manner which will keep stresses on sealants within the sealant manufacturer's
recommended maximum performance levels.
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
Rain Screen Principle:
Except where detailed otherwise construct building envelope assemblies based on the "Rain Screen" principle as
advocated by the National Research Council of Canada.
All voids between the assembly components as well as those between components and the structure shall have
gaskets, baffles, overlaps, seals and compartmentalization as required to provide a barrier "Rain Screen" to effectively
prevent excessive rain water entry into any of the building envelope cavities but to allow pressure equalization of cavity
air spaces.
Air barriers and seals are required to prevent entry of interior building air into building envelope cavities, and exterior air
into the building. Air barriers and seals shall be able to withstand wind design pressures.
Such provisions in the form of openings between cavities and the building exterior of sufficient cross sections to provide
adequate pressure equalization. All openings shall be effectively baffled against direct rain water entry.
Thermal separators, isolators and seals placed to eliminate contact between interior humid air and a cold surface or
structural component to prevent condensation and ice build-up on such surfaces during cold weather.
2.3
2.3.1
Water, Vapour and Moisture
Comply with the design and performance requirements specified in the building code, and as specified herein, including
the following principles:
.1
Drain to the exterior face of the assembly, any water entering at joints and any condensation occurring within
the building envelope assembly.
.2
Design, fabricate and install the assembly to be watertight to the interior under the interior and exterior design
conditions in combination with movements occurring due to loads imposed.
.3
At design conditions no water penetration to the building interior side of the assembly shall occur.
2.3.2
The requirements for an air barrier and a vapour barrier are intended to be provided at the same plane in the building
envelope design unless otherwise indicated or specified. In such cases, the Drawings and Specifications refer to "air /
vapour barrier" or such terms as “transition membrane”. The definition of the air/vapour barrier for the purpose of these
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 01900
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
BUILDING ENVELOPE
Page 01900-2
Specifications is "a continuous membrane including joints of membrane between components and to adjacent
construction which prevents or retards penetration of moisture laden air and the diffusion of water vapour through it".
.1
The maximum water vapour transmission of all components forming the vapour barrier shall be (1.72 ng/Pa x
s x m2) (0.3 Imperial Perms) unless specified otherwise.
.2
At design conditions no condensation shall occur on room side surfaces.
2.4
Sound: Provide completed installations free from vibrations, wind whistles and noise due to thermal and structural
movement and wind pressure.
2.5
Seismic: Fabricate and erect cladding assemblies to prevent damage due to earthquake forces as required by The
Ontario Building Code.
2.6
Insulation: Ensure and provide continuity and integrity of insulation horizontally and vertically (i.e sectionally) across all
assemblies. Discuss interference issues prior to proceeding with the work.
3.
3.1
3.1.3
Quality Control
General
Materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time. Co-operate in permitting access for inspection to
all places where work is being done or stock is being stored. Refer to Section 01400, Quality Control and related
Sections.
Testing is specified in the technical sections of specifications. All costs for inspection and testing are by the General
Contractor. Pay for inspections and re-testing to verify acceptability of corrected work.
Allow sufficient time for testing, evaluation, alterations and re-testing as required so as not to interrupt the Progress
Schedule for the Project.
The Consultant may require testing of connections and special prefabricated inserts, as part of the work of this Section.
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
4.
4.1
4.2
Thermography, Air Leakage Test:
On completion of the building envelope installation, thermographic testing and air leakage testing may be done to
evaluate the continuity of the installations and to establish possible problem areas such as air leakage or heat loss,
which would require further investigation of such potentially defective areas.
If, as the result of testing and investigation, it is determined that the building envelope does not conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents, take responsibility for and pay cost of necessary remedial action to correct
such defects, including work of other Subcontractors affected by the remedial work, and including cost of re-testing to
verify acceptability of corrected work.
Sealants
Sealants used for the various building envelope assemblies shall be selected from those specified in the respective
assembly Section, and shall be co-ordinated with the sealant being provided under other building envelope Sections.
Preferably, one (1) sealant by the same manufacturer shall be used throughout. If different sealants are selected, from
those specified, it is the responsibility of the respective Section to ensure compatibility between selected sealant,
substrates, and sealants of other Sections which come in contact with the selected sealant.
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 02000
SITE WORK GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
Page 02000-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
Setting Out
Be responsible for vertical and horizontal control by setting centre lines, batter boards and grade pickets from reference
points and bench marks provided by Consultant.
1.3
1.3.1
Minor Location Changes
Consultant at his discretion may direct or approve minor changes requested by Contractor in route or location of new
utilities or structures during construction. However, any such change in location shall not be considered as a basis for a
claim for extra compensation regardless of reason for changing location.
1.4
1.4.1
Dust and Dirt Control
Control dust on the construction site and access roads.
1.5
1.5.1
Maintenance of Traffic
Maintain traffic on public roadways at all times.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 02220
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
Page 02220-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
References
OPSS 1010-93
1.2
1.2.1
Quality Assurance
Carry out the work of this Section in strict accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Trench Excavators
Protection Act (Section 4.2.5 of the Ontario Building Code) and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Shoring and trench timbering, in addition to requirements of local authorities shall be carried out in accordance with
requirements of The Occupational Health and Safety Act, specified herein for Construction Projects, and other
applicable regulations of Ontario Ministry of Labour. In addition, follow recommendations of Construction Safety
Association brochure "Shoring and Timbering in Trenches", 1981, wherever applicable.
1.3.2
Material Specification for Aggregates - Granular A, B, M and Select
Subgrade Material
1.3
1.3.1
Inspection and Testing
Refer to the requirements of Section 02260, Soil Compaction and Division One for types and frequency of testing
required.
1.4
Not Used
1.5
1.5.1
Definitions
Rock excavation: excavation of material from solid masses of igneous, sedimentary or metamorphic rock which, prior to
its removal, was integral with its parent mass, and boulders or rock fragments having individual volume in excess of 35
cu. ft. (1.0 m3).
Common excavation: excavation of materials of whatever nature, which are not included under definition of rock
excavation including dense tills, hardpan, frozen materials and partially cemented materials which can be ripped and
excavated with heavy construction equipment.
Topsoil: material capable of supporting good vegetative growth and suitable for use in top dressing, landscaping and
seeding.
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
Protection - General
Provide all necessary barriers and other protection to open excavations and maintain lighting for safe pedestrian and
vehicular traffic.
Support abutting property and structure to maintain work safe to life, limb and property. Comply strictly with the
Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects and all other applicable safety
regulations in force.
Protect existing buildings and surface features which may be affected by work from damage while work is in progress
and repair damage resulting from work.
Protection of Existing Utilities and Structures
Size, depth and location of existing utilities and structures as indicated on drawings are for guidance only.
Completeness and accuracy are not guaranteed. Prior to commencing work of this Section, notify applicable Owner or
authorities, establish the location and extent of all underground utility lines occurring in the work area to prevent
damage or disturbance during execution of the Work.
Maintain and protect from damage water, sewer, gas, electric, telephone and other utilities and structures encountered.
Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful test excavations.
Maintain, re-route or extend as required and approved, existing utility lines which pass through the work area and which
must remain. Obtain direction from Consultant before moving or otherwise disturbing utilities or structures.
Record accurate location of abandoned and active utility lines re-routed or extended.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 02220
Page 02220-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
Granular ‘A’ Fill
Class ‘A’ Granular Fill: screened, crushed aggregate conforming to the following Ontario Provincial Standard
Specification OPSS 1010, March 1993, for Granular ‘A’ Aggregate and the following gradation requirements:
MTO Sieve Designation
Percentage Passing by Weight
26.5 mm
16.0 mm
13.2 mm
9.5 mm
4.75 mm
1.18 mm
300 um
75 um
**
2.2
2.2.1
100
85 – 100
65 – 90
50 – 73
35 – 55
15 – 40
5 – 22
2 – 8 **
where the aggregate is obtained from a quarry or slag source
Granular ‘B’ Fill
Granular ‘B’ Fill: free of clay, shale and composed of clean, hard, durable uncoated particles from deposits of gravel or
sand, talus rock or quarried rock, 4” (100 mm) minus, to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, March
1993, for Granular ‘B’ aggregate or pit run on crushed gravel acceptable to the inspection agency and the following
gradation requirements:
150 mm
26.5 mm
19.0 mm
16.0 mm
4.75 mm
1.18 mm
300 um
75 um
*
2.3
2.3.1
1.06”
0.75”
0.53”
0.375”
No. 4
No. 16
No. 50
No. 200
6.00”
1.06”
0.75”
0.625”
No. 4
No. 16
No. 50
No. 200
100
50 – 100
n/a
48 – 100
20 – 100
10 – 100
2 – 65
0–8
(0 – 10) *
where the aggregate is obtained from a quarry
Granular ‘B’ Type II
Granular ‘B’ Type II fill; OPSS granular B type II shall be free of clay, shale and composed of clean, hard, durable
uncoated particles from quarried rock, and the following gradation requirements:
150 mm
26.5 mm
4.75 mm
1.18 mm
300 um
75 um
100
50 - 100
20 - 55
10 - 40
5 - 22
0 -10
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 02220
Page 02220-3
If the material does not meet above requirements a new source shall be found or
material shall be crushed and screened to suit.
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
Bedding Fill in Trenches
Earth Trenches to 600 mm (2') Above Mechanical Pipe Work: Clean, natural, unwashed gravel or sand, ranging in size
from medium gravel to medium sand, 100% passing 25 mm (1") sieve and 95% to 100% retained on 250 um (No. 60
sieve).
Earth Trenches - 100 mm (4") Envelope Surrounding Electrical Raceways and Wiring: Fine aggregate (sand) for
concrete, graded, CSA-A23.1/A23.2.
Top Portion of Earth Trenches Specified Above, Concrete Trenches and Other Mechanical and Electrical Work in Areas
Not to be Paved and Not to Receive Floor Slabs: Earth fill as specified in Paragraph 2.
Top Portion of Earth Trenches Specified Above, Concrete Trenches and Other Mechanical and Electrical Work Under
Paved Areas and Areas to Receive Floor Slabs: Granular fill as specified in Paragraphs 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3.
Earth Fill
Earth fill for use for rough grading shall be clean excavated earth or clay fill materials free of, waste materials, debris of
any nature, frozen material, organic matter, muskeg, topsoil, or cohesive matter and rocks larger than 100 mm (4") in
diameter. If sufficient quantity of material is not available from excavation, use imported fill having same, or better,
characteristics
Provide minimum 12” (300 mm) depth under all sodded and landscaped areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.5
3.5.1
Site Preparation
Before beginning excavation locate and mark all active buried utilities and services and protect from damage. Take all
necessary precautions to protect the existing building form damage.
Remove obstructions, snow and ice, from surfaces to be excavated within limited prescribed.
Cut pavement or sidewalk neatly along limits of proposed excavation in order that surface may break evenly and
cleanly.
Clear and remove obstructions to excavating. Remove trees and stumps not required to be retained, as indicated on
Drawings.
Establish accurate lines and levels as required and supply batter boards, line stakes and templates and establish
permanent reference lines and bench marks required.
Stockpiling
Strip area of Site to be excavated or graded free of sod and topsoil and stockpile separately on Site. Stockpile topsoil
and fill materials in areas designated by Owner. Stockpile granular materials in manner to prevent segregation.
Dispose of surplus sod and topsoil, if any, on site in areas designated by Owner..
Cofferdams, Shoring, Bracing and Underpinning
Construct temporary works to depths, heights, and locations as required by regulations and as required to protect
workmen and the public.
During backfill operations:
.1
Remove sheeting and shoring from excavations unless otherwise indicated or as directed by Consultant.
.2
Do not remove bracing until backfilling has reached respective levels of such bracing.
.3
Pull sheeting in increments that will ensure compacted backfill is maintained at an elevation at least 2’-0”
(600 mm) above toe of sheeting
Water on Site
Keep excavations free of water by bailing, pumping or a system of drainage as required and provide pumps, suction
and discharge lines or well points of sufficient capacity and maintain until such time as permanent drainage system is
installed.
Living
project no 1504
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.6.7
3.6.8
3.6.9
3.6.10
3.6.11
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.8
3.8.1
SECTION 02220
Page 02220-4
Take necessary measures to prevent flow of water into excavation. Control the grading in and adjacent to the
excavation to prevent water running into the excavated areas and to prevent damage due to surface run-off.
Keep excavations free of water while work is in progress.
Dispose of water in manner not detrimental to public and private property, or any portion of work completed or under
construction.
Excavation
Excavation shall include all strata except rock excavation including frozen materials which can be ripped and excavated
with heavy construction equipment.
The Contractor shall lay out the building lines and establish and mark all floor levels. Excavations shall be to extent, and
elevations indicated on drawings. Excavation shall be to size and depth to accommodate proper construction operation
and inspection.
Establish accurate lines and levels as required and supply batter boards, line stakes and templates and establish
permanent reference lines and bench marks required.
Provide sufficient space to permit removal of formwork, application of dampproofing and/or waterproofing as scheduled.
Remove concrete, masonry, paving walks and rubble and other obstructions encountered during excavation.
The Contractor shall make certain that all sides of excavated area are cut on a stable slope; otherwise sides must be
shored and braced to maintain stability and safety. The design and installation of all shoring and bracing shall be the
sole responsibility of the Contractor. Any findings by the Contractor of unstable soil at indicated building elevations must
be reported to the Consultant immediately.
Protect the bottom and sides of excavations and trenches from freezing and from exposure to wet weather to prevent
cave-ins and softening of bed upon which concrete or drains rest. Keep surfaces against which concrete or fill is placed
free of frost. Thaw out frozen surfaces beneath concrete slabs, paving or structure requiring firm foundation to unfrozen
depth. Remove thawed softened material to firm base and fill void with well compacted clean dry fill of quality as herein
specified
Keep bottoms of excavations clean and clear of loose materials, leveled and stepped at changes of levels with
exception of excavations made for drainage purposes and those to slope as required. Excavations must not interfere
with normal 45 degree splay of bearing from bottom of any footing.
Excavate areas under concrete slabs on grade and where permanent roads and walks will occur to depth required and
sufficient to expose firm undisturbed subsoil, free from loose, soft or organic matter.
Remove soft, wet or unconsolidated soils, muskeg and organic material encountered in excavations and fill void and any
wells, slumps, cesspools or similar pits with well compacted clean dry fill of quality as herein specified. Where these
conditions occur under or near footings obtain direction from Consultant before proceeding.
After completion of excavation and prior to placing any concrete on bearing strata or placing of fill, notify Consultant to
inspect exposed bearing surfaces. Do not proceed without authorization.
Trench Excavation
Excavate for mechanical and electrical lines under supervision and in coordination with trade requiring such excavation.
Respective mechanical and electrical subtrades shall be responsible for bedding of their line(s) and backfilling to a point
12” (300 mm) above line(s).
Above the above point backfill trench with Granular ‘B’ fill placed in 6” (150 mm) layers and compacted prior to placing
subsequent layer. Compaction shall be as specified for other fill in areas.
Backfilling
General:
.1
For backfilling, use granular material herein specified, free from waste, organic matter and other
objectionable foreign matter. Do not use any kind of frozen material. Clay is not to be used under any
circumstances as backfilling material. All fill materials shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior
to the commencement of any backfilling operations
.2
Backfill and fill to new surface grades as shown on drawings, leaving proper allowance for landscaping
material. Refer to Section concerned. Place backfill in uniform layers of maximum 12” (300 mm) and
compact as per Section 02260, Soil Compaction.
Living
project no 1504
.3
SECTION 02220
Page 02220-5
Samples of proposed fill materials shall be submitted to the designated testing agency for analysis and
approval prior to commencing any backfilling.
3.8.2
Backfilling Foundations:
.1
Around foundation walls promptly backfill excavations as work permits, but not before walls, piers and other
structural elements have attained adequate strength and not before less than seven (7) days. Exterior wall
backfilling and interior backfilling must proceed concurrently to maintain the same elevations so as not to
overstress or displace the walls.
.2
Backfill to indicated levels on interior and to within 12” (300 mm) of finished grade, or as required to suit site
grading on exteriors with Granular ‘B’ fill placed in maximum 12” (300 mm) layers, compacting each layer
prior to placing subsequent layers.
.3
Do not backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete within 24 hours after placing.
.4
Place backfill carefully to prevent damage to foundations, dampproofing, waterproofing and insulation.
3.8.3
Slabs-on-Grade:
.1
Refer to Structural Drawings and Specifications.
3.9.4
Driveways, Parking Areas, Walks and Curbs:
.1
Refer to Civil Drawings and Specifications.
3.10
3.10.1
Compaction
Compaction shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Section 02260, Soil Compaction.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 02226
TOPSOIL AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 02226-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
Scheduling of Work
Schedule finish grading and placing of topsoil so as to minimize surface erosion and leaching out of soil supplements
before sodding and seeding are completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
2.2.1
Materials
Imported topsoil: friable, neither heavy clay nor of very light sandy nature containing minimum of 4% organic matter for
clay loams and 2% for sandy loams to maximum of 20% by volume. Free from subsoil, roots, grass, weeks, toxic
materials, stones, foreign objects and with an acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5. Topsoil containing crabgrass, couchgrass
or noxious weeds is not acceptable.
Fertilizer: Complete commercial synthetic slow release fertilizer with maximum 35% water-soluble nitrogen, formulation
as per soil analysis recommendation.
Lime:
.1
Ground agricultural limestone containing minimum 85% of total carbonates.
.2
Gradation requirements: percentage passing by weight, 90% passing 1 mm (0.040”) sieve, 50% passing 0.1
mm (0.005”) sieve.
.3
Use lime as indicated by acidity analysis of topsoil to bring pH to required level.
.4
Bonemeal: raw bonemeal, finely ground with a minimum analysis of 3% nitrogen and 20% phosphoric acid.
.5
Sulphur: finely crushed agricultural elemental sulphur, free of impurities.
.6
Peatmoss: Decomposed plant material, fairly elastic and homogeneous, free of decomposed colloidal
residue, wood, sulphur, and iron; containing minimum 60% organic matter by weight and moisture content not
exceeding 15%. Shredded particles may not exceed 1/4” (6 mm) in size. Minimum pH value peat 4.5
maximum 6.0.
Soil Mixtures for Planting
Planting soil: for trees, shrubs, planting beds and planters: mix imported topsoil with 25% peatmoss. Incorporate
bonemeal into mixture at a rate of 1-3/4 lbs. (1 kg) of bonemeal per cu. yd. (m3) of soil mixture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
Preparation
Grade subgrade, eliminating uneven areas and low spots, ensuring positive drainage. Remove debris, roots, branches,
stones in excess of 2” (50 mm) diameter and other deleterious materials. Remove subsoil that has been contaminated
with oil, gasoline or calcium chloride. Dispose of removed materials.
Cultivate entire area which is to receive topsoil to depth of 4” (100 mm). Repeat cultivation in those areas where
equipment used for hauling and spreading has compacted subgrade.
Spreading of Topsoil
Spread topsoil with adequate moisture in uniform layers during dry weather over approved, dry, unfrozen subgrade,
where seeding, sodding, planting is indicated.
Keep topsoil 1-1/2” (40 mm) below finished grade for sodded areas; elsewhere bring topsoil up to finished grade. Apply
topsoil to the following minimum depths: 4” (100mm) for sodded and seeded areas 16” (400 mm) for shrub beds and
planting beds.
Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, construction materials, debris and foreign non-organic objects from topsoil.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 02226
TOPSOIL AND FINISH
GRADING
Page 02226-2
3.2.4
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
Manually spread topsoil around trees and plants.
Application of Fertilizer
Apply fertilizer at least one week after lime application and at least six (6) days before sodding.
Spread fertilizer with mechanical spreaders over entire area of topsoil at rate determined on basis of soil sample test.
Mix fertilizer thoroughly into upper 2” (50 mm) of topsoil.
3.4
3.4.1
Finish Grading
Fine grade mechanically or manually entire topsoiled area to contours and elevations as indicated. Eliminate rough
spots and low areas to ensure positive drainage.
Fine grade and loosen topsoil prior to sodding. Eliminate rough spots and low areas to ensure positive drainage.
Prepare loose friable sod bed by means of discing and subsequent raking. Roll lightly and rake wherever topsoil is too
loose.
Roll topsoil with 100 lb. (45 kg) roller, minimum 24” (600 mm) wide, to compact and retain surface.
Leave surface smooth, uniform, firm against deep foot printing, with a fine loose texture.
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
Part 1
1.1
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.2
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.3
.1
Part 2
2.1
.1
Part 3
3.1
.1
.2
.3
3.2
.1
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
.2
.3
.1
.2
.3
.1
.2
.1
.1
.2
SECTION 02231
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Page 02231-1
General
RELATED SECTIONS
Division One, General Requirements is part of this section and shall apply as if repeated here.
Section 02220 - Excavation and Backfilling.
Section 02225 – Selective Site Demolition
Section 02315 - Rock Removal.
DEFINITIONS
Clearing consists of cutting off trees and brush vegetative growth to not more than a specified height above
ground and disposing of felled trees, previously uprooted trees and stumps, and surface debris.
Close-cut clearing consists of cutting off standing trees, brush, scrub, roots, stumps and embedded logs,
removing at, or close to, existing grade and disposing of fallen timber and surface debris.
Clearing isolated trees consists of cutting off to not more than specified height above ground of designated
trees, and disposing of felled trees and debris.
Underbrush clearing consists of removal from treed areas of undergrowth, deadwood, [and trees smaller than
50 mm trunk diameter] and disposing of all fallen timber and surface debris.
Grubbing consists of excavation and disposal of stumps, roots and boulders and rock fragments of specified
size to not less than a specified depth below existing ground surface.
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
Prevent damage to fencing. Trees, landscaping, natural features, bench marks, existing buildings, existing
pavement, utility lines, root systems of trees which are to remain.
.1
Repair any damaged items to approval of Consultant.
.2
Replace any trees designated to remain, if damaged, as directed by Consultant.
Products
MATERIALS
Stockpile existing topsoil from the site in an area designated by the Owner for reuse on the site. Existing
topsoil shall be clear of stumps, roots, branches, leaves and boulders larger than 100mm diameter.
Execution
PREPARATION
Inspect site and verify items designated to remain with Consultant.
Locate and protect utility lines. Preserve in operating condition active utilities traversing site.
Notify utility authorities and public works department at the City of Greater Sudbury before starting clearing
and grubbing.
CLEARING
Clear, as indicated by Consultant, by cutting at a height of not more than 300 mm above ground. In areas to
be subsequently grubbed, height of stumps left from clearing operations to be not more than 1000 mm above
ground surface.
Cut off branches overhanging area cleared as directed by Consultant.
Cut off unsound branches on trees designated to remain as directed by Consultant.
CLOSE CUT CLEARING
Close cut clearing to ground level.
Cut off branches overhanging area cleared as directed by Consultant.
Cut off unsound branches on trees designated to remain as directed by Consultant.
ISOLATED TREES
Cut down isolated trees as indicated by Consultant at height of not more than 300 mm above ground surface.
Grub out isolated tree stumps.
UNDERBRUSH CLEARING
Clear underbrush from areas as indicated at ground level.
GRUBBING
Grub out stumps and roots to not less than 400 mm below ground surface.
Grub out visible rock fragments and boulders, greater than 100 mm in greatest dimension, but less than 0.25
m3.
Living
project no 1504
3.7
.1
3.8
.2
.3
.1
SECTION 02231
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
Remove cleared and grubbed materials off site.
Chip and stockpile cleared and grubbed vegetative material on site as directed by Consultant.
Remove diseased trees identified by Consultant and dispose of this material off site.
FINISHED SURFACE
Leave ground surface in condition suitable for stripping of topsoil to approval of Consultant.
END OF SECTION
Page 02231-2
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 02395
SODDING AND SEEDING
Page 02395-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
Delivery and Storage
Schedule deliveries in order to keep storage at job site to minimum without causing delays.
Deliver, unload and store sod on pallets.
Deliver sod to site within twenty four (24) hours of being lifted and lay sod within thirty six (36) hours of being lifted.
Do not deliver small, irregular or broken pieces of sod.
During wet weather allow sod to dry sufficiently to prevent tearing during lifting and handling.
During dry weather protect sod from drying and water sod as necessary to ensure its vitality and prevent dropping of soil
in handling. Dry sod will be rejected.
1.3
1.3.1
Scheduling
Coordinate work with that of Section 02265, Topsoil and Finish Grading, to avoid excessive time between finished
grading and topsoil and the sodding of any given area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
Hydro Seeding Mixture
Seed mix:
.1
Mini Mow from OSC Seeds
.2
Fox Sedge
Supplied by OSC Seeds Waterloo, Ontario or other supplier approved by the Consultant.
Seeding Rate: as noted.
2.2
2.1.1
Nursery Sod
Number One Kentucky Bluegrass / Fescue Sod: sod grown from minimum 40% Kentucky Bluegrass, 30% Creeping
Red Fescue. Quality and source to comply with standards outlined in “Guide Specification for Nursery Stock”, Section
17, 1978 Edition, published by Canadian Nursery Trades Association.
2.3
2.2.1
Water
Potable, free of impurities that would inhibit germination, minimum 890 gal./acre for slurry.
2.4
2.3.1
Fertilizer
Shall be complete synthetic slow release fertilizer with maximum 35% water-soluble nitrogen as per topsoil report.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
Workmanship
Keep site well drained.
Clean up immediately soil or debris spilled onto pavement and dispose of deleterious materials.
3.2
Seed Application
Cultivate areas to be seeded to a depth of 1” (25 mm). Fine grade free of humps and hollows and free of
deleterious and refuse material.
Obtain Consultant’s approval of topsoil grade and depth before starting seeding.
3.2.1
3.2.2
Living
project no 1504
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.7
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
SECTION 02395
SODDING AND SEEDING
Page 02395-2
Do not seed areas with standing surface water.
Seed area during early spring or, after 15th of September, to within 4 weeks of freeze-up when enough natural
moisture is available to ensure germination and growth.
Measure all quantities of material by mass or mass-calibrated volume measurement, to satisfaction of
Consultant.
Seed to cover all areas as directed.
The soil should be tightly worked to ensure seed comes in full and complete contact with soil.
Maintenance of Seeded Areas
Keep soil moist during germination period and adequately water grassed areas.
Apply water in sufficient quantities to ensure moisture penetration of 2” (50 mm). Control sprinkling to prevent
wash-outs.
Apply water in sufficient quantities to ensure moisture penetration of 2” (50 mm). Control sprinkling to prevent
wash-outs.
Maintain grassed areas free of pests and disease.
Areas will be accepted by the Consultant provided that:
.1
Seeded areas are properly established,
.2
Turf is free of eroded, bare or dead spots,
.3
No surface soil is visible,
.4
Seeded areas are cut,
.5
Washouts and eroded areas have been made good by new topsoil, fertilizing, cultivation and
reseeding
Areas seeded in fall will be accepted in following spring one (1) month after start of growing season provided
acceptance conditions are fulfilled.
Laying of Sod
Obtain approval of topsoil grade and depth before starting sodding.
Lay sod during growing season. Sodding during dry summer period, at freezing temperatures or over frozen soil is not
acceptable.
Lay sod in rows, perpendicular to slope, smooth and even with adjoining areas, and with joints staggered. Butt sections
closely without overlapping or leaving gaps between sections. Cut out irregular or thin sections with a sharp knife.
Provide close contact between sod and soil by means of light roller. Heavy rolling to correct irregularities in grade is not
permitted.
Water immediately after sod laying to obtain moisture penetration through sod into top 4” (100 mm) of topsoil.
Provide adequate protection of sodded areas against erosion and mechanical damage. Remove protection after lawn
areas have been accepted.
3.5
3.5.1
Laying of Sod on Slopes Greater than 3:1
Lay sod sections at right angles to slopes and secure with wooden pegs. Place pegs three (3) per sq. yd., 4” (100 mm)
below top edge to prevent shifting of sod and drive pegs flush with top of sod soil.
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
Maintenance of Sod
Ensure maintenance equipment suitable to Consultant.
Water sodded areas in sufficient quantities and at required frequency to maintain sub-soil immediately under sod
continuously moist for depth of 3” (75 mm) to 4” (100 mm).
Cut grass first time to 1-1/2” (40 mm) when it reaches height of 2-1/4” (60 mm). Remove clippings which will smother
grassed areas.
Fertilize sodded areas one month after sodding with 2:1:1 ratio fertilizer. Spread evenly at rate of 1 lb. (50 g) of nitrogen
3.6.3
3.6.4
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 02395
SODDING AND SEEDING
Page 02395-3
/ 100 sq. yd. (10 sq. m) and water in well. Postpone fertilizing until next spring if application falls within four week period
prior to expected end of growth season in locality.
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
Acceptance
Sodded areas will be accepted at final inspection provided that:
.1
Sodded areas are properly established.
.2
Sod is free of bare and dead spots and without weeds.
.3
No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 1-1/2” (40 mm).
.4
Sodded areas are cut and have been cut minimum two (2) times.
Lawns sodded in fall will be accepted in following spring one (1) month after start of growing season provided
acceptance conditions are fulfilled.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
Page 02585-1
SECTION 02585
PRECAST INTERLOCKING PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
Work scope includes:
.1
Installation of precast concrete pavers at the exterior doors to all 32 suites. Each patio to be 8’-0” x 8’-0”.
1.1.4
Reference: Refer to Structural and Civil drawings and specifications
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
Referenced Standards
ASTM C67-89a
ASTM C144-89
ASTM C33-90
CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90
CAN/CSA-A82.2-M78
OPSS
1.3
1.2.1
1.3.2
Submittals
as per Division 1
Samples: When requested by Consultant, submit samples in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals.
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
Job Conditions
Do not lay concrete pavers or slab steps over frozen materials or on improperly prepared base.
At end of each work period, protect unrestrained edges with plywood or similar material.
Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile
Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
Specification for Concrete Aggregate
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction
Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick
Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
Materials
General: Concrete materials shall be in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1.
Precast Interlocking Pavers:
.1
Shall be Hollandstone, as manufactured by Unilock
.2
Dry cast concrete interlocking paving brick, with compressive strength of 55 MPa (8000 psi), and 5%
maximum water absorption. Conform to CAN3-A82.2-M for freeze thaw resistance
.3
Dimensions & Colour : Sierra
Granular Sub-Base : Modified Granular ’ B’ conforming to OPSS Form 1010 and OPSS 314
Granular Base: Granular ‘A’ conforming to OPSS Form 1010 and OPSS 314
Levelling Course: 4” (or, as described specifically elsewhere in the specifications), clean sharp, well graded crusher dust,
free of organics and deleterious soluble salts and similar materials graded and compacted into place.
Jointing Sand: Imported sand conforming to ASTM Specification C144 - gradation for 1/8” (3mm) joints - free of organics
and soluble salts or contaminants likely to cause efflorescence, and in compliance with the following grading limits:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
Natural
Sand
Manufactured
Sand
Living
project no 1504
4.75 mm
2.36
1.18
600 mm
300
150
75
2.1.7
SECTION 02585
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
No. 30
No. 50
No. 100
No. 200
100
95 - 100
70 - 100
40 - 75
10 - 35
2 - 15
0
Page 02585-2
100
95 - 100
70 - 100
40 - 75
20 - 40
10 - 25
0 - 10
Geotextile Fabric: Bentofix thermal lock geosynthetic clay liner as manufacture by terrafix geosynthetics inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
3.1.1
Subgrade to be unfrozen, and free of ice and snow.
3.1.2
Ensure that the prepared subgrade is protected from damage from surface water and other trades.
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
On Grade Application
Excavate and re-grade as required to achieve the levels shown. Conform to general requirements.
Proof roll and compact exposed earth subgrade to 100% Standard Proctor maximum dry density.
Correct any irregularities or depressions that develop under rolling by loosening the material at such locations and
adding or replacing material and re-compacting until the surface is smooth and uniform. Dig out any soft spots which
develop during or after compaction operations and replace at no increase in Contract Price.
Sub-Base : Place compacted layer of granular sub-base over compacted earth sub-grade. Spread in maximum
compacted lifts of 4”. Compact each lift to 95% Modified Proctor density.
Base: Place compacted layer of granular base over compacted sub-base. Spread in maximum compacted lifts of 4”
Compact each lift to 95% Modified Proctor density.
Sufficiently grade the upper surface of the granular base and compact to prevent infiltration of the bedding sand into the
granular base and both during construction and throughout its service life. Bind segregated areas of the granular base
by the application of crushed fines which have been watered and compacted into the surface.
Setting Bed : Place fine setting bed over filter fabric to a depth higher than specified to allow for compaction after pavers
have been installed. Depth of sand after paver/slab compaction shall be maximum 1-1/2” (38 mm). Note: do not
compact slabs – follow manufacturers instructions.
Geotextile Fabric: install at slab steps.
Installation of Pavers and Slabs
General: Install as per manufacturers recommendations and as per Section – 02220 Excavation and Backfill
Do not install pavers/slabs with excessive chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects.
Install paving units/slabs simultaneously to ensure colour mix uniformity.(i.e continue and extend existing parking lot
colour)
If necessary, cut pavers/slabs with a concrete saw. All cut edges shall be true, even, straight, and undamaged.
Place pavers/slabs as close together as possible, so that joints do not exceed 1/8” (3 mm).
Compaction of pavers (not slabs) shall be accomplished with three (3) or more passes with a vibratory plate compactor;
the first pass shall be made with the surface of the laid pavers brushed clean and joints open; the remaining passes with
the vibrator shall be accompanied with simultaneous brushing of fine masonry sand into the joints and sprinkling with
water to compact.
Fill all voids in the joints by sweeping in dry, jointing sand.
Finish to lines and levels to ensure positive drainage. In no case shall the cross-fall of any portion of the pavement be
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 02585
Page 02585-3
less than two percent (2%). The pavement surface shall not deviate by more than 1/4” (6 mm) in 6’-0” (1800 mm) from
a straight edge laid in any direction.
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 02821
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
Page 02821-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
The work of this section includes everything necessary for and incidental to the execution and completion of all chain link
fencing and gates for the amphitheatre seating bowl perimeter, guard fencing at building ramp and segmented retaining
wall.
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
Reference Standards
CAN/CGSB-138.1-96
CAN/CGSB-138.2-96
CAN/CGSB-138.3-96
CAN/CSA-G164-92
ASTM A90-81
1.2.6
Ontario Building Code,2012
1.3
1.3.1
Scope of Work
This section shall supply and install all items, articles, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the
drawings and/or herein, including all labour, materials, equipment, gate hardware,anchors,accesories and incidentals
necessary and required for the completion of all fencing and gates on this project.
1.4
1.4.1
Job Conditions and Co-ordination
Co-ordinate installation of fencing with other trades including concrete trades.
1.5
1.5.1
Submittals
In accordance with Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER SUBMITTALS, furnish the following:
1.
Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Chain link fencing, gates and all accessories.
2.
Manufacturer's Certificates: Zinc-coating complies with complies with specifications.
Shop Drawings for connection details , gates/doors.
Sample of fence.
1.5.2
1.5.3
Fence, Chain Link - Fabric
Fence, Framework, Zinc Coated Steel.
Fence, Chain Link - Installation
Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles
Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.5
Materials
Steel Posts, Rails and Bracing: Standard butt welded Schedule 40 pipe hot dipped galvanized to CAN/CGSB-138.2 and
as follows:
.1
Terminal posts: 4-1/2” (115 mm) diameter,
.2
Intermediate posts: 2-3/8” (60 mm) diameter,
.3
Top rails: 1-11/16” (45 mm) diameter,
.4
Intermediate rails: 1-11/16” (45 mm) diameter,
.5
Post heights shall be 5’-0” (1,500 mm) .
.6
Post height shall be as described on drawings and as required to suit site conditions where fence and /or
gate intersect.
Bottom Tension Wire: Premium grade galvanized wire, No. 6 gauge (5.0mm) diameter, 80,000 psi (552 MPa) tensile
strength.
Chain Link Fabric: To CAN/CGSB – 138.1, Type1, Class A, heavy style, galvanized.Heights as indicated.
Miscellaneous Items: Stretching bars, clamps, connectors, miscellaneous fittings, bolts, tie wires, etc., shall be hot dip
galvanized steel.
Living
project no 1504
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
SECTION 02821
Page 02821-2
Concrete Piers: minimum 8” (200 mm) diameter extending 7’-0” (2200mm) below finish grade and be double wrapped
with 10mil poly and be in accordance with the requirements of structural drawings and specifications.
Gate hardware: standard gate hardware (full 180degree swing).
.1
Manufacturer's standard products, installed complete. The type of hinges shall allow gates to swing through
180 degrees, from closed to open position. Hang and secure gates in such a manner that, when locked, they
cannot be lifted off hinges.
2
Provide stops and keepers for all double gates. Latches shall have a plunger-bar arranged to engage the
center stop. Arrange latches for locking. Center stops shall consist of a device arranged to be set in concrete
and to engage a plunger bar. Keepers shall consist of a mechanical device for securing the free end of the
gate when in full open position.
.3
Padlocks for gates shall be supplied by the owner. Padlocks shall have chains that are securely attached to
the gate
Finishes
Galvanizing
.1
For chain link fabric: to CAN/CGSB-138.1 Grade 2.
.2
For pipe: minimum Z600 to ASTM A90.
.3
For other fittings: to CAN/CSA G164.
Zinc Paint: "Galvafroid" as manufactured by W.R. Meadows.
3.1
3.1.1
Preparation and Coordination
Remove debris and correct ground undulations along fence line to obtain smooth uniform gradient between posts.
Provide clearance between bottom of fence and ground surface neither less than 1-1/2” (38 mm) nor more than 2” (50
mm).
3.2
3.2.1
Erection of Fence and Gates
Erect fence along lines indicated. All posts shall be mounted in 10” (250 mm) diameter concrete piers extending 7’-0”
below finished grade and finished flush to existing grade. Fence to be 7’-0” in height from finished grade. Provide
accessory sections, etc. as required to suit.
Set sleeves plumb and 13 mm (1/2 inch) above the finished structure. Fill space solidly between sleeve and post with
non-shrinking grout and finish to divert water running down the post away from the post base.
Install horizontal brace between end posts and nearest line post, placed at mid-height of post. Install braces on both
sides of corner posts in similar manner.
Install top rail between posts and fasten securely to terminal posts and secure waterproof caps.
Install bottom tension wire, stretch tightly and fasten securely to end, corner, and straining posts with turnbuckles and
tension bar bands.
Lay out fence fabric. Stretch tightly to tension recommended by manufacturer and fasten to end, corner, gate and
straining posts with tension bar secured to post with tension bar bands spaced at 12” (300 mm) intervals. Knuckled
selvedge at bottom. Twisted selvedge at top.
Secure fabric to top rails, line posts and bottom tension wire with tie wires at 1’-6” (450 mm) intervals. Give tie wires
minimum two twists.
3.2.2
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.3
3.3.1
Touch-Up
Repair damaged galvanized surfaces. Clean damaged surfaces with wire brush removing loose and cracked coatings.
Apply two (2) coats of approved zinc pigmented paint to damaged areas.
3.4
3.4.1
Cleaning
Clean and trim areas disturbed by operations. Dispose of surplus excavated material and replace damaged materials
Living
project no 1504
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02821
Page 02821-3
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
Related Work – Not Used
1.3
1.3.2
CAN/CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
CAN/CSA-A82-06
CAN3-S304.1-04 (R2010)
CAN/CSA-A370-04
CAN/CSA-A371-04(R2009)
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.3.9
1.3.11
CAN/CSA-A165 SERIES-04(R2009)
CAN/CSA A179-04 (R2009)
ASTM C207-10
ASTM E 514/E514M-09)
1.4
1.4.10
1.4.2
Standard of Work and Tolerances
Conform to CAN3-S304 "Masonry Design for Buildings". Lay masonry to CAN3-A371-2004
Install masonry connectors and reinforcing in accordance with the requirements of CAN3-A370-94 "Connectors for
Masonry".
1.5
1.5.1
Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, of all the work of this Section, including large-scale detail of
members and materials, of connection and jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges,
thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing, manufacturer’s literature as well as all other pertinent data and
information, for Consultant's review before fabrication.
Shop drawings of all load bearing and or force bearing, and/or force-resulting components shall bear the seal
and signature of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario.
1.5.2
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
1.6.7
1.7
Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction / Test
Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete.
Fired Masonry Brick Made from Clay or Shale
Design of Masonry Structures
Connectors for Masonry
Masonry Construction for Buildings
CSA Standards on Concrete Masonry Units
Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry
Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage through
Masonry
Quality Assurance
Conform to requirements of CAN3-S304-M or CSA S304.1 design requirements and for construction requirements to
CSA A370, CSA A371 except where more stringent requirements are noted and/or indicated on Drawings and / or
specified herein.
Provide for compartments in long cavity walls and at corners to achieve appropriate pressure equalization and drainage
in cavity wall design.
Provide temporary bracing for masonry work during erection to prevent damage due to winds or other lateral loads until
permanent structure provides adequate bracing. Conform to CSA A371-2004 for temporary wind bracing for masonry
during construction.
Before delivery of materials, submit to Consultant for review, affidavits of an independent inspection laboratory,
verifying that masonry and mortar materials proposed conform to these Specifications.
Submit manufacturer’s certificate, signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario
and verifying that masonry connectors and reinforcement supplied to the project conforms to the requirements of CSA
A370-2004, part 4 of the Ontario Building Code.
Submit results of material testing in accordance with 3.9 – Field Quality Control.
Conform to CAN/CSA-A82.1-M, for type and grade specified and ensure bricks pass ASTM C67, No Dry Freeze Thaw
Test. Before delivery of brick, submit to Consultant affidavits of an independent inspection laboratory, verifying that
brick and mortar proposed conforms to these Specifications. Similarly submit results of mortar tests.
Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200-2
1.7.3
Supplement Clause 5.16 of CAN3-A371-94 as follows:
.1
Ensure that materials are delivered to job site in dry condition.
.2
Keep materials dry until use.
.3
Store under waterproof cover on pallets or plank platforms held off ground by means of plank or timber
skids.
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
Exposed Masonry
“Exposed” means unpainted, painted and special finish coat masonry units that are exposed to view in the completed
work.
Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units in exposed masonry and replace with undamaged units.
1.9
1.9.4
Cold Weather and Protection Requirements
Conform to CAN3-A371. In particular take notice of clause 5.16.1.2 "Protection When Work is Not in Progress".
1.10
1.10.1
Mock-up
Construct one (1) - 6’-6” (2000 mm) x 6’-6” (2000 mm) complete sample masonry wall of each pattern, showing
all components including coursing, bonding, jointing, unit cutting, insulation, reinforcing and interior finish for approval of
Consultant. Verify location of mock-up with Consultant before constructing it. Remove rejected walls and reconstruct
until approval is given, before commencing work on project.
Arrange with other trades for the provision of their samples for mock-up purposes.
Retain each approved sample wall for duration of project, and protect from damage. Remove on project completion.
Only masonry which matches approved sample in all respects will be acceptable on project.
Masonry installed on the building facade may be accepted as a sample.
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.10.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.3
2.3.1
Materials - Accessories
Water: Verify that water used contains no salts to cause efflorescence.
Cavity Wall / Thru Wall Flashing: shall be modified bitumen membrane reinforced with glass scrim, “Blueskin TWF” as
manufactured by Bakor Inc.
Air / Vapour Barriers: in accordance with the requirements of Section 07195, Membrane Air / Vapour Barrier.
Weep Hole Vents: purpose-made of either plastic or non-ferrous metal, designed to drain cavities to exterior equal to
‘Cellvent” by Blok Lok, 3/8” thick a 3 3/8” wide x 3 ½” tall. Locate at base and top of all exterior masonry walls and at all
lintels over doors and windows located in exterior walls at maximum horizontal spacing of 800mm o/c.
Bolts and Anchors: in accordance with the requirements of specification Section 05121, Structural Steel.
Reinforcing Steel Bars: in accordance with the requirements of specification Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement.
Mortar Dropping Control: Provide mortar dropping control ‘Mortar Mitt’ by Blok Lok, 1” thick x 10” high thick x continuous
for the length of the exterior wall, HDPE / nylon strands woven into a 90% open mesh.
Stone Masonry Units
Stone cladding shall be Dionne Stone, chiselled textured masonry units conforming to CAN/CSA-A165. As
manufactured and distributed by Dionne Concrete Products, 332407 Hwy 11 North, Earlton, ON, P0J 1E0, 1-705-5632291.
Stone cladding shall come in two sizes (A - 8” Large Stone) and (B - 4” Small Stone). Use 30% of A and 70% of B.
All face brick shall be manufactured from one continuous run to ensure minimum colour and texture variations.
Provide special sizes and shapes required including but not limited to, plain ends, halves, jambs, sash, lintel, bullnose,
and other shapes. Special shapes shall be manufactured to shape, not cut.
Stone Masonry Cap
Stone masonry caps shall be Super Sill 424 Full Radius as manufactured by Shouldice Designer Stone or equivalent
approved by consultant. Cap to be installed on exterior columns at the main entrance. Provide all necessary clips and
fasteners to install the product.
Living
project no 1504
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200-3
Wood Stud Brick / Masonry Ties
All face brick shall be secured to wind bearing steel stud framing assemblies with a pre-engineered anchoring system
for brick veneers with steel stud back-up systems. The system shall be designed to be secured to the steel studs
through the exterior grade sheathing and span the depth of the insulation and the airspace – 150mm minimum.
The system shall consist of an anchor plate, minimum 16 gauge thick sheet metal, hot dipped galvanized finish
conforming to CAN/CSA A370, ASTM A153 and ASTM A123 with a minimum 401 g/m2/side zinc coating, hot dipped
galvanized steel reinforcing wire conforming to CAN/CSA A 370, ASTM A153 and ASTM A123 with a minimum 458
g/m2 zinc coating, and stainless steel sheet metal screws, #10, minimum two (2) per plate.
Brick tie shall have a leg long enough to reach from the face of the exterior grade sheathing to the inside face
of the brick veneer – approximately 3”(75mm)
Install at 16” (405 mm) centres horizontally and 16” (405 mm) centres horizontally.
Acceptable material: BL-407 as manufactured by Dur-O-Wall Limited or equivalent as approved by the Consultant.
Install at 400mm o/c vertically and horizontally maximum.
2.5
2.5.1
Mortar and Grout
Natural Mortar
.1
Generally: Use materials only as specified in CSA A179 and ASTM C207. Ensure that water and aggregate
used in mortar, other than in walls buried in earth, will not cause efflorescence.
.2
Aggregate: shall conform to CSA A82.56-M76.
.3
Mixes: Mix mortars as specified in CSA A179 using the Proportion Specification.
.4
Typically: Mortar shall be natural except where coloured mortar is scheduled in selected locations.
2.5.2
Mortar Types
.1
Mortar Type "S" based on Proportion specifications. Colour to be selected.
Mortar Mixes
.1
Grout: Conforming to CSA A179, coarse grout 1:3:2 cement : sand : peastone by volume with 8” (200 mm)
slump.
.2
Parging Mortar: Type “N” conforming to CSA A179 Table 3.
2.5.3
2.6
2.6.1
Steel Lintels
In accordance with the requirements of the structural drawings and specifications.
2.7
2.7.1
Sealants
Sealants for vertical control joints in interior and exterior walls and partitions shall be installed by Section 07900,
Sealants.
Keep joints free of mortar.
2.7.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.3
Laying Masonry
3.3.2
General
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Install masonry in accordance with the requirements of CAN3-A371-2004, Masonry Construction for
Buildings.
Make joints concave tooled of uniform size. Fill solidly with mortar in both bed and vertical joints, and
including block webs. Do not butter corners of units or allow mortar scrapings in joints, slush joints, furrow
bed joints excessively or shift and tap units after mortar has initially set.
Typically, lay masonry using running bond unless indicated otherwise. Install brick masonry in accordance
with brick patterns identified on drawings.
For hollow masonry units, cover end areas and bearing areas of face cells fully with mortar.
When work is resumed on walls previously laid, and which are either partially or totally set, remove loose
mortar and mortar from top and adjoining surfaces. Remove mortar completely when masonry is removed
and replaced with new.
Form tooled concave joints wherever exposed to view, whether behind cabinets, fitments and wall
Living
project no 1504
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
3.3.2
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200-4
accessories or not. When mortar has become "thumb-print hard" form joints by a tool having a long bearing
surface to avoid uneven depressions. Close all cracks and crevices.
Where thin set tile is to be installed on masonry, build masonry to within 1/8” (3 mm) in 10’-0” (3000 mm)
(non-accumulative). Cut off joints flush where thin set tile will be applied, and where treatment is not
otherwise specified.
Trowel point joints in unparged masonry in contact with earth. Concave tool joints where rooms occur on
opposite side of earth.
Rake out joints at junction of interior and exterior walls with columns at interior with exterior walls, at
intersections of walls and partitions where joint reinforcement is installed. These joints will be caulked by
Section 07900.
No mortar shall protrude from joints on wall surfaces to which air/vapour barrier and insulation will be
applied.
Lay face work from face side.
Lay masonry level, true to line, square, plumb, and as detailed. Lay brick in such a way that vertical joints in
alternate brick courses line up from the top storey to the lowest.
Wet masonry units in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Wet faces of work in place before
laying new work. Units shall not have water adhering to their surfaces when laid, but shall be wet only to
ensure that complete hydration takes place during hot drying weather, and when unit absorption rates are
greater than CAN 3-A82.2 requirements, so that the rate of absorption does not exceed this amount when
laid.
Distribute masonry units of varying colours and textures to avoid spotty appearance over wall surfaces
exposed to view. Do not use units which contrast too greatly with overall range.
Stop off horizontal runs of walls by racking back a half-unit in each horizontal course. Do not tooth.
Use chipped and blemished units only where concealed. Do not use defective or broken units. Do not lay
concrete units that will appear smooth or slick where exposed to view, whether painted or not.
Where a steel anchor is set in block or brick cell, fill the anchor cell with cement grout. Provide metal lath
under the particular masonry unit to contain mortar fill.
Brace walls and piers continuously during construction until structure provides support. Do not brace walls
with shims.
Extend walls to construction above, except where otherwise noted on drawings. Cut and fit as necessary.
In cavity walls, keep all cavity spaces free of mortar and debris by placing a wood strip on the ties. Retain
strip on a wire line and pull up level and clean off droppings prior to placing next course of ties.
For parging exterior foundation walls: apply one coat of bonding agent over wall followed by two (2) coats of
parging. Ensure parging thicknes is not less than 3/8” Trowel to a smooth dense finish extending from the
footing to finished floor or as shown on the drawings. Bevel parging to form a sash at the top and thickend at
the bottom to form a cov over the junction between the wall and the footing. Damp cure parging for at least
48 hours before installation of damproofing and backfilling. Protect against freezing and damage until fully
cured.
Lintels and Bond Beams
.2
Build in steel lintels supplied to this Section. Set and level lintels on a bed of mortar. Note the following:
.2
When exterior steel lintels are supported by the building frame, instead of the adjacent brick, locate
expansion joints so the brick above the opening (supported by the building frame) is separated from the
brick adjacent to the opening (supported by the building foundation).
.3
Unless noted otherwise as steel, for all openings in masonry walls, provide concrete block unit lintels of at
least 12 MPa compressive strength. The unit lintel shall be filled with 20 MPa concrete and shall bear a
minimum of 8” (200 mm) each end. Each unit shall be reinforced with one (1) 20M rebar unless noted
otherwise on structural drawings.
.4
Use rebar positioners to position vertical reinforcing bars in walls.
.5
Provide knock-out blocks where horizontal reinforcing bars occur in walls.
.6
Provide low web lintel blocks with knock-out blocks where both horizontal and vertical reinforcing bars occur
in walls.
.7
Where reinforced walls are required to be constructed to the underside of structure that is already in place
provide open-ended blocks at tops of walls to fit around vertical reinforcing bars.
Living
project no 1504
.8
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.4
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.2.9
3.5
3.5.9
3.5.10
3.5.11
3.5.12
3.5.13
3.5.14
3.4
3.4.15
3.4.16
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200-5
Refer to Structural Drawings for location and detail of engineered masonry walls and partitions.
Hollow Metal Frame Installation and Other Built-In Work
.3
Verify with those performing work specified in other Sections that air vapour barrier, through-wall and
dampproof flashings, waterstops, sheet metal air/vapour barrier flashings, accessories, access panels,
frame anchors, guards, sills, and such items specified in other Sections are available for building in before
work commences.
.2
Co-operate in the setting and aligning of built-in work and provide for later installation of items which are
included in the work of other Sections to avoid cutting, fitting, and patching.
.3
Build masonry around metal frames. Ensure that anchors are well secured and that frames are true and
plumb. Completely fill frames with mortar. Maintain protective frame covering and ensure that no mortar is
left on frame face.
Rod Reinforcing and Grout: At walls where rod reinforcing is required ensure that the vertical rods are accurately
located and conform to locations indicated on structural details. Grout fill block voids around rod reinforcing.
Cope, cut, and split concrete masonry units with power-driven abrasive discs. Cut units wherever electrical outlets,
grilles, ducts, conduits or pipes occur. Allow 1/8” (3 mm) clearance around items which are incorporated in or pass
through walls. Make cuts straight, clean, and free from uneven edges.
Lay hollow concrete masonry units so that effective shells rest and align one over the other.
Build chases, do not cut them.
Masonry Anchorage and Support
Anchor masonry construction to ensure its stability and to withstand loads imposed by intended use and by natural
elements. Embed bolts and anchors solidly in mortar or grout to develop maximum resistance to design forces.
Direct fasten masonry anchors to structural steel beams and columns.
Unless indicated or specified otherwise, anchors shall be spaced at the maximum vertical and horizontal spacing
specified in CSA A370-94.
Provide lateral supports for masonry walls and partitions as shown on Drawings, specified and required by
Jurisdictional Authorities, perpendicular to wall faces and either horizontally or vertically to wall panel edges.
Where lateral support at the top of a wall is required anchors or clip angles shall be installed at a spacing not exceeding
ten (10) times the nominal wall thickness in accordance with CSA A370-94, unless otherwise specified.
Where lateral support at the side of a wall is required anchors clip angles shall be installed at a spacing not exceeding
four (4) times the wall thickness, unless otherwise noted.
Where masonry is attached to structural studs secure in accordance with anchor manufacturer's instructions.
Provide joint reinforcing every second course at columns which have masonry fireproofing to the satisfaction of the
authority having jurisdiction.
Masonry partitions should not be built tight to underside of Structural elements.
Cavity Wall Flashing
Install cavity wall flashing continuously in exterior masonry walls; turn up at least 8” (200 mm) on the face of back up
masonry. Co-ordinate installation to suit application of air/vapour barriers by others.
In cavity construction, ensure that flashings have a positive slope toward the outside in order that any water that
penetrates the exterior wythe and drains to the bottom, will be directed back outside through the weep holes.
Install cavity wall flashings at any horizontal interruption of the air space behind the veneer such as:
.4
Top of foundation walls.
.5
Over shelf angles in exterior walls.
Flashing above windows and doors that is discontinuous shall be turned up at ends to form a dam.
Overlap ends of flashing 6” (150 mm).
Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
Shrinkage and Expansion Control Joints
Incorporate vertical shrinkage control joints in walls constructed of concrete masonry units.
Provide control joints at junctions of walls and columns, at intersections of unit concrete masonry load-bearing walls,
and wherever shown on Drawings, and typically, at a maximum spacing of 20’-0” (6000 mm) o.c. unless noted or
detailed otherwise. Carry joints full height of walls.
Living
project no 1504
3.4.17
3.4.18
3.4.19
3.5
3.5.20
3.5.21
3.5.22
3.6
3.6.23
3.6.24
3.6.25
3.6.26
3.6.27
3.6.28
3.6.29
3.6.30
3.7
3.7.31
3.7.32
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
Page 04200-6
Provide horizontal expansion control joints between shelf angles and brick for exterior walls. Make expansion
allowance below angles for caulking and backup rod as specified in Section 07900, Sealants.
Provide complete vertical separation through walls incorporating control joints. Make control joints 3/8” (10 mm) wide,
rake back 3/4” (19 mm) at junctures with concrete, and leave joints free and clear for caulking, as specified in Section
07900, Sealants.
Use sash block units at each side of control joint. Leave a depth of 3/8” (10 mm) for caulking as specified in Section
07900, Sealants.
Joint Reinforcement
Place reinforcement in horizontal masonry joints at 16” (400 mm) o.c., and at 8” (200 mm) o.c. in areas 30” (750 mm)
above and below openings. Where changes in wall thickness occur, extend reinforcement 18” (450 mm) beyond at
each side.
Do not run joint reinforcement through control joints.
Install lapped corner sections in reinforced joints at corner and lapped tee sections at reinforced joints where partitions
intersect other partitions or walls unless lateral support is being provided. Rake vertical joint at intersections for
caulking as specified in Section 07900, Sealants.
Pointing and Cleaning
Point all holes in mortar joints except weep holes, and in concrete masonry unit faces.
Cut out defective mortar joints and repoint.
Wash down and brush brick walls to remove mortar and stains.
Do not use muriatic acid for cleaning of concrete block.
Clean concrete masonry units with brushes and as otherwise recommended by the supplier to remove mortar and
stains.
Do not use wire brushes for cleaning.
Should specified cleaning methods be insufficient, proceed with other methods only with approval of Consultant.
Protect adjacent materials and work from damage while cleaning.
Fire Separations
Walls which provide required fire separations shall be constructed of masonry units which are approved by the Ontario
Building Code and Jurisdictional Authorities for material thickness, and rating.
Unless otherwise approved by Jurisdictional Authorities, in no case shall unplastered fire separation walls of solid
construction be reduced in any part to a thickness less than the listed actual dimensions for the separation ratings
indicated.
3.8
3.8.33
Air Leakage Control
Make the interior surfaces of exterior walls airtight, although concealed behind, panelling or suspended ceilings or work
of other trades. Ensure that backup masonry walls are well laid with full mortar joints.
3.9
3.9.34
Field Quality Control
Field control testing is required for all loadbearing and brick masonry. At least three (3) mortar cubes are to be tested
for each 5,400 sq. ft. (500 m2) of wall, or portion thereof, for each storey. At least two (2) cylinder tests shall be made
for each 700 cu. ft. (20 m3) of grout or less.
An inspection and testing company will be appointed by the Owner to conduct strength tests of mortar and grout in
accordance with CSA-A179 and CAN3-S304
The costs for inspection and testing for this section will be paid by the Owner.
Contractor shall coordinate inspection and testing as required.
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.9.4
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
Special Conditions
Provide bullnose block at all window, sills, jambs and exposed corners.
Salvage and reuse 6 rib split concrete block as per item 2.6.5 of this section.
Provide brick detailing as indicated on the drawings.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
* * *
END OF SECTION
Page 04200-7
project no 1504
SECTION 04700
MANUFACTURED MASONRY
Page 04700-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
Summary
Section Includes: Manufactured stone veneer [Manufactured brick veneer and application materials.
1.3
1.3.2
1.3.2
1.3.6
1.3.9
CAN/CSA-A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction
CAN3-S304-M84 (R1994), Masonry Design for Buildings
CAN3-A165 Series-94, CSA Standards on Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM E 514-90 (R96), Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry
American Concrete Institute (ACI).
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM C 39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
ASTM C 67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile.
ASTM C 177, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties
by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
1.3.10
1.3.11
1.3.12
1.3.13
1.3.14
1.4
1.4.3
1.4.2
Standard of Work and Tolerances
Conform to CAN3-S304 "Masonry Design for Buildings". Lay masonry to CAN3-A371-94.
Install masonry connectors and reinforcing in accordance with the requirements of CAN3-A370-94 "Connectors for
Masonry".
1.5
1.5.1
Submittals
Reference Section 01300Submittals; submit following items:
.1
Product Data: Manufactured masonry and application materials including the manufacturer’s printed installation
instructions, mortar color charts, and weather resistant barrier, scratch coat / adhesive coat product literature,
paper backed metal lath, fasteners product literature.
.2
Samples: Panel containing full-size samples of specified manufactured masonry showing full range of colors and
textures complete with specified mortar, samples of the fasteners and the paper backed metal lath
.3
Actual size of masonry sample approximately 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
.4
Maintenance Instructions.
.5
Warranties.
1.6
1.6.1
Quality Assurance
Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry including
minimum 5 projects within 400 mile radius of this Project.
Supplement Clause 5.16 of CAN3-A371-94 as follows:
.1
Ensure that materials are delivered to job site in dry condition.
.2
Keep materials dry until use.
.3
Store under waterproof cover on pallets or plank platforms held off ground by means of plank or timber skids.
.4
Store moisture-sensitive materials in weather protected enclosures.
Follow manufacturer’s instructions.
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
Exposed Masonry
“Exposed” means unpainted, painted and special finish coat masonry units that are exposed to view in the completed
work.
Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units in exposed masonry and replace with undamaged units.
1.9
Cold Weather and Protection Requirements
project no 1504
SECTION 04700
MANUFACTURED MASONRY
Page 04700-2
1.9.4
Conform to CAN3-A371. In particular take notice of clause 5.16.1.2 "Protection When Work is Not in Progress".
1.10
Field Samples-Not Used
1.11
1.11.1
Project/SITE Conditions
Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of installation at minimum 40 degrees
F (4 degrees C) prior to, during, and for 48 hours following installation.
1.12
1.12.1
Warranty
Special Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard lifetime of maintenance free performance.
1.13
1.13.1
Maintenance
Extra Materials: Furnish extra manufactured stone material in a variety of shapes and sizes in quantity equal to five (5%)
percent of the installed stone.
1
2.1
Products
Stone veneer shall be Fusion Stone, Great Lakes Series as manufactured by Shouldice Designer Stone.
2.2
Manufacturer’s Distributor: Sauve Lumber – Castle, 3957 Hwy 101 W,Timmins, ON. P4N8E8, Phone: 705-268-2800.
Feldman Timber Co., 681 Algonquin Blvd East, Timmins, ON, P4N 7E5, Phone: 705-368-3030
2.3
Colour to be Fawn.
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
Examination
Examine substrates upon which manufactured masonry will be installed.
Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions.
Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate conditions.
2.5
2.5.1
Preparation
Surface Preparation: Follow manufacturer's instructions designated below for the appropriate type of manufactured
masonry and substrate.
2.6
2.6.1
3.6.3
INSTALLATION
Install/Apply Related Materials specified above in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
Use prefinished / manufactured corners and ends at all required locations. Cut and exposed edges shall not be
accepted.
2.7
2.7.1
Cleaning
Clean manufactured masonry in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
Page 05500-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
Provide all miscellaneous metal items listed herein.
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.7
ASTM A325-90
ASTM A307-90
ASTM A563M-90
CSA W47.1-92
CSA W55.3-1965
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
CSA W59-1989
CAN/CSA-G40.20-1992
CAN/CSA-G40.21-1992
CAN/CSA-G164-M92
CAN/CGSB-1.40-M89
1.3
1.3.1
Quality Assurance
Qualifications of Subcontractor: Execute work of this Section using a firm thoroughly conversant with governing laws,
bylaws, and regulations. Use workmen skilled in work of this Section.
Welding
.1
Welding of structural components shall be done only by fabricators certified by CSA Welding Qualification
Codes, CSA W47 or W55.3 as applicable, for welding of steel, and who shall perform welding to meet
specified requirements of CSA W55.2 or W59.1, as may apply.
.2
Weld all stainless steel by the Argon Arc process. Grind smooth and polish joints, crevice free, and flush
without seams.
.3
Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible. Provide method to prevent loosening of
nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals.
Grind welds in exposed locations smooth in a manner that will not leave blemishes on exposed surfaces.
Join members generally by inert metal arc welding where practicable, using materials recommended by
manufacturers of metals being welded. Remove flux completely following welding, and grind and polish
joints smooth and clean.
.3
Touch up all uncoated weld areas.
1.3.2
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength
Specification for Carbon And Alloy Steel Nuts
Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures
Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members
Used In Buildings
Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)
General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel
Structural Quality Steels
Primer, Structural Steel, Oil Alkyd Type
Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, of all the work of this Section, including large-scale detail of
members and materials, of connection and jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges,
thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing, as well as all other pertinent data and information, for Consultant's
review before fabrication.
Shop drawings of all load bearing and/or force-resulting components shall bear the seal and signature of a registered
Ontario Professional Structural Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario.
Shop drawings of all load bearing and or force bearing, seismic (as defined by part 4 of the Ontario Building
Code and item OBC 4.1.8.17) and/or force-resulting components shall bear the seal and signature of a
Professional Structural Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario.
Product Delivery, Storage, and Protection
Maintain protection provided for work of this Section from time of installation until final finishes are applied or to final
cleanup.
Protect prime-painted surfaces from damage.
Protect exposed surfaces of prefinished metal work which does not receive site finishing with protective coatings or
wrappings. Use materials recommended by finishers or manufacturers of metals, to ensure that method is sufficiently
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 05500
Page 05500-2
protective, easily removable, and harmless to the finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.6
2.1.7
Materials
General: Metals shall be free from defects which impair strength or durability, or which are visible. Metals shall be new,
of best quality, and free from rust, or waves, or buckles, clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles.
Metals
.1
Steel: Structural: hot rolled to meet requirements of CAN3-G40.21, Grade 350W for plates, tubes and hollow
sections. Sheet: cold-rolled furniture steel, double annealed, mill stretched and levelled, and fully pickled.
Otherwise, steel shall be hot-rolled or cold-rolled of alloy to suit needs of fabrication, use, and appearance.
.2
Exterior Steel: Hot dip galvanized conforming to CSA G164, minimum Z350 coating.
.3
Stainless Steel: Type 304 alloy conforming to ASTM A167, No. 4 finish.
Primers and Coatings: Quick drying oil alkyd conforming to CISC/CPMA 2.75.
Fastenings: Use nuts and bolts conforming to ASTM A307, A325, and A563 as applicable. Use cadmium-plated
fastenings where other protection is not specified.
Anchors and Shims: For exposed anchorage of aluminum, use stainless steel and otherwise to match metal anchored.
For non-exposed work, anchors and shims may be galvanized steel.
Pipe: To ASTM A53, extra strong steel pipe for bollards.
Bituminous Paint: Alkali-resisting to meet specified requirements of CAN/CGSB-1.108, Type 2.
2.2
2.2.1
Design and Fabrication
Generally
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
Fabricate work of this Section with machinery and tools specifically designed for the intended manufacturing
processes, and with skilled tradesmen.
.2
Fit and assemble work in the shop. When this is not possible, make a trial shop assembly.
Construction
.1
Fabricate work with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors, and fasteners of
adequate strength to withstand intended use, and with allowable design factors imposed by Jurisdictional
Authorities.
.2
Ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion, and
permanent deformation.
Assembly
.1
Accurately cut, machine, and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions between components fit
together tightly, and in true planes.
.2
Fasten work with concealed methods, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
.3
Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible, and cut off bolts flush with nuts.
Countersink bolt heads and provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings.
.4
Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals, and continuous at joints where entry of
water into building or into voids of members or assemblies is possible. Continuously grind and make
smooth welds in exposed locations.
.5
Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblies with surrounding work.
.6
Fabricate shims of steel of sizes required.
Finish Work
.1
Provide holes and connections for work installed under other Sections of this Specification.
.2
Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials, including holes.
.3
Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles, and other similar work.
Prime Painting of Steel: Clean all loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld flux, and spatter from work after fabrication. Grind
smooth sharp projections. Prepare for prime painting by blast cleaning to SSPC-SP6. Apply to steel a shop prime coat
of paint. Work paint into corners, and onto open areas smoothly. Deliver work to site with primer undamaged. Paint all
surfaces except those to be welded in field. Paint surfaces that are inaccessible to finish field painting with two coats of
primer.
Living
project no 1504
2.2.6
SECTION 05500
Page 05500-3
List of Miscellaneous Metals: This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
.1
Concealed support elements, anchors, bolts, inserts, sleeves, angles or other shapes cast in concrete,
hangers, supports, sleeves for work in this Section only
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Inspection of Site
3.1.1
Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction around obstructions and
projections in place, or yet to be put in place to suit service locations, and inaccuracies of construction.
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
Installation
Install work plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together and to surrounding work.
Work includes anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields, toggles, straps, sleeves, brackets,
clips, shims and other items necessary for secure installation, as required to support and/or resist loads and forces, and
as required by Jurisdictional Authorities.
Provide anchors at 24” (600 mm) o.c. for cast-in-place work unless shown otherwise.
Attach work to wood by screws through countersunk holes in metal.
Attach work to masonry with lead plugs and non-corrosion fastenings to support load with a safety factor of three (3).
Insulate between dissimilar metals, or between metals and masonry or concrete with bituminous paint to prevent
electrolysis.
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
Patching and Refinishing
After erection, touch up prime paint finishes damaged or removed during installation.
Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool-marked components and replace with new.
Refinish shop-applied finishes in field only with approval of Consultant.
Clean off dirt on surfaces resulting from installation work.
3.4
3.4.1
Miscellaneous Items
Generally
.1
This schedule does not list all items included in work of this Section. Items not listed are shown on
Drawings.
.2
Ensure that all Drawings and Specification Sections, including those for structural, mechanical, and electrical
work as applicable are consulted to establish the limits of work included in this Section.
Concealed Support Elements and Framing
.1
Supply and install all support elements and framing as shown on the Drawings except where framing is part
of building structural steel. Construct supports from rolled steel sections assembled by welding.
.2
Design supports to withstand, within acceptable deflection limitations, their own weight, the weight of the
items to be supported, loads imposed by the motion of supported items, where applicable, and all live loads,
static and dynamic which might be applied to the supported items in the course of their normal function.
Design supports with a safety factor of three (3). Design supports further as required to accommodate
structural deflection.
.3
Provide all accessories, inserts and fixings necessary for attachment of supports to building structure. Drill
supports, as required, to receive attachment of supported items. Arrange supports to avoid conflicts with
pipes, ducts, connections, thermal and vapour barrier construction, framing provided under other sections,
and such that supports and their fixings are fully concealed from view within the finished work.
Lateral Restraint of Concrete Block and Brick
.1
Fabricate continuous bent steel plate restraint secured to top of all 4” concrete block / exterior 3½” brick
masonry and steel studs and as indicated on the drawings.
.2
Exterior plates shall be hot dipped galvanized. Interior plates shall be painted steel.
.3
Securely fasten to wall in accordance with details.
Benches in Kindergarten 123 and Kindergarten 125
.1
Fabricate benches and shelves as detailed and at locations as indicated on the drawings.
.2
Interior items shall be painted steel.
.3
Securely fasten to wall / floor / wood seats in accordance with details.
3.4.2
3.4.4
3.4.5
Living
project no 1504
3.4.6
SECTION 05500
Page 05500-4
Sun Shelter
.1
Fabricate sun shelter as detailed and at location as indicated on the drawings.
.2
All structural and miscellaneous steel shall be hot dipped galvanized.
.3
Metal roofing shall be standing seam type equal to vicwest TSR 1000, with 0.76mm thick AZ150 galvalume
steel panels finished with Weather X silicone modified polyester (SMP) paint system, colour to be selected
by the Architect at a later date, 26 ga metal flashing, all required clips, roof fasteners,
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 06100-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. And refer also to section
06170 Wood Trusses and structural drawings for structural wood specifications.
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
Quality Assurance
N.L.G.A. 1991 National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.
Identify lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Administration Board.
Plywood identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA Standards.
Each panel of plywood required to be fire retardant treated to bear ULC label indicating Flame Spread Classification
(FSC) and smoke developed.
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
CSA-B111-1974
CSA-0121-08
CAN/CSA-0141-05 (R2009)
CSA-0151-04
CAN/CSA-O325-07 (R2012)
CSA-O80 Series-08
CAN/ULC-S102-M88
1.3.8
1.3.9
1.3.10
1.3.11
CAN/CSA G164-M92
CSA 086-01
CAN/CSA 086.1-M89
NFPA 80-1999
1.4
1.4.1
When it is required that wood maintain dimensional stability and tolerances, to ensure accurate installation of later work,
store and install it only in dry areas and when no further installation of moist materials is contemplated.
Provide dry storage areas for rough carpentry materials. Stack lumber 150 mm (6”) clear of floor.
Install temporary wood protection strips at door jambs and similar locations vulnerable to damage.
Cover materials stored on site with tarpaulins or polyethylene sheets to prevent moisture, absorption and impairment of
structural and aesthetic-properties.
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples
Douglas Fir Plywood
Softwood Lumber
Canadian Softwood Plywood
Construction Sheathing
Wood Preservation
Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials and Assemblies
Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Objects
Engineering Design in Wood (Working Stress Design)
Engineering Design in Wood (Limit States Design)
Fire Doors and Windows.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
Materials
Except as indicated or specified otherwise lumber shall be softwood S4S, SPF Species moisture content (MC) not
greater than 19% at time of installation in accordance with the following standards;
.1
CSA 0141
.2
NLGA Standard grading rules for Canadian Lumber.
Machine stress - rated lumber is acceptable for all purposes.
Lumber
.1
S-DRY, graded and stamped to National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian
Lumber.
.1
Studs: No. 1/No. 2 (SPF), 121c. "STUD".
.2
Blocking, furring, strapping, battens, nailers, bracing, and bridging: spruce, pine or fir (SPF),
standard or better grade.
.3
Pressure treated lumber shall conform to
Living
project no 1504
2.1.4
2.1.4.2
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 06100-2
Plywood: Canadian softwood plywood conforming to CSA 0151, "G1S".
Pressure Treated Plywood: Pressure treated plywood conform to CSA 0151, “G1S”.
Nails, Spikes, Staples and Other Connectors: to CSA B111, galvanized for exterior work, interior highly humid areas and
for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Screws and Pin Type Fasteners: Hot dip galvanized to CAN/CSA G164 for exterior work.
Elsewhere for sight exposed surfaces, prime paint. Use surface fastenings of following types, except where specified
type is indicated:
.1
To hollow masonry, gypsum board and panel surfaces use toggle bolts.
.2
To solid masonry and concrete use expansion shield with lag screw, or lead plug with wood screw.
Fabrication
Comply with CAN3-086 or CAN3-086.1 for all fabrication and assembly of structural components off site, or on site.
Design construction details for expansion and contraction of materials.
Machine sand surfaces exposed in the finished work. Hand sand to an even smooth surface free from scratches.
List of Rough Carpentry Items: This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
.1
Concealed support elements, anchors, bolts, inserts, sleeves for work in this section.
.2
Wood Blocking for Millwork: Provide wood blocking on and within partitions as required to support millwork
and other wall mounted specialty items.
.3
Plywood Roof Sheathing: Provide 12.5mm thick T+G plywood exterior grade sheathing and required
fasteners over metal deck / roof truss system as detailed on the drawings. Refer to Structural Documents
.4
Plywood Floor Sheathing at Library 105 and Daycare 100, Office 100D: Provide 6mm plywood subfloor on
16mm thick T+G plywood sheathing and wood blocking as detailed on the drawings.
.5
Provide 19mm thick exterior grade plywood sheathing at fascia as detailed in the drawings.
.6
Provide 16mm exterior grade plywood sheathing and 2” x 6” pressure treated wood framing at windowsill,
jambs and heads as detailed on the drawings.
.7
Pressure treated lumber; 2” x 4”, 1”x 6” for the construction of the garbage enclosure.
.8
Wood framing at window openings: Provide 16mm thick exterior grade plywood sheathing and pressure
treated wood framing in dimensions as detailed on the drawings around window opening.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
Generally
Lay out work carefully and to accommodate work of others. Cut and fit accurately. Erect in position indicated on
drawings. Align, level, square, plumb and secure work permanently in place. Join work only over solid backing.
Bore holes true to line, and to same size as bolts. Drive bolts into place for snug fit, and use plates or washers for
boltheads and nut bearings. Turn up bolts and lag screws tightly when installed, and again just before being concealed
by other work or at completion of work.
Co-operate with work of other Sections to ensure that unity of actions will ensure orderly progress to meet construction
schedule.
Provide anchors, bolts and inserts required for attachment of the work of this Section to those performing the work of
other Sections, and who are responsible for their installation.
Work shall include such rough hardware as nails, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, clips, hangers, connectors, and strap
iron required for installation of work, and all operating hardware required on work of this Section for temporary work.
Grounds, Blocking, Strapping, Furring, Sleepers and Nailers
Do not regard grounds, blocking, furring, and such other fastening provisions as shown on drawings as exact or
complete. Provide required provisions for fastenings, located and secured to suit site conditions and adequate for
intended support.
Cut fastening work into lengths as long as practicable, and with square ends. Erect work plumb, in true planes, and
fastened rigidly in place.
Living
project no 1504
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 06100-3
Provide wood furring and strapping for applied facings, caseworks, etc.
Except where steel is specifically shown, provide wood blocking and supports in metal stud partitions for fastening of
items anchored to stud partitions. Provide wood blocking and supplementary supports in metal studs supporting
counters and similar items.
Co-ordinate with Section 09250, for the installation of wood blocking for fastening of wall mounted accessories and
casework.
* * *
END OF SECTION
project no 1504
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 06200-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
AWMAC
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
CSA 0115-M1982
CSA 0121-M1978
CSA 0151-M1978
CAN3-A172-M79
CAN3-0188-M78
CAN/CSA-080-Series-M89
CAN/ULC-S102-M88
1.2.9
1.2.10
CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90
NHLA
1.2.11
NLGA
1.3
1.3.1
Submittals
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings to Consultant in accordance with Section 01340, for casework, and casework
hardware, handrails, guards and other fabrications.
.2
Clearly indicate the material being supplied and show all connections, attachments, reinforcing, anchorage
and location of exposed fastenings.
1.3.2
Samples:
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300.
.2
Submit samples of exposed hardware, plywood veneers, plastic laminate
1.4
1.4.1
Quality Standard
Millwork shall conform to the Premium Grade requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of
Canada (AWMAC), Quality Standards For Architectural Woodwork, latest edition, except where more stringent
requirements are specified otherwise.
For conditioning and storage of plastic laminate materials, manufacturing techniques, and choice of appropriate glues to
suit atmospheric conditions to be encountered, conform to CSA Standard CAN3-A172-M79.
1.4.2
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers of Canada, Architectural
Woodwork Standard, Ed.1 Oct, 2011.
Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
Douglas Fir Plywood
Canadian Softwood
High Pressure Paper Base, Decorative Laminates
Interior Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard
Wood Preservation
Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials and Assemblies
Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass
National Hardwood Lumber Association Rules for Measurement and
Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress
National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading Rules for
Canadian Lumber
1.5
1.5.1
Single Source Responsibility
It is the intent of this section to establish a single, competent source to be responsible for the supply and installation of
finished panels which conform to the flame spread rating requirement specified.
1.6
1.6.1
Qualified Architectural Millwork Shops
Qualifications: Work of this Section shall be executed by manufacturer and tradesmen with experience in successful
manufacture and installation of this type of work and of quality as indicated on drawings and as specified. Submit proof
of such experience, with list of installations, upon request by Consultant.
1.7
1.7.1
Job Conditions
Visit premises and take all field measurements necessary to ensure proper fitting of the work of this Section with field
conditions in the building.
Do all cutting and fitting and prepare components to receive and accommodate work of other Sections.
1.7.2
project no 1504
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 06200-2
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
Delivery, Storage And Handling
Provide protective coverings of suitable material for plastic laminate items; take special precautions at corners.
If required, store millwork items in temperature and humidity controlled area until delivery.
Do not permit delivery of millwork to Site until area is sufficiently dry so that woodwork will not be damaged by
excessive changes in moisture control.
1.9
Warranty
.1
Submit a warranty covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of one (1)
years from the expiration of the standard one (1) year warranty included in the Contract under the General
Conditions.
.2
Structural failure, loosening, fading, discolouration, deforming and failure of millwork units shall be judged as
defective work.
.3
Total warranty period shall be two (2) years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.1.9
Materials - General
Generally
.1
Where the designation "NLGA" appears hereinafter, it shall mean NLGA Standard Grading Rules for
Canadian Lumber, approved by the Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board.
.2
Kiln dry all lumber to maximum 8% moisture content.
Casework Framing: Pine, NLGA 115a, No. 1 common.
Nailing Strips, Blocking, Furring and Strapping: NLGA 122c, "Standard" light framing.
Hardwood Plywood: Conform to CSA 0115.
Core for Plastic Laminate and Melamine: Plywood conforming to CSA 0121, G2S
Nails, Spikes and Staples: To CSA B111. Galvanized for exterior work, interior highly-humid areas and for treated
lumber; plain finish elsewhere. Use spiral thread nails, except where specified otherwise.
Glue for Wood Furniture and Assemblies: CSA O112.4-M, polyvinyl adhesive.
Glue for High Humidity Areas: CSA O112.5-M, Type II, moisture resistant urea formaldehyde resin adhesive.
Tempered Hardboard: To CAN/CGSB 11-GP-3-M87, Type 2.
2.2
Plastic Laminate
.1
Conforming to CAN3-A172, General Purpose - standard grade (GP-S), 1.6 mm (1/16") thick for tops, Post
Forming - Standard Grade (PF-S) 1.6 mm (1/16") thick for post forming. Balance all panels with 0.75 mm
(1/32") backing sheet (BK).
.2
Use waterproof adhesive capable of holding materials together without failure.
.3
Finish shall be "Satin" or "Suede" by Arborite or equivalent manufactured by Formica Canada Inc., Wilsonart
Canada, Nevamar or Pionite.
.4
Plastic Laminate colour shall be selected by the Architect at a later date.
.5
Provide postformed countertops and backsplashes in accordance with the drawings.
2.3
Hardwood Trim + Wood Slats for Benches
.1
Hardwood trim and wood slats for benches shall be white oak, in dimensions as noted on the drawings.
Hardwood trim shall be 6mm thick x width of plywood. Wood slats shall be 38 x 89mm.
2.4
Hardwood Veneer Plywood
.2
Hardwood veneer shall be white oak, rift cut veneer flitches only. Rotary cut oak flitches will not be
accepted.
2.5
2.5.1
Cabinet Hardware
Hardware for 19 mm (3/4") thick flush overlay doors:
.1
Hinges: Blum 90 Series or equal by Hafele or Richelieu, fully concealed adjustable, articulated, all metal
hinges, screw-on type, models as applicable for door type opening swing, etc. Supply 170 opening hinges
unless specifically indicated otherwise or unless cabinet details make impractical (i.e. inside 90 corners with
project no 1504
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 06200-3
adjacent doors).
Door Pulls: 8 mm (5/16”) diameter x 100 mm (4”) length, satin stainless steel as manufactured by Blum or
equivalent by Richelieu or Hafele.
Hardware for Shelves:
.1
Typical adjustable shelf supports: For adjustable shelving in cabinets indicated and where shelves have
abutting end supports provide steel pilaster strips equivalent to Knape & Vogt 255 in lengths to suit complete
with Knape & Vogt 256 pilaster clips.
.2
Adjustable supports for exposed millwork shelves: For adjustable shelving in exposed gables provide 3/16” (5
mm) diameter plug-in pins complete with stop equivalent to Hafele Catalogue No. 282.42.702.
Hardware for Drawers
.1
Drawer Pulls: 5/16” (8 mm) diameter x 4” (100 mm) length, satin stainless steel as manufactured by Canadian
Builders Hardware or equivalent by Richelieu, Gallery, or Stanley.
.2
Drawer Extensions: All drawers up to 3” (75 mm) deep and 16” (400 mm) wide shall be fitted with single
extension box drawer slide equivalent to Knape & Vogt 8300. All other drawers shall be fitted with full
extension file drawer slide equivalent to Knape & Vogt 8500.
.3
Closet Rod and Flanges: Provide in closets as indicated 1-1/4” (31 mm) o.d. stainless steel coat rod
equivalent to Canadian Builders Hardware CBH 762 complete with CBH 752 mounting flanges and
intermediate supports as required.
.4
Grommets: Richelieu Martin cable entry plug Model "60.2700.90", or Doug Mockett and Company type "SG"
distributed by Trillium Hardware, colour black, 2” (50 mm) diameter. Allow for twenty (20) to be installed in
locations as directed by Consultant.
.5
Exposed Fasteners: for securing plywood guards, panelling, etc. as indicated shall be 3/8” (10 mm) diameter
stainless steel hex socket cap bolts and domed cap nuts complete with cup washers.
Locks
.1
Locks for cabinet doors shall be Rim Lock, pin tumbler, solid brass, nickel finish, with striker plates and
duplicated keys, all locks in one room shall be keyed alike, product no 346510180 as manufactured by
Richelieu, www.richelieu.com.
.2
Locks for drawer units shall be Drawer Lock, pin tumbler, solid brass, chrome finish, with striker plates and
duplicated keys, all locks in one room shall be keyed alike, product no 313153140 as manufactured by
Richelieu. www.richelieu.com.
.2
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.6
Hardware for solid core wood doors in millwork.
.1
Refer to hardware schedule in section 08710 – Finish Hardware.
2.7
Fabrication
2.7.1
General Workmanship
.1
Fabricate work in accordance with the best practice by skilled craftsmen of companies specializing in the
work specified and to the requirements of other trades.
.2
Use running members in greatest lengths obtainable.
.3
Machine-dressed work shall be slow fed using sharp cutters and the finished work shall be free from drag,
feathers, slivers or roughness of any kind. Remove machine marks by sanding.
.4
In finished work, machine-sand exposed surfaces in the shop and hand-sand on the job to even smooth
surfaces, free from scratches, ready for finishing.
.5
Frame materials with tight joints rigidly held in place. Use glue blocks where necessary.
.6
Assemble work in shop and deliver to job ready for installation as far as practicable. Leave ample allowance
for fitting and scribing on the job.
.7
Take care to prevent the opening up of glue lines in the finished work.
.8
Joints made on the on the job shall be equal in quality and workmanship to joints made in the shop.
.9
Finish all exposed edges of plywood and particleboard with matching veneer edge banding typical, glued in
place. Use 1/4” (6 mm) solid stock where indicated.
.10
Glue and blind screw or nail all work unless otherwise specified. Set surface nails and plug surface screws
with wood plugs of material to match surface.
.11
Glues shall be waterproof and of type suitable for work to be joined. Refer to glue manufacturer's
recommendations for lumber moisture content, glue shelf life, pot life, working life, mixing, spreading,
project no 1504
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 06200-4
assembly time, time under pressure and ambient temperature.
Moisture content of interior woodwork shall be not less than 4% nor more than 8%.
Accurately scribe, cope, and mitre members where required.
Erect work plumb, level, square, and to the required lines.
Fabricate finished woodwork in the building free from bruises, blemishes, mineral marks, knots, shakes and
other defects.
Be responsible for methods of construction, and for ensuring that materials are rigidly and securely attached
and will not be loosened by the work of other trades.
Take field dimensions and fabricate work to suit field dimensions.
Fasten wood nailers, blocking, framing, and strapping solidly to adjacent materials in true planes.
Do not permit delivery of this work to the site until the area is sufficiently dry so that woodwork will not be
damaged by excessive changes in moisture content.
Provide all blocking coming in direct contact with millwork in accordance with applicable provisions set forth
herein.
Provide drilled holes at 1-1/4” (32 mm) o.c. vertically in fitment gables scheduled to receive pins for
adjustable shelves.
2.7.2
Millwork - General:
.1
Construct units as detailed and specified herein.
.2
Fit drawers with stops to prevent tipping or complete withdrawal.
.3
Use plywood for countertops, fronts, backs, bottoms, gable divisions, shelves and doors.
.4
Drawer sides, backs and bottoms shall be 1/2” (13 mm) thick veneer plywood as scheduled and detailed.
Drawer fronts shall be 5/8” (16 mm) thick veneer plywood as scheduled and detailed.
.5
Provide veneer edge banding on all four sides of drawer fronts and doors and adjustable shelves; exposed
edges of fixed shelving; exposed edges of cabinets including those behind drawer fronts and swing doors.
.6
Provide miscellaneous cut-outs in backs of millwork to accommodate electrical cords, telephone cords, etc.,
and provide purpose-made grommets.
2.7.3
Veneered Panels and Millwork:
.1
Material for interior millwork shall be hardwood plywood with wood veneer, as shown, and specified herein,
for gables, shelves, backs, divisions tops and wherever sheet laminated material is shown, unless indicated
to be of plastic laminate, and solid wood to match adjacent veneer, where solid material is indicated. Note
veneer plywood panels at guards shall be plywood core.
.2
To prevent warping use a backing veneer of same thickness as face. Apply backing veneer using the same
application techniques such as application rate, method of application, drying techniques and finish. Provide
backing sheet of sufficient thickness to compensate stresses caused by facing sheet. Apply uniform coating
of sealer on exposed veneered edges.
.3
Semi-Exposed Parts: Interior of all cabinetwork except drawers, but including drawer fronts, shall match
exposed parts except where indicated otherwise on Drawings or in schedules and except where specified
otherwise. Drawer bottoms and dividers shall be oak plywood unless noted otherwise. Semi-exposed
drawer fronts shall match exposed species and all drawer fronts shall cover spaces between gables and
drawer sides.
.4
Doors and Drawer Fronts: shall be 3/4” (19 mm) thick with veneered plywood. Door and drawer faces shall
be of same species and cut as exposed plywood used for case. Provide edge bands on all four sides of
doors as specified. Face veneer shall be vertical. All drawers shall be fitted with sliding hardware and shall
be fully removable.
.5
Provide cut-outs as required for inserts, fixtures and fittings. Use radius corner and chamfer edges around
cut-outs.
.6
Use specified exposed mechanical fasteners to attach wood panels to strapping in walls in accordance with
details.
2.7.4
Plastic Laminate Faced Work:
.1
Provide cores of not less than 5/8” (16 mm) nominal thickness.
.2
Apply backing sheet to laminated flatwork. Supply uniform coating of sealer on exposed edges. Provide
backing sheet of sufficient thickness to compensate stresses caused by facing sheet.
project no 1504
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
2.8.7
2.8.8
2.8.9
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 06200-5
Self edge, straight line edging with 1/16" (1.6 mm) standard material and radius corners with post forming
material, apply with same adhesive as facing sheet. Chamfer edges uniformly at approximately 20 , using
machine router.
Locate joints at 8’-0” to 10’-0” (2400 mm to 3000 mm) o.c. At 'L' shaped corners mitre plastic laminate, to
outside corners. Accurately fit member together to provide tight and flush butt joints, in true planes. Provide
1/4” (6 mm) blind spline and approved type draw bolts. Provide one (1) draw bolt for widths up to 6” (150
mm). For width exceeding 6” (150 mm), provide draw bolts at maximum 10” (250 mm) centres. Colour
match adjoining units.
Provide cut outs as required for inserts, fixtures and fittings. Use radius corners and chamfered edges
around cut outs to avoid chipping laminate.
Post form laminate work to details indicated. Provide same core and laminate profiles to provide continuous
support and bond for entire surface.
Assemble work, true and square. Arrange adjacent parts of continuous laminate work to match in colour
and pattern.
Factory Applied Millwork Finish
All maple veneer millwork, wood veneer panels and solid wood fitments shall have factory applied finish installed in
accordance with Part 5 of the AWMAC Quality Standards.
Finish shall be semi-transparent stain in custom colour selected by the Architect and consisting of: one (1) coat oil
stain, one (1) coat sanding sealer, sanded lightly. Apply two (2) finish coats of clear standard or catalysed lacquer, at
architectural woodwork manufacturer’s option, satin finish.
Submit to the Consultant two (2) – 12” x 24” (300 mm x 600 mm) representative sample panels illustrating finish for
approval. Shop finished surfaces shall closely match the approved samples in all respects.
Apply finishes evenly, and consistently throughout with no lighter or darker areas or blotches.
Sheen shall be consistent throughout.
Fill nail holes and blemishes to closely match and blend with finish so as to be as inconspicuous as possible.
Surfaces shall be consistently smooth and even with no "orange peel", runs, sags, skips, drips, or rough areas.
To prevent warping of veneer panels apply finish to all surfaces including backs and edges.
Prior to shipment to the site suitably protect millwork and fitments from possible damage prior to installation. Maintain
protection of millwork on site after installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
Strips and Blocking:
.1
Where wood is to be fastened to masonry, supply metal nailing plugs to masonry section, for building into
masonry joints.
.2
Provide and install wood strips required for attaching the work of other Sections.
.3
Provide and install all wood blocking required.
3.1.2
Carpentry and Millwork:
.1
Install carpentry and millwork items as detailed.
.2
Execute installations and assemble work on the job using skilled forces, under supervision of competent
joinery foreman.
.3
Adequately fasten units and secure in place with concealed fixings wherever possible. Include grounds and
furring where required.
.4
Install casework level, plumb, true, and complete in all respects. Shim as necessary with concealed shims.
Accurately scribe and closely fit face plates, filler strips and trim to irregularities of adjacent surfaces.
.5
Installation to conform to AWMAC and latest revision of specified standards.
.6
Install all casework finish hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.3
Plastic Laminate:
.1
Apply plastic laminate coverings in accordance with CSA Standard CAN3-A172-M79 and manufacturer's
project no 1504
.2
.3
.4
.5
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 06200-6
directions. Finish exposed edges around cutouts such as sinks, in plastic laminate. Apply laminate backing
sheets on back face of material on which plastic laminate facing sheets are applied to minimize twist. Use
the same adhesive and application techniques such as application rate, method of application, drying
techniques, for bonding front and back laminates.
Bond plastic laminate using urea formaldehyde glue to 3/4" (19 mm) thick, 7 ply, poplar-faced, phenolicbonded plywood or high-density particleboard. Self-edging shall be 3/32" (2 mm) material, electro-pressuresealed and with edges bevelled.
Joints in plastic laminate will not be permitted except in pieces exceeding 8’-0” (2400 mm) in length. Butt
joints tightly together, and reinforce with 1/4” (6 mm) hardwood blind spline. Lock securely with draw bolt
type fasteners at maximum of 3” (75 mm) from edges. Apply backing sheet to plywood.
When cutting holes in plastic laminate work, corners shall be rounded and filed smooth.
Do not remove paper protection until final cleaning.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 06210
INSTALLATION OF DOORS
AND FINISH HARDWARE
Page 06210-1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Work Included In This Section
Installation of aluminium, hollow metal and wood doors.
Installation of finish hardware.
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
Accept delivery of doors and finish hardware.
Inspect doors for damage, upon delivery to the site. Hollow metal doors which cannot be readily corrected by sanding,
shall be promptly returned to the manufacturer.
Store doors in a dry and clean location. Store in a temperature and humidity controlled area. Stack 6” (150 mm) off the
floor.
Be responsible for any damage to doors and hardware from time of delivery until accepted by Owner after installation.
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.4
1.4.1
Jobsite Control and Distribution of Hardware
Provide locked room for the storage of hardware at the job and a person responsible for the control and distribution of
hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
Installation
Finish Hardware
.1
Set, fit and adjust hardware according to manufacturer's directions. Hardware shall operate freely. After
installation, adjust door closers for closing and latching speed and panic devices for proper latching. Protect
installed hardware from damage and paint spotting.
.2
Pre-drill kickplates and doors before attachment of plates. Apply with water-resistant adhesive and
countersunk stainless steel screws.
.3
Locate hardware in accordance with requirements specified in Section 08710.
.4
Thresholds: Site measure openings before cutting. Set thresholds on two continuous beads of caulking
conforming to Section 07900.
.5
Door Closers and Holders: Install door closers in such a manner that door opening is unaffected, and that
maximum swing is permitted.
.6
Weatherstripping of Doors
.1
Install weatherstripping effectively to tightly seal entire perimeter of doors. Secure in place with
non-ferrous screws, in accurate alignment.
.2
Maintain integrity of weatherseal at head of doors fitted with closers. Adapt weatherstripping as
required to achieve specified performance and provide any necessary accessories.
.7
Electronic Hardware
.1
Install all electronic handicap operator components, security components such as magnetic locks,
door status switches, card readers, processors, transformers, and other electric devices.
.2
All wiring will be supplied and installed by Electrical Division 16 including conduit, boxes and other
electrical appurtenances, including connections and terminations. Be responsible for ensuring
that all wiring work is done in accordance with the suppliers wiring diagrams and directions.
Living
project no 1504
.3
SECTION 06210
INSTALLATION OF DOORS
AND FINISH HARDWARE
Page 06210-2
Arrange for testing and commissioning of system by the distributor of the system. Submit a copy
of reports to the Consultant. Forms used for testing by distributors are to be submitted for
review prior to enactment of the testing regimen, and provide sufficient notification to the
consultant to attend the distributor commissioning.
.4
Note: When installing electric strikes, it is imperative that doors are perfectly aligned to enable the
bolt to properly close. Also ensure that rubber silencers do not impair the proper strike action
required. Adjust or remove silencers as necessary.
3.1.2
Wood Doors
.1
Prepare doors for installation with the required bevels, clearances and mortises for hardware. Install all
applicable hardware, including hinges.
.2
Hanging of doors. Leave 3/32” (2 mm) shy (recessed) from rebate, even after bumpers are installed. Where
trimmed in the field, have painter seal top and bottom edges of doors under Section 09900, Painting and
Finishing.
.3
Provide hardwood stops for grilles or glass lites.
3.1.3
Hollow Metal and Aluminum Swing Doors
.1
Hang doors to swing easily and freely on their hinges, to remain stationary in any position, and to close tightly
and evenly on frames without binding.
.2
Provide 3/32” (2 mm) clearance at head and jambs, and no more than 3/8” (10 mm) at floor. Provide
clearance for intended finish flooring.
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
Adjusting and Cleaning of Finish Hardware
Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure proper operation and function of unit.
Lubricate moving parts as recommended by hardware manufacturer. Use graphite type lubricant if no other is
recommended.
Repair or replace defective materials and units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly.
Re-install items found improperly installed.
Prior to date of Substantial Performance, re-adjust and re-lubricate as necessary.
Instruct Owner's designated personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and finishes at time of
final hardware adjustment.
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07195
MEMBRANE AIR / VAPOUR
BARRIERS
Page 07195-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
Air / Vapour Barrier Requirements
The drawings do not indicate every situation where an air / vapour barrier is required, however it is a requirement in the
design of the building to provide an integral monolithic impermeable air / vapour barrier that prevents water leakage and
the diffusion of water vapour and air movement under the action of a difference in vapour and air pressure, at the inner
face of the insulation.
Exercise extreme care to ensure that a fully continuous air/vapour barrier will be maintained over the entire insulated
area and that it extends across all junctions between different materials.
Co-ordinate and co-operate with other trades such as aluminium windows and curtain wall / spray-in-place urethane
foam insulation where materials serving purpose of air/vapour barrier abut the materials of this section of the work.
Responsibility for supervising and ensuring continuity of air / vapour barrier system rests with this section.
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
Qualifications
Employ only skilled workers having experience in the work specified, and having an understanding of the design
principles of the materials which they are providing.
Only Contractors with a minimum five (5) years accredited experience and who are skilled in air / vapour barrier work as
approved by air / vapour barrier manufacturer will be acceptable. If requested, submit certification from air / vapour
barrier manufacturer as proof of compliance to this requirement.
Quality Assurance
Installation shall be by an applicator approved by manufacturer of air/vapour barrier material.
Carry out application in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and with drawings and specifications.
Provide inspection reports from an independent testing authority as selected by the Owner.
Provide two inspection reports, one completed at 25% complete, one at 80% complete installation of each membrane
type.
Costs of inspection reports shall be paid for by the Owner.
Contractor shall coordinate inspection and testing as required.
Storage
Store packaged materials in their original wrappings or containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. Store
flammable materials outside the building and protect from weather hazards and open flame. Abide by fire protection
regulations imposed by the authorities having jurisdiction, and take precautionary measures to avoid fires.
In cold weather, provide warm storage for materials such that their consistency is suitable for ease of application.
Protection
Protect all surfaces, and in particular the building cladding, from being marred or contaminated by the materials, by
means of protective covers, boards, tapes and other approved means.
Supervise the work of other trades where such work is closely associated with the work of this Section and report any
damage.
Protect the work of this Section from damage until the building insulation, cladding, masonry, or other permanent
protection is in place.
Thoroughly ventilate spaces where adhesive containing volatile solvent is used.
Job Conditions
Apply air/vapour barrier only when substrate and ambient air temperatures are at least 5C. Do not install during
inclement weather conditions.
Surfaces shall be clean and dry, free of deleterious material which could impair adhesion of membrane. Concrete block
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07195
BARRIERS
Page 07195-2
substrate shall have flush pointed joints, be cured a minimum of seven (7) days and have a dry surface.
1.8
1.8.1
Mock-Up
Construct one (1) 6’-0” (1800 mm) x 6’-0” (1800 mm) sample of air / vapour barrier installations in locations as directed
by Consultant. Do not proceed with installations until mock-up reviewed by Consultant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
Membrane Air / Vapour Barrier Materials
Air / Vapour Barrier - Sheet Membrane: SBS modified, polyester reinforced membrane, self-adhering grade, "Blueskin
SA" as manufactured by Bakor Inc., alternate acceptable manufacturers include WR Meadows, Tremco, Soprema, AyrFoil (Resisto).
Primers: If required use synthetic rubber based adhesive primer manufactured and recommended by the manufacturer
of the self-adhering air/vapour barrier membrane.
Air / Vapour Barrier - Sealant: Recommended by manufacturer of air/vapour adhesive and sheet. Material shall be a
permanent air/vapour seal and be compatible with the products used for the membrane air/vapour barrier for the
building. Use for sealing breaks, holes, around brick ties and other projections and at junctions of adjacent sheets and
elsewhere as recommended by the manufacturer.
Mastic: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
2.2
2.2.1
Air Barrier Membrane
Air Barrier Membrane: shall be spun polyolefin membrane, Tyvek CommercialWrap as manufactured by Dupont
(www2.dupont.com) conforming to the requirements of CCMC 13253-R. Lap, tape to make air-tight. Adhere to window
and door frames / flanges using Tyvek Tape. Alternate acceptable manufacturers are Bakor, Typar.
2.3
Underslab Membrane Vapour Barrier
Materials
.1
Vapour Barrier membrane must have the following properties:
.1 Permeance as tested after conditioning (ASTM E 1745 paragraphs 7.1.2 – 7.1.5):
less than 0.01 perms (gr/ft2/hr/in-Hg) [0.57 ng/(Pa * s *m2)]
.2 Other performance criteria
.1 Strength: Class A (ASTM E 1745)
.2 Minimum thickness of the plastic retarder material: 0.38 mm [15 mils]
.2
Acceptable products:
.1 Stego Wrap Vapour Barrier 15 mil (0.38 mm) from Stego Industries LLC
(877-464-7834; www.StegoIndustries.com).
.2
Or approved equal,
(request to be accompanied by documentation, as per specifications).
2.4
2.4.1
Attic Membrane Vapour Barrier
Vapour Barrier - Membrane: ‘Perminator’, 15 mil polyethylene vapour barrier as manufactured by WR Meadows Inc.
(www.wrmeadows.com). Or "Stego Wrap 15 Call A” – as manufactured by Stego Steel, alternate approved by
Consultant.
Vapour Barrier– Joint Tape: minimum 4” (100 mm) wide, pressure sensitive, self-adhesive, “Perminator Tape” as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows, and for use in sealing vapour retarder seams and attachment to foundation walls,
protrusions, etc.
2.4.2
2.5
Sheet Wall Vapour Barrier Membrane: shall be 6 mil polyethylene sheet conforming to the requirements of CAN/CGSB51.34M.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07195
BARRIERS
Page 07195-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
Installation - Membrane Air / Vapour Barrier
.1
Conform with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and application of air / vapour barrier sheet.
.2
Permanently seal air/vapour barrier at points where it is penetrated by screws, masonry reinforcing, or other
fastening devices.
.3
Ensure all sheet metal closures, cover plates, etc. are neatly and securely installed prior to installation of
air/vapour barrier membrane.
3.1.2
Air / Vapour Barrier Membrane
.1
Inspect all surfaces to receive membrane and flashing. Repair defects which may impair the performance of
the membrane.
.2
Ensure concrete has been cured for a minimum of seven (7) days and is clean, dry, smooth and sound.
Concrete curing compounds and form release agents shall be free of oil, pigments and waxes.
.3
Install membrane when all substrate defects have been corrected.
.4
Apply to clean, dry, smooth and sound surfaces. Remove moisture, grease and all foreign materials which
may adversely affect proper adhesion.
.5
If required apply primer with a brush, spray or roller and allow to dry. Prime only areas to be covered in a
working day. Primed areas not covered within a working day must be re-primed.
.6
Apply sheet air/vapour barrier membrane when primer is dry using self adhesive method for self adhesive
type. Ensure complete bond for full extent of membrane.
.7
Lap joints to a minimum of 2” (50 mm) and fully heat seal.
.8
Apply heavy pressure using a blunt object or small hand roller to the top and bottom end terminations, to
ensure positive adhesion at the edges.
.9
Using a small hand roller, roll membrane immediately after each length of membrane is applied.
.10
Using a trowel or gun, apply a bead of mastic to all terminations of the membrane.
.11
Before covering membrane, inspect thoroughly and repair immediately. Repair punctures with a patch large
enough to completely cover damaged area. Seal edges of patch with mastic.
.12
Fill all joints, gaps and cracks wider than 1/4” (6 mm) with mastic and reinforce with a 12” (300 mm) strip of
membrane, prior to the application of the full membrane.
.13
Take extra care to ensure continuity of the air/vapour barrier at all detail areas. Use 12” (300 mm)
reinforcing strips at all inside and outside corners.
.14
Be responsible for the continuity of the air/vapour barrier across the wall at joints between exterior grade
sheathing panels, from the wall to the roofing system, windows, curtain wall, aluminium windows, hollow
metal frames, anchors, structural steel, as required to complete the building envelope. Ensure compatibility
prior to starting work.
.15
The continuity of the air / vapour barrier must be carefully inspected prior to installation of insulation.
.16
Perform all repairs to the air / vapour barrier as required.
.17
Seal all breaks, holes and wall ties with liquid air/vapour barrier.
3.2
3.2.1
Installation - Air Barrier
.1
Conform with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and application of vapour barrier sheet.
.2
Permanently seal air barrier at all penetration, punctures, etc. using air barrier membrane and/or joint
sealant tape.
Air Barrier Membrane
.1
Comply with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code.
.2
Start installation from the lowest point and work upwards. Lap higher sheet over lower sheet, shingle style. Seal
perimeter of air barriers with tape as recommended by the manufacturer. Lap sheets minimum 6” (150mm).
.3
Install staples through lapped sheets at sealant bead to substrate.
3.2.2
Living
project no 1504
.4
.5
SECTION 07195
BARRIERS
Page 07195-4
Seal electrical switch and outlet device boxes and apply sealant to edges of flange and wiring penetrations.
Do not cover air barrier installation until reviewed by Consultant.
3.3
3.3.1
Installation - Underslab Membrane Vapour Barrier
.1
Conform with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and application of vapour barrier sheet.
.2
Permanently seal vapour retarder at all penetration, punctures, etc. using vapour barrier membrane and/or
joint sealant tape.
3.3.2
Vapour Barrier Membrane
.1
Unroll vapour barrier membrane over the area where slab-on-grade is to be poured. Cut to size, as
required.
.2
Overlap all joints / seams, both lateral and butt, minimum 6” (150 mm) and seal with joint tape. The joint
tape area shall be free from dust, dirt and moisture to allow maximum adhesion of tape.
.3
Extend underslab membrane up wall from the bottom to the top of the slab.
.4
Seal vapour retarder to vertical walls with joint tape
.5
Install the steel reinforcing for the slab on grade and radiant floor heating system above the vapour retarded
membrane. Protect membrane from puncture prior to pouring of the concrete slab on grade.
3.3
3.3.1
Patching
Perform cutting and patching necessary to accommodate irregularities in the work of this Section caused by
appurtenances of the work of other Sections including piping and electrical conduit projecting through the air / vapour
barriers.
Ensure the continuity of the air / vapour barriers where such items project through the barriers. Allow for expansion and
contraction and linear movement of these items.
After installation under other Sections of heating equipment and other construction adjacent to the work of this Section,
inspect the work of this Section and perform such reasonable taping and patching of air/vapour barriers as necessitated
by unavoidable minor damage caused in the course of the work of the other Sections.
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4
3.4.1
Air / vapour barrier installations shall be inspected and approved by the Consultant prior to the installation of insulation,
concrete, ceiling and wall finishing materials.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07200
BUILDING INSULATION
Page 07200-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
CAN/ULC-S701-05
CAN/ULC-S702-09
ASTM D1622
ASTM C518
1.2.5
1.2.6
ASTM D1621
ASTM C272
1.2.7
ASTM E96
1.3
1.3.1
Co-ordination of Air/Vapour Barrier Installation by Others
The drawings do not indicate every situation where an air/vapour barrier is required, however it is a requirement in the
design of the building to provide an integral, monolithic, impermeable air/vapour barrier that prevents water leakage and
the diffusion of water vapour and air movement under the action of a difference in vapour and air pressure, at the inner
face of the insulation.
Responsibility for ensuring continuity of air/vapour barrier system rests with others.
Co-ordinate and co-operate with trade supplying and installing the air/vapour barrier system and other trades, such as
masonry, aluminum windows and curtain wall, where materials serving purpose of air/vapour barrier abut the materials
of these sections of the work.
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering
Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings
Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics
Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Sandwich
Constructions
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
Storage
Store packaged materials in their original wrappings or containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. Store
flammable materials outside the building and protect from weather hazards and open flame. Abide by fire protection
regulations imposed by the authorities having jurisdiction, and take precautionary measures to avoid fires.
Do not store insulation in direct contact with the earth, road surface, or floors. Place suitable forms or skids under the
insulation upon delivery to protect the insulation from absorbing dampness from the surrounding terrain or floor. Cover
material with approved tarpaulins and secure.
In cold weather, provide warm storage for adhesive such that its consistency is suitable for ease of application.
Protection
Protect all surfaces, and in particular the building cladding, from being marred or contaminated by the materials, by
means of protective covers, boards, tapes and other approved means.
Supervise the work of other trades where such work is closely associated with the work of this Section and report any
damage.
Protect the work of this Section from damage until the building cladding, masonry, or other permanent protection is in
place.
Thoroughly ventilate spaces where adhesive containing volatile solvent is used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
Rigid Insulation
For use below slab on grade and at below grade foundation walls as indicated on the drawings, insulation shall be
closed-cell, expanded, extruded polystyrene complying with CAN/ULC-S701-97, Type 4, and the following minimum
requirements:
.1
Thermal resistance: RSI 0.87 per 25 mm (R 5.0 per 1 inch) thickness.
.2
Compressive strength: 210 kPa (30 p.s.i.).
Living
project no 1504
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
2.5.1
SECTION 07200
BUILDING INSULATION
Page 07200-2
.3
Water absorption: less than 0.70% by volume.
.4
Water vapour permeance: 50 ng/Pa s m2 (0.9 perms)
.5
Tensile strength: 350 kPa (50 p.s.i.).
.6
Shear strength: 240 kPa (35 p.s.i.).
Provide insulation in thicknesses as indicated on drawings.
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1
"Styrofoam SM" as manufactured by Dow Chemical of Canada Ltd, www.building.dow.com
.2
Owens Corning
.3
Johns Manville
Batt Insulation
Preformed, friction fit glass or mineral fibre batt insulation conforming to the requirements of CAN/ULC-S702-97,
minimum thermal resistance value of R4 per inch (RSI 3.87 per 25.4 mm).
Batt sizes shall be of largest practical size and as required to suit wall assemblies and in thicknesses and/or thermal
resistance values as indicated on Drawings.
Acceptable materials:
.1
"Eco Touch” Insulation as manufactured by Owens-Corning Canada Inc.
.2
"Flexibatt" as manufactured by Roxul Inc.
.3
Alternate approved by Consultant.
Roof Insulation
Attic Insulation shall be Weathershield loose fill, fibrous thermal and acoustical insulation as distributed by Thermo-Cell
Industries Ltd., having an installed R-Value of R-60
Product Standard CAN/ULC-S703 Test Criteria (supersedes CAN/CGSB 51.60 M90):
Open-Flammability >0.12 W/cm2
Open-Flammability Permanency >0.12 W/cm2
Surface Burning Characteristics
(CAN/ULC S102) FSC <25
(CAN/ULC S102.2) FSC <150
Smoulder Resistance <15%
Moisture Vapour Sorption <20%
Corrosiveness No perforations of coupons
<25% mass loss (truss plate)
Fungal Resistance <growth than control
Separation of Chemicals <1.5%
Thermal Resistivity >18.5 (m -K)/W
(R = 3.8/in)
Design Density
Attic (Settled) 25.6 kg/m3 (1.6 lb/ft3)
Wall 48.1 kg/m3 (3.0 lb/ft3)
Mineral Fibre Insulation
For use as cavity wall insulation in fire separations as scheduled and / or detailed, insulation shall be mineral fibre
insulation ROXUL Comfort Batt for steel studs, density 32 kg / m3, conforming to CAN/ULC S702-09. Provide mineral
fibre batt insulation in thicknesses as noted on the drawings.
For use at fire separations and as indicated on the drawings, insulation shall be mineral fibre rigid insulation ROXUL
CAVITYROCK DD, R-Value of 4.3/inch
Spray Foam Joint Insulation
Where spray in place urethane insulation specified in section 07216 cannot be used provide low expansion spray in
place insulation – ‘Froth Pak’ by DOW, with min aged R value of 4.5 per inch or equal as approved by Architect. Ensure
product is compatible with adjacent materials.
Living
project no 1504
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.7
2.7.1
2..2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.4
SECTION 07200
BUILDING INSULATION
Page 07200-3
Insulated Subfloor Panels
Insulated subfloor panels will be Amdry factory-fabricated, 24” wide by 48” long (610mmx1219mm) as manufactured by
Amvic Incorporated. Composite subfloor panels shall consist of the following components:
1. A layer of expanded polystyrene (EPS) foam plastic insulation board complying with ASTM C578 as type 2
having a minimum density of 1.25 pounds per cubic foot (22 kg/m³). Total thickness of 1” (25.4mm)
2. Wood panel surface layer of 19/32” (15.1mm) thick oriented strand board (OSB) laminated to the (EPS)
described above. Edges of the OSB panels to be grooved to accept the Amdry connectors.
3. A polystyrene, hot-melt adhesive is to be used to laminate the EPS and OSB together.
4. Preformed polyvinylchloride connectors designed with flexible barb legs that are inserted into the grooves in
the edge of the OSB panels to connect the panels to each other.
Total r-value of the subfloor is R-5.
Air Barrier Rigid Insulation
For use in exterior wall cavity as indicated on the drawings, insulation shall be closed-cell, reflective laminated surface
with micro perforations, expanded, extruded polystyrene complying with CAN/ULC-S701-97, Type 4, and the following
minimum requirements:
.1
Thermal resistance: RSI 0.87 per 25 mm (R 5.0 per 1 inch) thickness.
.2
Compressive strength: 210 kPa (30 p.s.i.).
.3
Water absorption: less than 0.70% by volume.
.4
Water vapour permeance: 50 ng/Pa s m2 (0.9 perms)
.5
Tensile strength: 350 kPa (50 p.s.i.).
.6
Shear strength: 240 kPa (35 p.s.i.).
Provide insulation in thicknesses as indicated on drawings.
Where required secure to structure with Dekfast fastener, #15 High Strength Phillips Head, 13 tpi, drill point with Grey
Sentre XP coating. Predrill holes in structure where required. Cut fasteners if required to suit thickness of insulation and
depth of penetration into predilled holes in structure. Sharpen tips with grinder as required.
ALL seams and joints shall be taped using the manufactured recommended taping and sealing methods.
.1
"Silverboard XS" as manufactured by Amvic Building System, www.amvicsystems.com
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
Examination
Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section.
Ensure concrete has been cured for a minimum of fourteen (14) days. All substrates shall be clean of oil or excess
dust, pigments and waxes; all masonry joints struck flush; all concrete surfaces shall be free of large voids, spalled
areas or sharp protrusions.
3.2
3.2.1
Insulation Installation
Do not commence installation of insulation until the air/vapour barrier installation (by Others) is reviewed by the
Consultant.
Fit boards neatly around beams, pipes, ducts, openings and corners, reinforcing and bonding ties, and other
obstructions.
Butt insulation boards together and stagger joints. Apply firm hand pressure to level insulation boards.
Use the largest module of insulation possible where cutting is necessary, to reduce the number of joints. Patch holes
and tears with the same material.
Permanently seal vapour barrier at points where it is impaled by screws, staples, masonry reinforcing, or other
fastening devices.
Do not install insulation in any part of the building where protection against inclement weather has not yet been
provided, and where the insulation could thereby be wet or damaged.
3.2.2
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.3
Living
project no 1504
3.3.1
SECTION 07200
BUILDING INSULATION
Page 07200-4
Insulation installations shall be reviewed and approved by the Consultant prior to the installation materials that cover the
insulation.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07310
ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING
Page 07310-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.5
1.2.6
CAN/CGSB-37.5-M89
CGSB
CCRA
CSA A123.1-M79 (R1992)
CSA A123.3-M79 (R1992)
CAN3-A123.51- M85 (R1992),
CSA B111- 1974
1.3
1.3.1
Description of Work / Quality Assurance
All roofing work shall be carried out by competent, fully experienced tradesmen. The roofing subcontractor shall be
prepared to submit evidence of successful specialization in asphalt shingle roofing installations.
Work of this Section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
.1
Installation of eave, protection membrane and roofing felt underlayment on wood roof sheathing over entire
pitched roof assembly.
.2
Installation of asphalt shingles.
.3
Co-ordination and installation of roof accessories including ridge vents, roof vents, vent stack flashings,
exhaust vents.
.4
Co-ordination of eavestrough installation.
1.3.2
Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement
Canadian General Standards Board
Canadian Roofing Contractors’ Association
Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral Granules.
Asphalt or Tar Saturated Roofing Felt.
Asphalt Shingle Application on Roof Slopes 1:3 and Steeper.
Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
Extra Materials
Provide two (2) bundles of shingles for use as maintenance materials.
Store in location as directed by the Owner.
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
Delivery, Storage And Handling
Deliver, handle, store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
Provide and maintain dry, off-ground weatherproof storage.
Remove only in quantities required for same day use.
1.6
1.6.1
Waste Management and Disposal
Collect, package and store cutoffs and waste material from work and dispose in accordance with the requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7
1.7.1
Environmental Conditions
Roofing work shall not be applied during wet conditions such as rain, fog, or snow or over damp, frozen, or unsuitable
surface.
Generally roofing shall be applied at ambient temperatures satisfactory to the manufacturer and under dry conditions
only.
Review with manufacturer regarding cold weather insulation requirements and procedures.
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.8
1.8.1
Guarantees and Warranties
Manufacturer's Guarantee:
.1
Provide a written guarantee stating that asphalt shingle manufacture will guarantee to replace at its own
expense, any portion of the asphalt shingle roofing work which experiences actual leaks resulting from
defects in the manufacture of the roofing shingles for a lifetime period from the date the work is
completed.
Living
project no 1504
1.8.2
SECTION 07310
Page 07310-2
Roofing Contractor's Warranty:
.1
Provide a written guarantee stating that the roofing contractor will guarantee to repair at its own expense any
actual leaks in the asphalt shingle roofing flashing membrane and related sheet metal work resulting from
faulty workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the date the work is completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
Materials - Accessories
Cement: plastic cement: to CAN/CGSB-37.5 and as recommended by manufacturer
Lap Cement: to CAN/CGSB-37.4 and as recommended by manufacturer.
Nails: to CSA B111, of galvanized steel sufficient length to penetrate 3/4” (19 mm) into deck.
Vent Stack Flashings: purpose made thermoplastic base flashing, to suit roof penetrations as manufactured by Durflo
Sealant: Shall be one-component, elastomeric, chemical curing complying with CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, colour to
match shingles.
2.2
2.2.1
Eave Protection Membrane
Composite sheet comprised of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to a film of high density cross laminated
polyethylene. Minimum thickness of membrane shall be 40 mils (1.02 mm) provided in minimum 36" (900 mm) wide
rolls.
Acceptable Materials:
.1
“Grip Guard” as manufactured by Building Products of Canada Corp.
.2
“Ice and Water Shield” as manufactured by W.R. Grace of Canada Ltd.
.3
“Armorguard” as manufactured by IKO Industries Ltd.
.4
2.2.2
2.3
Roofing Felt Underlayment: No. 15 organic felt, heavyweight, equal to BP no403 and in accordance with the
requirements of CSA A123.2
2.4
Asphalt Shingles: contractor to provide commencement date for roofing installation in order to facilitate
2.4.1
Asphalt shingles shall be in accordance with the requirements of CSA A123.5-M1998 and as follows:
.1
Type: Cambridge
.2
.1
IKO
.2
.3
Colour: Allow for two (2) colours to be selected and a pattern to be defined by the Owner /
Architect at later date.
2.5
2.5.1
Eavestroughing Systems
Eavestroughing systems as manufactured by Seamless Eavestrough Limited (www.seamless-eavestrough.com) or
equal as approved by the Architect shall have the following characteristics;
.1
eavestrough material; prefinished aluminium, 0.032” thick, preformed, continuous (i.e. without joints except at
corners) into a 5” eavestrough and complete with premanufactured box mitre corners mechanically fastened
and sealed to eavestrough with gutter seal caulking by Tremco and ‘fixatech’ perforated eavestrough
protection system.
.2
colour; to be selected by the Architect from the manufacturers standard colour range.
.3
brackets; purpose made galvanized brackets with screw fasteners at 18” o/c typical that attach eavstrough to
the wood fascia
.4
downspouts; prefinished aluminium, 0.032” thick, preformed into a 4” x 5” (100mm x 127mm) downspouts
complete with elbows, pipestraps, plug and stainless steel screws as required to complete installation.
.5
Provide perforated pipe sections typical; non-perforated “snap tee” pipe section and down spout adapter at
testing and inspection.
Living
project no 1504
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
SECTION 07310
Page 07310-3
connection to down spout system (refer to details and civil drawings). Provide all adapters, fittings, couplings
as required.
Roof Vents
Roof vent system shall be a sloped roof model, storm proof, no moving parts, wire mesh rodent screen, 24ga., resist
winds of up to 110mph. net ventilation area of 144in², average evacuation flow of 418cfm.
Colour: Grey
As manufactured by Ventilation Maximum or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
Eave Protection Membrane and Roofing Felt Underlayment Application
Install eave protection membrane along the perimeter of the entire roof areas scheduled to receive asphalt shingles in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
Eave protection shall extend from the edge of the roof beginning at the low point and extending onto roof to a line not
less than 300 mm (1’-0") inside the inner face of the exterior wall. Lap successive courses a minimum of 75 mm (3")
with 150 mm (6") end laps.
Provide additional layer of eave protection membrane using 36" (900 mm) widths centred on hips and valleys and roof /
wall intersections. Extend up wall minimum 450 mm (18”) at stepped flashings.
Additionally provide eave protection membrane to seal vent stack flashings and roof ventilators to a minimum of 600mm
(2’-0”) around their respective perimeters, in locations indicated and make watertight. Lap eave protection membrane
onto no. 15 felt when working down the slope, shingle style.
Install vent stack flashings to suit roof penetrations.
Install No. 15 organic felt horizontally over the entire roof area and on top of the eave protection membrane. Nail
sufficiently to hold in place until shingles are applied. Overlap succeeding course minimum 50 mm (2") and 100 mm (4")
at end lap except at hips and ridges where end lap shall be 150 mm (6").
Asphalt Shingle Application
Do asphalt shingle work in accordance with CAN3-A123.51 - M85 (R1992), Asphalt Shingle Application on Roof Slopes
1:3 and Steeper, except where specified otherwise.
Provide starter strip laid in continuous band of cement not less than 200 mm (8") wide.
Install first course of shingles by a continuous band of cement along the eaves applied so that the width of the band
equals the shingle exposure plus 100 mm (4") and the band is located not less than 50 mm (2") above the lower edge of
the starter strip.
Apply the second and succeeding courses of shingles so as to provide a head lap of not less than 50 mm (2”).
Horizontally offset the shingles in each course from those in the previous course by not less than 75 mm (3”),
overlapping the rakes by 10 mm (3/8”).
All shingles shall be fastened with no fewer than four (4) nails and so that no fasteners are exposed.
All shingles at valleys shall be installed woven to provide closed cut valleys.
3.3.7
Eavestrough Application
Install eavestrough is accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
Remove existing eavestrough, downspouts, brackets, pipestraps, and related accessories from the existing buildings.
Caulk abandoned holes in existing building envelop with Type A caulking as identified in section 07900 – Sealants.
Fabricate lengths of eavestrough and downspouts to suit existing eaves and building dimensions. Field verify all
conditions on site prior to fabrication.
Install premanufactured galv brackets at 18” o/c to hold eavestrough at fascia.
Install premanufactured box mitre corners at corner conditions. Set in bead of gutter seal caulking and mechanically
fasten corner to eavestrough. Caulk exposed joints within eavestrough using gutter seal caulking by Tremco.
Install downspouts, elbows as required using stainless steel mechanical fasteners and gutter seal caulking at all joints.
3.3
Completion
3.3.5
3.3.6
Living
project no 1504
3.3.1
SECTION 07310
Page 07310-4
Upon completion, remove from site all tools, plant, surplus material and debris resulting from work of this Section.
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504 SECTION 07400
WOOD SIDING AND PREFORMED METAL SOFFIT, & TRIM Page 07400‐1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
ASTM A446/A446M-91
1.2.2
ASTM A525M-91b
1.2.3
1.2.4
CAN/CSA-S136-M89
CSA S136.1-M1991
1.2.5
CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90
1.3
1.3.1
Quality Assurance
Metal cladding and trim shall be installed by the manufacturer's construction forces or by an accredited installer
approved by the siding manufacturer.
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
Design Criteria
The preformed metal soffit system shall be designed in accordance with Reference Standards specified herein and to
the following requirements:
.1
Positive wind load support: 1.915 kPa (40 psf).
.2
Negative wind load support: 1.436 kPa (30 psf).
.3
Deflection: not to exceed 1/180 of the span.
.4
Tensile stress: 138 MPa (20,000 psi) for the steel exterior element but in any case shall not exceed the
values permitted by CSA S136.
In addition to the design parameters indicated, design all preformed metal soffits to withstand wind uplift.
1.5
Submittals Criteria
1.5.1
Shop Drawings:
.1
Submit preformed metal cladding shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of metal cladding in
accordance with Section 01340, Shop and Interference Drawings.
.2
Clearly indicate type of metal cladding being supplied, wall elevations, materials, gauges, profiles, trim and
closure pieces, flashings, dimensions, layouts, z-girts, types and locations of fastenings and installation
details. Indicate provisions for structural and thermal movement between wood and/or metal cladding,
structural systems and other adjacent materials.
.3
Shop drawings shall bear the Seal of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario
verifying the structural capabilities of the system.
Samples: Submit to the Consultant in accordance with Section 01300, two (2) 300 mm x 300 mm(12”) prepainted
sample sections of wood cladding, metal soffit and trim. Finished work shall match samples in colour, gloss and texture.
1.5.2
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip
Process, Structural, Physical Quality
Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process Metric
Cold Formed Steel Structural Members
Commentary on CAN/CSA-S136-M89, Cold Formed Steel Structural
Members
Multi-Component, Chemical Curing Sealing Compound.
Delivery, Handling and Storage
Protect the work of this Section from damage. Protect other work from damage resulting from this work. Damaged work
which cannot be satisfactorily repaired shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
Store materials on site in a manner to prevent damage thereto, or deterioration of finish. Galvanized surfaces which
show evidence of "white rust" will not be accepted.
Stockpile panels tilted to provide water run-off, free from ground contact on firm, level, non-staining supports extending
full width of sheet and spaced not more than 18” (450 mm) apart. Cover components with opaque polyethylene sheet to
protect from direct sunlight and moisture penetration. Vent to allow air movement.
Conduct transport of materials to the job site storage compound in such a manner to prevent in-transit damage. These
Living
measures shall include, but not limited to crating, polyethylene wrapping system, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.3
Pre-finished Wood Siding:
Wood siding shall be Spruce - Fir (SPF) / Sound tight knot, Architectural mouldings to be finger-jointed pine. Stain to be
factory-coated on all six sides in a controlled environment for maximum stain absorption and retention. Low-volatile
organic compounds (VOCs). Vertical channel joint wood siding, 25 mm (1”) x 150 mm (6”) nominal dimension.
Provide complete with all accessory sections, interior and exterior corner / trim mouldings, colour matched non-corrosive
nails / fasteners, etc.
Colour: Siding - Maibec Sandstone Beige 004, Trim – Maibec Ultra White 001
Warranty: Provide fifty (50) year warranty against wood decay, fifteen (15) year warranty on two coats of solid stain,
eight (8) year warranty on natural tones stain and five (5) year warranty on labour.
2.1.5
Acceptable Materials:
.1
“Channel Joint Profile” as manufactured by Maibec Indutries Inc.
.2
“Tradition Wood Siding” as manufactured by Goodfellow Inc.
.3
Alternate approved by Consultant
2.2
Metal Soffit and Trim Materials
2.2.1
Metal Cladding – General:
.1
Preformed metal soffit panels shall be formed of structural quality, hot-dipped galvanized (zinc coated) steel
conforming to ASTM A446.
.2
Core nominal thickness of bare metal: minimum 22 gauge (0.76 mm).
.3
Zinc coating: to ASTM A525, latest edition, zinc coating designation (both sides) Z275; match Stelco
Minimized Spangle Coating.
.4
Panel surfaces to be colour coated on exterior face and wipe coat galvanized on interior face to
manufacturer's standard.
2.2.2
2.2.3
Metal Soffit Profile: shall be SP-100 16” Aluminum Vented Soffit (0613), as manufactured by Kaycan or equivalent.
Fascias, Exposed Trim, Closures, Corner and Drip Flashings, and Cap Pieces: of same material and colour as metal
cladding, unless otherwise specified. Provide all accessory trim sections as required or recommended by manufacturer
to complete installation.
Metal Flashing: shall be fabricated from minimum 24 gauge base metal thickness, pre-finished, zinc coated steel sheet,
commercial quality. Zinc coating shall conform to ASTM A525, latest edition, with Z275 zinc coating designation. Sheet
metal flashings shall be the same colour of wood siding. Formed in profiles and placed at the horizontal joint between
the wood siding and brick, at the head of all windows, at all fascias, at joint between wood siding and roof (asphalt
shingles) and in locations as detailed on the drawings. All continuous runs and corners are to be “S” locked.
Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint.
Cleats and Starter Strips: minimum 16 gauge (0.06”) (1.6 mm) thick zinc coated steel, minimum 2” (50 mm) wide; starter
strips continuous.
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
Accessories
Sealants: In accordance with Section 07900, Sealants. Colour to match exterior face sheets where exposed.
Accessories: Miscellaneous clips, splicers, carriers, connectors, screws, nails, and other standard accessories shall be
zinc-coated, be of strength and design compatible with the system specified. Provide all special accessories to
complete the work.
Fasteners: Concealed fasteners shall be stainless steel with hex head. Exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel hex
head with neoprene bond washer complete with nylon covered heads in colour to match colour of preformed metal
cladding and soffit.
Living
2.4
2.4.1
Semi-Rigid Batt Insulation
In accordance with the requirements of Section 07200, Building Insulation.
2.5
2.5.1
Painted Finishes - Typical
Prior to fabrication all preformed galvanized steel exterior fascia sheets, perforated soffit sheets, flashing and trim
materials and rainware including all related trim and accessories shall be cleaned and pre-treated prior to application of
an inhibitive primer and shall receive a paint finish equal to the following:
.1
VicWest Colorite HMP Series, ceramic pigmentation, polyester paint coating, and wash coat on reverse
(hidden) side.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
Co-operation and Co-ordination
Co-operate with all trades to ensure proper installation of metal soffit panels, fasciuas, trim and flashings as soon as
preceding work is ready to receive same.
3.2
3.2.1
Fabrication
Roll form profiled panels and other Work unless impossible because of special design. Use other forming methods only
with Consultant’s approval. Form bends sharp and true.
Fabricate to conform to reviewed shop drawings, and to allow for structural movement within system.
Fabricate cladding system to prevent entry of water into building and from collecting within wall assembly, and to prevent
infiltration or exfiltration of air through cladding system.
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.3
3.3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
Installation
Installation shall be by skilled mechanics, and in strict accordance with system manufacturer's printed directions, to
produce a first-class installation, in true planes.
Erect metal components and accessories in strict accordance with reviewed shop and erection drawings and
manufacturer’s written instructions. System shall be installed plumb, straight and true to adjacent work. Co-operate with
other trades to ensure proper installation and anchorage of this Work.
Where face sheets cover solid masonry or concrete, fasten notched "Z" girts to masonry or concrete walls with masonry
type anchors sized and spaced to suit engineered design.
Trim and Closures
Supply and install trim and closures of metal gauge and finish to match adjacent surfaces.
Sheet Metal Flashings
Fabricate metal flashings and sheet metal work to profiles as indicated or detailed. Sheet metal work shall be watertight
under all conditions.
Install sheet metal work with concealed fastenings. Exposed fastenings will be permitted only with approval of
Consultant, when concealed fastenings are impossible. If used, install to a weathertight condition, and evenly and neatly
locked. Do not use pop rivets.
Provide continuous starter strips to present true leading edge. Anchor to backup to provide rigid, secure installation.
Conceal fastening.
In general, join sheet metal by "S" seams, to permit thermal movement. Fill all joints with sealant as flashing is being
installed. Subsequent to installation clean off all excess visible material. Space joints evenly where exposed, or as
otherwise shown on drawings or approved by the Consultant. Lock seam and seal. Make corners by means of raised
lock seams. Locate joints at 8’-0” (2440 mm) maximum spacing. Make allowance for expansion at joints.
Make surfaces free from distortions, buckling, warp, wave, dents, oil canning or other defects detrimental to appearance
or performance. Make corners square and surfaces straight and in true planes. .
Double back exposed edges on underside at least 1/2” (12.7 mm) for appearance and stiffness. Dovetail, mitre, lock
joint and seal corners. Apply sealant to all open sheet metal joints and at juncture with other materials.
Living
project no 1504 3.5.7
3.5.8
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
SECTION 07400
Provide underlay or isolation coating to sheet metal surfaces that come into contact with masonry, concrete or another
kind of metal.
Prepare and touch up all scratches on pre-painted finish with air drying formulation of the coil coating paint. Replace
material at no cost to the Owner, if touching up is not acceptable to the Consultant.
Cleaning of Metal Flashing
Upon completion of the installation, clean down all preformed metal flashing and leave all work installed under this
section clean.
Use only cleaning agents recommended by the cladding manufacturers.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07571
EPOXY FLOOR FINISH
Page 07571-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Submittals
Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300 to the Consultant for his approval.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit two (2) copies of maintenance instructions to Consultant in accordance with Section
01300, for incorporation into Maintenance Manuals.
1.3
1.3.1
Product Delivery, Storage, Handling and Protection
Store materials undamaged in original containers, with manufacturer's labels intact, in a warm, dry area, and handle in
such a manner that no damage will be done to the materials or the structure.
Protect the work of this Section against physical damage and/or staining.
Protect surrounding surfaces against damage by these forces.
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
Quality Assurance
Arrange for periodic site visits by epoxy flooring manufacturer's representative while work is in progress to verity that the
specified materials and methods used and procedures agreed upon at the time of initial site meeting are followed.
Verify cured special flooring thickness at random locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
Materials
Primer: As recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Epoxy Floor System: ZeraStout EW non-slip two component waterborne epoxy coating as manufactured by Zeraus
Products Inc. Distriburted by OCP or alternate approved by Consultant.
Colour: Colour to be Balsam
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Maintain temperature of space at level recommended by manufacturer.
Provide controlled ventilation, and dust free conditions.
Close area to all traffic.
3.2
3.2.1
Preparation
Substrates shall be sound, dry, free of dust, dirt, paint, grease, oil or other foreign substances. Water blast rough float
finish.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
Installation
Install epoxy system throughout floor as scheduled. Install epoxy at coved bases (to 100mm above finished floor) and at
vertical surfaces of bases and on top surfaces of bases to equipment throughout the space. Follow manufacturers
mixing and installation instrictions.
Mask and/or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, equipment by suitable means.
Build up surface irregularities which do not guarantee a floor true to level or slope using a trowel applied underlayment.
Match appearance of approved samples. Make finished work uniform in texture, free from defects in appearance and
performance.
Apply cove base to a height of 4” (100 mm) on vertical surfaces unless shown otherwise; apply having a continuous and
Living
project no 1504
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
SECTION 07571
EPOXY FLOOR FINISH
even radius and with a bullnose top edge.
Form external and internal corners plumb and true.
Ensure optimum cure of epoxy system.
Seal around drains to provide watertight enclosure.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Page 07571-2
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING AND
SMOKE SEALS
Page 07840-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.1.1
Work Specified
Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:
Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways and raceways
through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies) and
vertical service shaft walls and partitions.
Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls.
Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors.
Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.
Expansion joints in walls and floors.
Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors.
Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls.
Firestopping and smoke seals within, and at, mechanical (i.e. inside ducts, dampers) and electrical
assemblies (i.e. inside bus ducts) are specified in this section. This includes at horizontal/vertical air
movement shafts forming part of the air distribution/movement systems required for the natural displacement
ventilation system .
1.2.1.2
1.2.1.3
1.2.1.4
1.2.1.5
1.2.1.6
1.2.1.7
1.2.2
1.3
1.3.1
Related Work of Other Sections
Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly execute the work and as
necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other sections, including:
1.
Structural Systems
2.
Section 07900 - Sealants
3.
Section 04200 - Masonry
4.
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board
5.
Mechanical and Electrical Systems
Note: Coordinate as well all metal and “non - metal Supply Air (SA) and Return (RA) horizontal and vertical
shafts. Refer to both architectural and mechanical drawings and specifications.
1.4
1.4.1
References
Test Requirements: ULC-S115-M or CAN4-S115-M, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration
Fire Stops".
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) of Scarborough runs CAN4-S115-M under their designation of
ULC-S115-M and publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS DIRECTORY" that is updated
annually.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL runs ASTM E-814 under their designation of UL 1479 and
publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually. UL tests that meet
the requirements of ULC-S115-M are given a cUL listing and are published by UL in their “Products Certified
for Canada (cUL) Directory.
Omega Point Laboratories runs ASTM E-814 and publishes the results annually in their “Omega Point
Laboratories Directory”
Test Requirements: UL 2079, “Tests for Resistance of Building Joint Systems” (July 1998.) or ASTM E 1966,
“Standard test method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems” (July 2000.) These test requirements provide more
1.4.2
1.4.3
Living
project no 1504
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.7
1.7.1
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING AND
SMOKE SEALS
Page 07840-2
guidelines for testing moving joints than that given in CAN4-S115-M. UL tests that meet the requirements of
ULC-S115-M are given a cUL listing and are published by UL in their “Products Certified for Canada (cUL)
Directory
Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174 – 01, “Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire
Stops.”
Test Requirements: ASTM E 2307, “Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire
Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus”
International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments
CAN/ULC-S102-M, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
All major building codes: NBC, OBC, BCBC, and ABC.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
Canadian Electrical Code
Quality Assurance
A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during initial installation of
firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures.
This will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and drawing
details.
Firestop System installation must meet requirements of CAN4-S115-M, ULC S-115-M or UL 2079 tested
assemblies that provide a fire rating as shown in Section 2.03 Clauses P, Q & R below.
Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local
jurisdiction.
Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support
live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing
assembly.
For those firestop applications that exist for which no ULC or cUL tested system is available through a
manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment derived from similar ULC or cUL system designs or
other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to
installation. Engineer judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop
Council (September 7, 1994, as may be amended from time to time).
Submittals
Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the
composition and limitations, documentation of ULC or cUL firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's
installation instructions to comply with Section 1300.
Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details when no ULC or cUL system
is available for an application. Engineered judgment must include both project name and contractor’s name
who will install firestop system as described in drawing.
Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site.
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01340, Shop and Interference Drawings.
Show proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation. Construction
details should accurately reflect actual job conditions.
Single Source Responsibility
It is the intent of this section of the specifications to establish a single, competent source to be responsible for
providing firestopping and smoke sealing work for the entire project as clarified under 1.2 above.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING AND
SMOKE SEALS
Page 07840-3
1.7.2
Subcontractor shall be a specialist with experience of not less than five (5) years, and as recommended by
firestopping / smoke seal system manufacturers.
1.8
1.8.1
Delivery, Storage and Handling
Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand,
type, and ULC or cUL label where applicable.
Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job-site.
Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's
requirements.
Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as
applicable.
Do not use damaged or expired materials.
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
1.9.5
Project Conditions
Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.
Scheduling
1. Schedule installation of CAST IN PLACE firestop devices after completion of floor formwork, metal form
deck, or composite deck but before placement of concrete.
2. Schedule installation of other firestopping materials after completion of penetrating item installation but
prior to covering or concealing of openings.
Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before
proceeding.
Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures exceed the
manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet.
During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from contaminating any
adjacent surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
Materials
Firestopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN4-S115, CAN/ULC-S101, ASTM E119, and
ASTM E-814. Unless noted otherwise ‘F’ and ‘T’ ratings one (1) hour.
.1
Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame,
smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN4-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes
for which they are intended.
.2
Tests shall be performed by an accredited testing agency acceptable to local Jurisdictional
Authority.
Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems and joint systems listed in the U.L.C Fire
Resistance Directory – Volume III or UL Products Certified for Canada (cUL) Directory, provide products of
the following manufacturers as identified below:
1.
Hilti (Canada) Corporation, Mississauga, Ontario
1-800-363-4458/www.ca.hilti.com
2.
Provide products from the above acceptable manufacturer; no substitutions will be accepted.
Use only firestop products that have been ULC or cUL tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions
conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING AND
SMOKE SEALS
Page 07840-4
involved for each separate instance.
1.
Pre-Installed firestop devices for use with non-combustible and combustible pipes (closed and
open systems), conduit and/or cable bundles penetrating concrete floors and/or gypsum walls, the
following products are acceptable:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Re-penetrable, round cable management devices for use with new or existing cable bundles
penetrating gypsum or masonry walls, the following products are acceptable:
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.
Hilti Intumescent Firestop Sealant (FS-ONE)
Hilti Self Leveling Firestop Sealant (CP 604)
Hilti Fire Foam (CP 620)
Hilti Flexible Firestop Sealant (CP 606)
Hilti Elastomeric Firestop Sealant (CP 601s)
Sealants or caulking materials for use with sheet metal ducts, the following products are acceptable:
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Hilti Speed Sleeve (CP 653) with integrated smoke seal fabric membrane.
Hilti Firestop Sleeve (CFS-SL SK)
Hilti Retrofit Sleeve (CFS-SL RK) for use with existing cable bundles.
Hilti Firestop Cable Collar (CFS-CC)
Hilti Gangplate (CFS-SL GP) for use with multiple cable management devices.
Hilti Gangplate Cap (CFS-SL GP CAP) for use at blank openings in gangplate for future
penetrations.
Sealants or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe,
rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
4.
Hilti Cast-In Place Firestop Device (CP 680-P)
Add Aerator Adaptor when used in conjunction with aerator system.
Hilti Tub Box Kit (CP 681) for use with tub installations.
Hilti Cast-In Place Firestop Device (CP 680-M) for use with noncombustible penetrants.
Hilti Speed Sleeve (CP 653) for use with cable penetrations.
Hilti Firestop Drop-In Device (CFS-DID) for use with noncombustible and combustible penetrants.
Hilti Firestop Block (CFS-BL)
Hilti Elastomeric Firestop Sealant (CP 601S)
Hilti Self Leveling Firestop Sealant (CP 604)
Sealants, caulking or spray materials for use with fire-rated construction joints and other gaps, the
A. Hilti Firestop Joint Spray (CFS-SP WB)
B. Hilti Firestop Joint Spray (CP 672 FC (FAST CURE))
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING AND
SMOKE SEALS
Page 07840-5
C. Hilti Elastomeric Firestop Sealant (CP 601S)
D. Hilti Flexible Firestop Sealant (CP 606)
E. Hilti Self-leveling Firestop Sealant (CP 604)
6.
Pre-formed mineral wool designed to fit flutes of metal profile deck; as a backer for spray material.
A. Hilti Speed Plugs (CP 777)
B. Hilti Speed Strips (CP 767)
7.
Intumescent sealants or caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by
high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and
plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable:
A.
8.
Foams, intumescent sealants, or caulking materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Hilti Firestop Putty Pad (CP 617)
Hilti Firestop Box Insert
Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe (closed and
open piping systems) tested to 50 Pa. differential, the following products are acceptable:
A.
B.
C.
12.
Hilti Firestop Putty Stick (CP 618)
Hilti Firestop Plug (CFS-PL)
Hilti Firestop Cable Collar (CFS-CC)
Wall opening protective materials for use with cUL. / ULC listed metallic and specified nonmetallic
outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable:
A.
B.
11.
Non curing, re-penetrable intumescent putty or foam materials for use with flexible cable or cable
bundles, the following products are acceptable:
A.
B.
C.
10.
Hilti Firestop Collar (CP 643N)
Hilti Firestop Collar (CP 644)
Hilti Wrap Strips (CP 648E/648S)
Materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel
and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable:
Living
project no 1504
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Hilti Firestop Board (CP 675T)
Hilti Firestop Joint Spray (CFS-SP WB)
Hilti Firestop Joint Spray (CP 672 FC (FAST CURE))
Hilti Self-leveling Firestop Sealant (CP 604)
For blank openings made in fire-rated wall or floor assemblies, where future penetration of pipes,
conduits, or cables is expected, the following products are acceptable:
A.
B.
C.
2.1.18
Hilti Firestop Mortar (CP 637)
Hilti Firestop Board (CP 675T)
Sealants or caulking materials used for openings between structurally separate sections of wall and
floors, the following products are acceptable:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
15.
Page 07840-6
Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate
cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are
acceptable:
A.
B.
14.
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING AND
SMOKE SEALS
Hilti CFS-BL Firestop Block (for walls and floors)
Hilti CFS-PL Firestop Plug (for walls and floors)
Hilti CP 680 Cast-In Place Firestop Device (for floors only)
For penetrations through a Fire Separation wall provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by
ULC or cUL as indicated below:
Fire Resistance Rating
Required ULC or cUL “F” Rating of Firestopping Assembly
of Separation
30 minutes
20 minutes
45 minutes
45 minutes
1 hour
45 minutes
1.5 hours
1 hour
2 hours
1.5 hours
3 hours
2 hours
4 hours
3 hours
For combustible pipe penetrations through a Fire Separation provide a firestop system with a “F” Rating as
determined by ULC or cUL which is equal to the fire resistance rating of the construction being penetrated.
2.1.19
For penetrations through a Fire Wall or horizontal Fire Separation provide a firestop system with a “FT”
Living
project no 1504
2.1.20
2.1.21
2.1.22
2.1.23
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING AND
SMOKE SEALS
Page 07840-7
Rating as determined by ULC or cUL which is equal to the fire resistance rating of the construction being
penetrated.
For joints provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by CAN4-S115-M, ULC-S115-M
or UL 2079 which is equal to the fire resistance rating of the construction being penetrated.
Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances.
Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's recommendations, and
in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.3
3.3.1
Preparation
Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify
conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
1.
Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials.
2.
Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance,
release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may effect proper adhesion.
3.
Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping
materials.
4.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before,
during and after installation of firestopping.
5.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation.
Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent
surfaces.
Installation
Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with ULC Fire Resistance Directory or UL
Products Certified for Canada (cUL) Directory or Omega Point Laboratories Directory.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through-penetration
and construction joint materials.
1.
Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.
2.
Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior to installation
of ULC or cUL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains
to duct work.
3.
Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.
Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices and unpenetrated
openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.
Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient
strength and after initial curing.
Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish.
Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
Inspection
Notify Consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping materials and
service penetration assemblies.
Living
project no 1504
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.4
3.4.1
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING AND
SMOKE SEALS
Page 07840-8
Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
Inspection of through-penetration firestopping shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 2174,
“Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops” or other recognized standard.
Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing
firestop systems already installed by other trades.
Install a warning card that is clearly visible adjacent to all large and medium openings that may be repenetrated. This card should contain the following information:
1Warning that the opening has being fire stop protected
2Indicate the fire stop system used (ULC or cUL)
3F rating or FT rating
4Fire stop product(s) used
5Person to contact and phone number in case of modification or new penetration of fire stop system
Schedule
Work of firestopping and smoke seals shall include but not limited to the following:
.1
Penetrations through fire rated assemblies of dissimilar building materials.
.2
Penetrations through fire rated assemblies of similar building materials.
.3
Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire rated assemblies.
Clean-Up
Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately.
Remove temporary dams after initial set of firestopping and smoke seal materials.
Remove firestopping from materials and surfaces not specifically required to be sealed.
Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.
Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop materials and soiling as
work progresses.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
ASTM C790-90
ASTM C804-83
(Reapproved 1988)
ASTM D1056-85
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
ASTM D1565-81
(Reapproved 1986)
CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87
CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90
CAN/CGSB 19.22-M89
CAN/CGSB-2-19.24-M90
Sealant and Waterproofers
Institute.
Recommended Practices for Use of Latex Sealing Compounds
Standard Practices for Use of Solvent-Release Type
Sealant
Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials --Sponge or Expanded
Rubber
Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open Cell Foam)
Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing
Sealing Compound, One-Component, Acrylic Emulsion Base
Sealing Compound, Mildew-Resistant, for Tubs and Tiles
Sealing Compound, Multi-Component, Chemical Curing
Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.
Quality Assurance
Have work performed by a recognized established caulking and sealing contractor having at least ten (10) years
experience and with skilled workers thoroughly trained and competent in the use of caulking and sealing equipment and
the specified materials.
In order that recommendations may be made, arrange with sealant manufacturers for one of their technical
representatives to visit the site, prior to application of this work, to discuss with the Contractor, in the presence of the
Consultant, the procedures to be adopted and to review site conditions, and surfaces and joints to be sealed.
Discuss the following items:
.1
Weather conditions under which work will be done.
.2
Anticipated frequency and extent of joint movement.
.3
Joint design.
.4
Suitability of durometer hardness and other properties of material specified.
1.4
1.4.1
Submittals
Samples
.1
Prepare sample joints at site of each type of caulking and sealant for each joint condition. Do not proceed
with work until each sample joint has been approved by Consultant.
.2
Approved joints shall represent minimum acceptable for work.
.3
Submit manufacturer's name for each compound which will be used on project before commencing work.
1.4.2
Product Data: Submit product data of sealants and caulking proposed in accordance with Section 01300.
1.4.3
Extended Warranty
.1
Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01300, covering the repair or replacement of defective work
for a period of one (1) year from the expiration of the one (1) year warranty, under the General Conditions.
.2
Warranty shall provide for repair or replacement of defective or damaged work resulting from air and
moisture leakage, gassing, wrinkling, ridging, cracking, crumbling, melting, sagging, shrinkage, running,
failure in adhesion, cohesion or reversion failure, marbling or streaking due to improper mixing, discolouration
due to dirt pick-up during curing or staining of adjacent materials and/or surfaces.
.3
Living
project no 1504
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900-2
Job Conditions
Apply materials only to completely dry surfaces, and at air and material temperatures above minimum established by
manufacturer's specifications.
The applicator is responsible for ensuring the sealants are applied under acceptable conditions. Substrate temperatures
of less than 4C require special considerations, to ensure a clean, dry substrate and proper sealant wet-out.
.1
The substrate to which sealant is to be applied should be dry. This is particularly crucial where the substrate
is porous and subject to water absorption. Although the joint interface may appear to be dry, the substrate
below the immediate joint surface may still be moist. This moisture can migrate rapidly to the joint surface
thereby contaminating any preparation.
.2
Use a quick flashing solvent such as MEK or Tremco 200 Cleaner to clean the substrates.
NOTE: Ensure the substrate and/or any coating on the substrate is compatible with MEK or Tremco
Cleaner 200.
.3
After solvent cleaning, wipe the joint interfaces dry with a second clean rag.
.4
Immediately following cleaning, install the sealant and tool it.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
Materials - General
Labels indicating conformance to specified reference specifications will be acceptable as verification that contents meet
specified requirements. Colour will be selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range. Colours shall match
surface on which it occurs unless noted otherwise.
Sealants shall be non-bleeding and capable of supporting their own weight. All caulking, sealants, cleaning solvents,
fillers and primers shall be compatible with each other.
Sealant Type A1
Exterior, non-traffic bearing, weather side of construction: multi-component modified urethane base chemical curing
conforming CAN/CGSB-19.24-M, Type 2, Class B, in colours as selected by the Consultant.
.1
Dymeric as manufactured by Tremco Limited,
.2
Sikaflex 2C NS as manufactured by Sika Canada Inc.,
.3
Sonolastic 150 as manufactured by Degussa
.4
Sealant Type A2
Exterior, non-traffic bearing, weather side of construction: pick resistant, aliphatic polyurethane, in colours as selected by
the Consultant.
.1
Sonolastic Ultra as manufactured by Degussa
.2
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
Sealant Type B
Interior, non-traffic bearing: one (1) component, interior acrylic latex emulsion base, conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.17-M.
.1
Tremflex 834 as manufactured by Tremco Limited,
.2
2.5
2.5.1
Sealant Type C
Interior sanitary caulking: one (1) component, chemical curing, mildew resistant, silicone conforming to CAN/CGSB19.22-M, containing non-toxic fungicidal agents.
.1
DC786 as manufactured by Dow Corning Canada Limited
2.5.2
Living
project no 1504
.2
.3
.4
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900-3
Sanitary 1700 as manufactured by GE Silicones Canada,
Proglaze as manufactured by Tremco Limited,
2.5
2.5.1
Primers
Specifically designed for use with sealants on surfaces encountered, compatible with joint forming materials and as
recommended by sealant manufacturer, to assure adhesion of sealants and to prevent staining of substrate material.
2.6
2.6.1
Sealant Backing
Extruded or preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding, non-staining strips of closed cell
polyethylene or urethane foam rod, diameter 25% wider than joint width. Sizes and shapes to suit various conditions
and manufactured especially for caulking purpose.
Backing shall be compatible with sealant, primer and substrate. Ensure that sealant backing is not cut nor punctured
during installation.
2.6.2
2.7
2.7.1
Bond Breaker
Tape of type supplied or recommended by sealant or caulking manufacturer.
2.8
2.8.1
Cleaning Material
Non-corrosive, non-staining, solvent type, xylol, methyl-ethyl-ketone (MEK), toluol, isopropyl alcohol (IPA) or as
recommended by sealant manufacturer and acceptable to material or finish manufacturers for surfaces adjacent to
sealed areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10
3.1.11
3.1.12
3.1.13
Preparation
Remove moisture, loose mortar, dust, oil, grease, oxidation, mill scale, coatings, and all other materials affecting bond of
compounds by brushing, scrubbing, scraping, or grinding, from surfaces to which caulking compounds must adhere.
Ensure joints are suitable to accept sealant and caulking. Ensure that releasing agents, coatings, or other treatments
have either not been applied to joint surfaces, or that they are entirely removed.
Remove existing caulking and/or sealant from all joints (where indicated on Drawings). Ensure that all joint interfaces are
clean.
Clean joints and spaces which are to be sealed and ensure they are dry and free of dust, loose mortar, oil, grease,
oxidation, coatings, form release agents, sealers and other foreign material.
Clean porous surfaces such as concrete, masonry or stone by wire brushing, grinding or sandblasting as required to
obtain clean and sound surfaces.
Remove laitance by grinding or mechanical abrading. Remove loose particles present or resulting from grinding,
abrading or sandblast cleaning by thorough brushing. Clean ferrous metals of rust, mill scale and foreign materials by
wire brushing, grinding or sanding.
Remove oils by sandblast cleaning
Wipe non-porous surfaces such as metal and glass to be sealed, except pre-coated metals, with cellulose sponges or
clean rags soaked with ethyl alcohol, ketone solvent, xylol or toluol and wipe dry with clean cloth. Where joints are to be
sealed with silicone based sealants clean joint with methyl-ethyl-ketone (MEK) or xylol. Do not allow solvent to air-dry
without wiping. Clean pre-coated metals with solutions or compounds which will not injure finish and which are
compatible with joint primer and sealant. Check ferrous metal surfaces are painted before applying sealant.
Before any work is commenced, test the materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion.
Do not apply material to masonry until mortar has cured.
Do not exceed shelf life, and pot life of the materials and installation times, as stated by the manufacturers.
Become familiar with the work life of the material to be used. Do not mix two part materials until required for use.
Mix sealants thoroughly with a mechanical mixer capable of mixing at 80-100 rpm without mixing air into the materials.
Continue mixing until the material is a uniform colour and free from streaks of unmixed material.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900-4
3.1.14
Mask areas adjacent to the joints as required. Prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces. Remove masking promptly
after the joint has been completed.
3.2
3.2.1
Application
Work of this Section shall include all sealing and caulking, except where specified under the work of other Sections, to
make the building weather and air tight, as indicated typically on drawings, and as otherwise specified.
Apply materials in accordance with the recommendation of the material manufacturer, in particular, backer rod, priming
and depth-to-width ratio. Maintain 2:1 width/depth ratio: minimum joint size shall be 6 mm (1/4") x 6 mm (1/4"),
maximum depth of sealant to be 13 mm (1/2").
Install joint backing material to achieve correct and uniform joint profile. Where joint design or depth of joint prevents
use of joint backing material, apply bond breaker tape to prevent three-sided adhesion.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint backing. Butt joint backing at intersections. Install bond breaker tape at back
of joint where joint backing is not required or cannot be installed
Apply primer with a brush which will permit all joint surfaces to be primed. Perform priming immediately before
installation of caulking or sealant.
Caulking and sealants shall be of gun or knife grade consistency to suit the joint condition. Use gun nozzles of the
proper sized to suit the joints and the caulking and sealing material.
Apply sealant using hand operated guns or pressure equipment fitted with suitable nozzle size and equipment approved
by sealant manufacturer. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations.
Force sealant into joint and against sides of joints to obtain uniform adhesion. Use sufficient pressure to completely fill
all voids in joint regardless of variation in joint widths and to proper joint depth as prepared. Ensure full firm contact with
interfaces of joint. Superficial pointing with skin bead shall not be acceptable.
Finish face of compound to form smooth, uniform beads free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded
impurities. At recesses in angular surfaces, finish compound with flat face, flush with face of materials at each side. At
recesses in flush surfaces, finish compound with concave face flush with face of materials at each side.
After joints have been completely filled, tool them neatly to a slight concave surface.
Caulk joints in site painted materials after adjacent surfaces have been painted.
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
Schedule
General: Use one (1) of the sealants specified for each type in the following locations. Ensure sealant chosen (from
several specified under each type under "MATERIALS") for each location is recommended by manufacturer for use for
conditions encountered.
Sealant Type A: Install in the following exterior locations:
.1
Joints between exterior hollow metal door frames,windows and adjacent masonry, cladding systems of the
exterior wall construction.
.2
Exposed expansion and/or control joints in masonry walls; masonry wall corners and masonry-to-column
junctures.
.3
Raked joints in junction of walls running at different angles, and at junction of walls to columns.
.4
All other exterior locations where sealing is required or noted on Drawings except in locations designated for
Types A2, B and C and except where sealing is specified in other Sections
.
Sealant Type A2: Install in the following exterior locations:
.1
In joints as described between grade level and 2200mm above finished grade.
.2
Joints between exterior hollow metal door frames, windows and masonry and exterior cladding systems of
the exterior wall construction.
.3
Exposed expansion and/or control joints in masonry walls; masonry wall corners and masonry-to-column
junctures.
.4
Raked joints in junction of walls running at different angles, and at junction of walls to columns.
.5
All other exterior locations where sealing is required or noted on Drawings except in locations designated for
Types B and C and except where sealing is specified in other Sections.
Sealant Type B: Install in the following interior locations:
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
Page 07900-5
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
3.3.5
Joints between interior hollow metal door frames and adjacent wall / partition construction.
Joints between masonry and concrete surfaces.
Joints between gypsum board and masonry, or other materials.
Joints between louvres and other surfaces.
Penetrations through roofs, floors and walls other than firestopping.
All other interior locations where sealing is required or noted on Drawings except in locations designated for
Types A and C and except where sealing is specified in other Sections.
Sealant Type C: Install in the following locations:
.1
Joints between washroom vanities, counters and backsplashes and adjacent wall surfaces in kitchens,
washrooms and wet areas.
.2
Joints between urinals and walls.
3.4
3.4.1
Cleaning
Do not use chemicals, scrapers, or other tools which would damage surfaces of caulked or sealed materials when
excess compounds or droppings are removed. Work damaged by cleaning shall be made good under work of this
Section.
3.5
3.5.1
Repair
Cut out damaged caulking and sealing, re-prepare and prime joints and install new material as specified to the
Consultant's satisfaction.
3.6
3.6.1
Protection of Completed Work
Provide wood planks or other approved, non-staining means of protection for the completed caulking and sealants
installations where required to protect the work from mechanical, thermal, chemical and other damage by other
construction operations and traffic.
Maintain protection securely in place until project completion. Remove protection when so directed by the Consultant.
3.6.2
* * *
END OF SECTION
project no 1504
SECTION 08100
HOLLOW METAL DOORS,
FRAMES AND SCREENS
Page 08100-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
.1
CSA A101-M1983, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.
.2
CAN/CSA-G40.21-M92, Structural Quality Steels.
.3
CSA W59-M1989, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
1.2.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).
.1
CAN/CGSB-1.181-92, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
.2
CGSB 41-GP-19Ma-84, Rigid Vinyl Extrusions for Windows and Doors.
.3
CAN/CGSB-51.20-M87, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.
.4
CGSB 51-GP-21M-78, Thermal Insulation, Urethane and Isocyanurate, Unfaced.
1.2.3
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
.1
ASTM A 525M-91b, Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the
Hot-Dip Process Metric.
.2
ASTM A 526M-90, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,
Commercial Quality.
.3
ASTM A 527M-90, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, LockForming Quality.
.4
ASTM B 749-85(1991), Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet and Plate Products.
.5
ASTM E 152-81a, Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.2.4
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC).
.1
CAN4-S104M-M80, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
.2
CAN4-S105M-M85, Fire Door Frames.
1.2.5
Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturer's Association.
.1
CSDFMA, Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, 1990.
.2
CSDFMA, Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Doors, 1990.
1.2.6
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
.1
NFPA 80-1999, Fire Doors and Windows.
.2
NFPA 252-1990, Door Assemblies, Fire Tests of.
1.3
1.3.1
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
Steel Fire Rated Doors and Frames: Labelled and listed by an organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada
in conformance with CAN4 S104M and CAN4 S105M for ratings specified or indicated.
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Brace frame units to prevent distortion in shipment, and protect finished surfaces by sturdy protective wrappings.
Store doors in protective wrappings in a secure dry location, to ensure that they are not damaged until hung. Install them
only when work has progressed to a stage when no damage will occur to them in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
Materials
Steel: commercial grade steel to ASTM A568 , Class 1, wiped coat galvanized to ASTM A527, coating designation
project no 1504
SECTION 08100
HOLLOW METAL DOORS,
FRAMES AND SCREENS
Page 08100-2
ASTM A525, ZF75 typical.
2.1.2
Doors and Panels:
.1
Facings, rails, stiles: 5/64” (1.2 mm) (18 ga.) base steel thickness.
.2
Interior Stiffeners: 0.914 mm base steel thickness.
.3
Hardware Reinforcement: 1/8” (3 mm) base steel thickness.
.4
Interior Doors - Sound Deadening Material: semi-rigid fibreglass 24 kg/m3 minimum density, to fill core
space. Honeycomb structural core consisting of kraft paper with 3/4” (19 mm) cells x core thickness may be
used at interior locations.
.5
Exterior Doors - Insulating Material: 22 ga steel stiffeners at 6” o/c with injected polyurethane foam,
min U factor (imperial) 0.29, R3.4
.6
Interior Doors – Suites: door panels shall be E Series Doors by Fleming Door Products or equivalent.
.7
Glazing Stops: 1/16” (1.6 mm) base steel thickness, formed, drilled and countersunk for fasteners.
2.1.3
Interior Frames
.1
Steel: 1/16” (1.6 mm) (16 ga.) base thickness.
.2
.3
Mortar Guards: 0.762 mm base steel thickness.
.4
Rubber Bumpers: Glynn-Johnson GJ64 or approved equivalent.
2.1.4
Exterior Frames
.1
Steel: 1/16” (1.6 mm) (16 ga.) base thickness.
.2
.3
Mortar Guards: 0.762 mm base steel thickness.
.4
Rubber Bumpers: Glynn-Johnson GJ64 or approved equivalent.
.5
Insulation: Fill solid with polyurethane foam, min U factor (imperial) 0.29, R3.4
2.1.5
Anchors
.1
Frames in Masonry: adjustable "T" strap anchors.
.2
Labelled Frames: to conform to ULC requirements.
.3
Frames in Gypsum Board Partitions: steel anchor clips and floor anchors of suitable design securely welded
inside each jamb.
.4
Anchorage to Floor: minimum 1/8” (3 mm) thick clip angles with 2 holes for expansion bolting to floor.
2.1.6
Galvanizing
.1
Typical interior units: steel sheet wipe coated with zinc-iron alloy to a total mass coating both sides of 75
g/m2 to conform to ASTM A525M, Z275 coating designation.
.2
Exterior units, and interior units in unheated areas: steel sheet coated with zinc to a total mass coating both
sides of 275 g/m2 to conform to ASTM A525M, Z275 coating designation. Mill phosphatize to provide for
good paint adhesion.
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Fabrication - Generally
Fit and assemble work in the shop, where possible. Make trial assembly in shop when not possible.
Fabricate, reinforce and anchor component parts and assemblies to support loads that usage will impose without
deflection detrimental to function, appearance or safety. For interior doors either the use of metal stiffeners with the
spaces between stiffeners filled with insulation, or honeycomb structural core will be acceptable. For exterior doors the
core is to be completely filled with insulation.
Reinforce components to resist in-use stresses imposed by finishing and security hardware.
Prepare frames and doors for finish hardware with mortises and reinforcement. Drill and tap to template information.
Reinforce for surface-mounted hardware and for door closer brackets. Provide for concealed door closers where
specified. Install mortar guards at cut-outs and reinforcing plates in frame. For cylindrical locks install reinforcing units to
2.2.3
2.2.4
project no 1504
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
2.2.12
2.2.13
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
2.3.11
2.3.13
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
SECTION 08100
HOLLOW METAL DOORS,
FRAMES AND SCREENS
Page 08100-3
lock manufacturer's specification. For mortise locks provide a suitable internal bracket to hold the lock case rigidly in the
centre of the door.
Provide for anticipated expansion and contraction of frames and supports.
Fit elements at intersections and joints accurately together in true planes, plumb and level.
Weld frame and door assemblies. Weld continuously at joints exposed to view including door edge seams, or at joints
through which air or water could penetrate from the exterior of the building to the interior. Seams shall be welded, filled
and sanded flush.
Where welding is impossible, connections may be bolted. Ream drilled holes and leave exposed edges clean and
smooth.
Isolate from each other dissimilar metals and metal from concrete or masonry, to prevent electrolysis.
Ensure that exterior doors and frames are tightly fitted, and that entry of water is prevented by drips on head frames of
outswinging doors exposed to weather.
Make allowance in frames and doors to receive electrical conduits for security strikes and contactors which may be
installed in doors and frames. Provide electrical conduit protection mortar boxes to receive conduit for electric strikes,
locks, door closers, and hinges as detailed.
Fabricate hollow metals and frames and screens in accordance with CSDFMSA, Specifications for Commercial Steel
Doors and Frames, 1990.
Coordinate fabrication of hollow metal doors, frames, and screens with hardware schedule
Door and Screen Frames
Fabricate frames to details shown on Drawings using welded construction.
Fabricate steel frames in minimum base steel thickness specified. Minimum frame material thickness applies only to
work which does not otherwise require heavier gauges to meet specified fire-rated construction.
Touch up frames in the factory where coating has been removed.
Where members join at corners, cut mitres and weld continuously along inside welding.
Where tubular transoms or mullions meet frame members, joint by butt welding.
Attach two channel spreaders at bottom of door frames to maintain square alignment. Provide removable attachment
for spreaders on frames that to not extend below finished floor, and remove them after frames are built in.
Incorporate structural stiffeners for frame members where required to withstand loadings. Securely anchor them at
bottom and top. Where they extend above ceiling, anchor them to concrete or structural framing to suit site conditions
and in such a way that load from the structure is not transferred to the frames.
Install three rubber bumpers in latch side stops of each interior door frame. Locate lowest bumper 9” (230 mm) above
bottom of door.
Backpaint exterior frames and frames to unheated areas where in contact with masonry or concrete or other dissimilar
materials.
Fabricate glass stops for non-rated screens the same as specified for glass stops for doors. Fabricate glass stops for
fire rated screens 3/4” (19 mm) wide and of 1.35 mm thick sheet steel.
Note all exterior doors on the Door Schedule shall have insulated frames. Fill these frames with fibreglass or foamed in
place polyurethane insulation.
Refer to Door and Frame Schedule.
Doors and Panels
Fabricate interior and exterior doors and panels with sheet steel in specified base steel thickness.
Minimum panel thickness applies only to doors not otherwise requiring heavier gauges to meet specified fire-rated
construction.
Fabricate doors with faces true and smooth, and with no dimples or welds visible.
Bevel edges of stiles to suit door swing.
Locate hardware to Canadian Steel Door & Frame Manufacturer's Association Standard, unless shown otherwise on
Drawings or Door Schedule.
Fill solid all voids within doors and panels with insulation, or honeycomb core. For exterior doors and panels, fill voids
with insulation.
Fabricate muntins, removable stops, and glass mouldings of minimum 1.2 mm steel.
project no 1504
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
SECTION 08100
HOLLOW METAL DOORS,
FRAMES AND SCREENS
Page 08100-4
Prepare doors to receive glass and grilles. Install grilles. Secure removable stops with countersunk Phillips oval head
screws symmetrically spaced on stop lengths.
Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors to make a weathertight seal, and doors to which the tops can be seen
from stair landings or other high elevations, so that they are flush with face edges.
Anchors
Provide frames for installation in masonry walls with the following number of anchors:
.1
Frames up to 7’-6” (2300 mm) height, 3 anchors
.2
Frames 7’-6” (2300 mm) to 8’-0” (2400 mm), 4 anchors
.3
Frames over 8’-0” (2400 mm), 1 anchor for each 2’-0” (600 mm) or fraction thereof in height over 8’-0” (2400
mm).
Provide frames for installation in stud partitions with the following number of anchors:
.1
Frames up to 7’-6” (2300 mm height, 4 anchors
.2
Frames 7’-6” (2300 mm) to 8’-0” (2400 mm),, 5 anchors
.3
Frames over 8’-0” (2400 mm),, 5 anchors, plus 1 additional for each 2’-0” (600 mm) or fraction thereof in
height over 8’-0” (2400 mm).
Provide frames to be anchored to previously-placed concrete, masonry, or structural steel, with anchors of suitable
design, as shown on reviewed shop drawings.
Securely weld adjustable floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile, with two holes provided at each jamb for floor
anchorage.
Anchors shall have minimum gauges: "T" strap type, 1/16” (1.6 mm) "L" type, 3/64” (1.2 mm); wire type, 5/32” (3.9 mm)
diameter; stirrup type, 1/16” (1.6 mm); stud type, 3/64” (1.2 mm); jamb spreaders; 3/64” (1.2 mm).
2.6
2.6.1
Finishing
Carbon Steel: Clean and smooth work at welds which has been ground. Fill if necessary, and prime all areas from
which zinc has been removed.
2.7
2.7.1
Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Construct fire-rated doors and frames of ratings indicated, in accordance with ULC Section 120 IDO, and as otherwise
required by Jurisdictional Authorities. Fire rated screens containing doors shall be labelled (whole assembly).
Ensure that hardware used meets requirements of ULC 120 ID16, and installed to NFPA 80 requirements.
Doors and frames indicated as labelled shall have attached ULC labels. Attach labels on the inside of the hinge jamb
midway between the top hinge and the head of the door frame. Where fire doors are shown in pairs swinging in the
same or opposite directions they shall bear a ULC label of a category that does not require astragals.
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
Temperature Rise Limit
In addition to fire protection rating, certain doors require a maximum temperature rise limit, and are indicated on the
Door Schedule by the designation "TRL".
Provide combination temperature rise and fire protection rating label, attach to the door at the same location specified for
fire rated doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
Installation
Installation of the work of this Section is specified in other Sections.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08120
ALUMINUM DOORS
Page 08120-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
CAN/CSA-G40.21-92
CSA G164-M92
CAN/CGSB 19-GP-24-M90
CGSB 1-1.40-97
CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90
CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91
CAN/CGSB-1.108-M89
NAAMM AMP-501-88
1.2.9
NAAMM AMP-505-88
1.3
1.3.1
Submittals
Samples
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals.
.2
Submit one 12’ x 12” (300 mm x 300 mm) corner sample of each type door and frame.
.3
Submit sample showing glazing detail, reinforcement, finish and location of manufacturer's nameplates.
.4
Frame sample to show glazing stop, door stop, jointing detail, finish and wall trim.
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, Shop and Interference Drawings.
.2
Indicate each type of door and frame, extrusion profiles, method of assembly, provisions for horizontal and
vertical expansion, glazing materials, sealant methods, section and hardware reinforcement, locations of
exposed fasteners, finishes and location of manufacturer's nameplates.
.3
Submit catalogue details for each type of door and frame illustrating profiles, dimensions and methods of
assembly.
.4
Shop drawings shall bear the seal and signature of a qualified Professional Structural Engineer registered in
the Province of Ontario.
Maintenance Data: Provide operation and maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of aluminum finishes for
incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300, Submittals.
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
Structural Quality Steels
Multi-component Chemical Curing Sealing Compound
Flat, Clear Float Glass
Bituminous Solvent Type Paint
Finishes for Aluminum, The National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers, Finishes for Aluminum
Applied Coatings, The National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers, Finishes for Aluminum.
Protection
Apply temporary protective coating to finished surfaces. Remove coating after erection. Do not use coatings that will
become hard to remove or leave residue.
Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
Acceptable Door and Screen Manufacturers
Drawings and specifications for work of this Section are based on the following;
.1
Exterior Vestibule Doors: CS-68 Door series (thermally broken) as manufactured by Reynaers. Purpose
made door adapter shall be provided by section 08521 – Aluminum Windows and Curtain Wall.
.2
Interior Vestibule Doors: CS-68 Door series (non-thermally broken) as manufactured by Reynaers.
Purpose made door adapter shall be provided by section 08521 – Aluminum Windows and Curtain Wall.
Products and systems by other manufacturers of similar profile and conforming to all required design and performance
requirements of the drawings and specifications are also acceptable
Living
project no 1504
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
2.2.12
2.2.13
2.2.14
2.2.15
2.2.16
2.2.17
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
SECTION 08120
ALUMINUM DOORS
Page 08120-2
.1
Reynaers Aluminum
.2
alternate as approved by the architect
Construct doors of porthole extrusions with minimum wall thickness of 1/8” (3 mm). Door thickness shall be 1-3/4” (45
mm).
Fabricate doors general to the following profiles and maximum face sizes to be confirmed at shop drawing submission:
.1
Door Stiles: 5 1/2” (139.7 mm) wide minimum
.2
Top Rail: 6” (152.4 mm) high minimum
.3
Bottom Rail: 10” (254 mm) high minimum
Work of this Section shall be performed by the manufacturer and/or by a dealer / installer who is specifically authorized
to represent, fabricate, install and provide extended warranties for the products and systems produced and engineered
by the manufacturer. Note that basic and extended warranties are to be issued jointly by the manufacturer and by the
dealer/installer on a "joint and several" basis. It shall not be permitted for the manufacturer to sell standard products to
the dealer and then expect said dealer to engineer/modify/design/install warrant the entire system.
All components (except glass products) shall come from a single source.
Materials
Aluminum Extrusions: Aluminum Association alloy AA6063-T5.
Sheet Aluminum: Aluminum Association alloy AA1100-H14 or AA5005-H32 anodizing quality.
Steel Reinforcement: To CAN/CSA-G40.21, grade 300W.
Fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel, finished to match adjacent material.
Weatherstrip: Replaceable backed wool pile.
Door Bumpers: Black neoprene.
Isolation Coating: Alkali resistant, bituminous paint conforming to CAN/CGSB 1.108.
Glazing Gaskets: Exterior flexible tubular extruded EPDM, interior extruded polymer with integral spacer shim, of
sufficient size to provide 50% compression when in place.
Glazing Tape: 13/64” (5 mm) thick x height required 100% solid polyisobutylene-butyl, reinforced preformed tape with
built in spacer.
Sealant: “Dymeric” as manufactured by Tremco, “Silpruf” as manufactured by General Electric Canada, “795” as
manufactured by Dow Corning or "RC-2" as manufactured by Sternson Construction Products, including primer as
recommended by sealant manufacturer. Colour selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard colour range.
Foamed-in-place Air Seals: Semi-rigid; "Enerfoam" by Abisko or other approved manufacturer.
Sealant Backing Rod: Extruded, foamed, closed cell, round polyethylene rod, 25% wider than joint width.
Setting Blocks and Spacer Shims: Neoprene or oil-resistant rubber, as approved by glass manufacturer.
Typical Exterior Door Glazing: Shall be insulating unit as per section 08800 – Glass and Glazing. All glass in doors shall
be tempered.
Typical Interior Door and Screen Glazing: Refer to Section 08800 – Glass and Glazing. All glass in doors shall be
tempered.
Thermal Separator: Extruded PVC.
Door Hinges: Hinges shall be continuous.
Fabrication
Fabricate doors and frames to profiles and maximum face sizes indicated. Note elevations for interior vestibule frames
shall match exterior curtain wall glazing as indicated on Drawings, unless noted otherwise. Provide minimum 7/8” (22
mm) bite for insulating glazed units.
Fit joints tightly and secure mechanically.
Conceal fastenings.
Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors, frames and reinforcements to receive hardware using templates provided under
Section 08710.
Isolate aluminum from direct contact with dissimilar metals, concrete and masonry by means of a heavy application of
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08120
ALUMINUM DOORS
Page 08120-3
isolation coating.
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
Aluminum Finishes
Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum doors, frames, screens, closures, panels and other exposed components in
accordance with Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes to match finish of windows and
curtain wall – clear anodized finish.
Factory finish exposed aluminum surfaces with an anodic oxide treatment to obtain an Architectural Class 2 colour
anodized finish in accordance with Aluminum Association Specifications AA-M12C22A31.
2.5
2.5.1
Steel Finishes
Finish steel clips and reinforcing steel with steel primer to CGSB 1-GP-40M.
2.6
2.6.1
Finish Hardware
Supply of finish hardware for aluminum doors shall be supplied by Section 08710, Finish Hardware, except as noted
otherwise herein.
Supply and install weatherstripping and door sweeps, for all exterior doors.
Comply with all requirements of Section 08710, Finish Hardware with respect to instructions, inspections, adjustment
and rectification of defects.
2.6.2
2.6.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
Installation
Set frames plumb, square, level at correct elevation in alignment with adjacent work.
Anchor securely.
Install doors, frames and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's instructions.
Adjust operable parts for correct function.
Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure that structural loads are not transmitted to frames.
3.2
3.2.1
Glazing
Glaze aluminum doors and frames using sealing compounds conforming to CGSB 19-GP-24 or dry flexible sealants.
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
Cleaning and Repairing
Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively-finished or tool-marked components and replace with new.
Clean off dirt resulting from erection on surfaces exposed to view.
At all times, keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by work, and at the
completion of the work, remove all rubbish and all tools, equipment and surplus materials from and about the work and
leave the work clean.
Replace glass broken during the course of the work.
Remove, as work progresses, all excess or foreign materials or droppings which would set or become difficult to remove
from wall cladding surfaces at time of final cleaning.
Before building is turned over to the Owner, remove temporary protection, clean and polish exterior and exposed interior
surfaces of all work of this Section. Use proper cleaning materials and methods to prevent damage to surfaces,
finishes, sealer or work of other trades. Make good such damage to Consultant's satisfaction.
Do not use steel wool, wire brushes or steel scrapers on any finished surfaces.
Upon completion of work of this Section replace or make good all defective, scratched or damaged work to Consultant's
satisfaction at no extra cost to the Owner.
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08210
WOOD DOORS
Page 08210-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada
CAN/CSA-0132.2.0-90(R2003)
General Requirements for Wood Flush Doors
1.3
1.3.1
Submittals
Warranty
.1
Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01300, covering the replacement of defective work for an
additional period of time as defined by each door type, to start from the date of substantial completion of the
contract.
.2
Warping, shrinking, twisting, showing of core ghost lines, splitting, delaminating, or sagging under normal use
will be considered as defects. Warpage shall not exceed 1/4“ (6 mm) clearance over height or width.
.3
Warranty shall cover hanging, refinishing, and complete replacement costs of defective doors.
.4
Total warranty period shall be as defined by each door type listed below.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings. Indicate door types and
cutouts for lights and louvers.
1.3.2
1.4
1.4.1
Identify packaged doors with labels. Store flat at site, in dry locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
Suite Doors (doors within suites)
All interior suite doors shall be hollow core, four panel design, smooth finish and shop primed ready for paint. Executive
Series Atherton as manufactured by Jeld Wen Windows and Doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Install door as per manufactures written instructions.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08337
FOLDING SECURITY GRILLES
Page 08337-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
AMP-501-88
1.2
Submittals
1.2.1
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for Consultant's review before fabrication. Include published data, detailed
plans, elevations, required clearances and accessories.
1.2.2
Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions for incorporation in Project Data Book.
1.2.3
Warranty
.1
Architectural Metal Products, Finishes for Aluminum.
Provide a written warranty in accordance with section 01300.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Security Grille
2.1.1
Design based on "Aeroflex” as manufactured by Mobilflex Inc.
2.1.2
Curtain: The top and bottom of each section is fitted with an aluminum panel 4” high (102mm). This panel consists of an
aluminum extrusion 1/16” (1,6mm) thick and composed of modules with a 15° angle between them to facilitate the
operation of the closure. The curtain is constructed of 6” (152mm) wide modules linked together by a continuous
aluminum hinge. These hinges hold steel perforated panels with 3/16” (5mm) diameter holes providing a 51% visibility
and ventilation through the panels.
Locking:
a.
Lead post shall be equipped with a hook bolt lock with MobilFlex cylinders each side.
b.
Lead post shall engage a full height wall jamb.
c.
Trailing post shall be self-locking at the top and bottom inside the storage pocket.
d.
Free floating intermediate posts shall be located at all curves and at recommended intervals of 10 feet (3m) or 5
feet (1,5m) for counter top units. Intermediate posts shall be equipped with self-adjusting spring loaded drop
bolts activated from the inside only. Drop bolts shall engage dustproof stainless steel receptacles.
Track:
a.
Curtain shall be hung from an overhead track
1-5/16” (33mm) wide by 1-9/16” (40mm) high. Track shall be tempered aluminum alloy 6351-T6.
b.
Curves where required shall be 14” (356mm) radius standard.
Stacking: Stacking shall not exceed a depth of 1.15” per foot of closure width plus 3” for each post (lead, end or
intermediate). (95mm/lin. m + 76mm per post). Full egress doors add 7” (178mm).
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.2
Aluminum Finish
2.2.1
Clear anodized conforming to AMP-501, AA-M12C22A41.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08337
FOLDING SECURITY GRILLES
Page 08337-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
Installation
Erect grilles in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions
Through-wall fastening will not be permitted.
Install under manufacturer's supervision to ensure free-running, properly counterbalanced and tight-closing operation.
Verify that other trades have completed all preparation work. Verify dimensions of opening prior to installation.
Install closure as per printed instructions from MobilFlex and approved shop drawing. Clean and adjust closure to ensure
smooth operation.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08520
EXTERIOR WINDOWS AND DOORS
Page 08521-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
This sections specifies exterior window / door systems and related accessories.
1.2
General: Window manufacturers referenced standards and the following;
Aluminum Association (AA), Designation System for Aluminum Finishes (2000)
ASTM A653/A653M - Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed)
by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.
ASTM E330 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static
Air Pressure Difference.
ASTM E547 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure
Difference
CAN/CGSB-12.3 - Flat, Clear Float Glass.
CAN/CGSB-12.8 – Insulating Glass Units.
CAN/CGSB-12.1 – Tempered or Laminated Saftey Glass
CSA-A440-00 – Windows, CSA-A440.1 User Selection Guide to CSA Standard CAN/CSA –A440-00 Windows
CSA-G164 - Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
ASTM E2190 – Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation
CAN/CGSB-12.20M – Structural Design of Glass for Buildings
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
Quality Assurance
Qualification of Subcontractor: Execute work of this Section using a fabricator and erector who has adequate plant,
equipment and skilled tradesmen to perform work expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible for satisfactory
installations during a period of at least ten (10) years. Submit proof of experience upon request of Consultant.
Work of this section must take into consideration and coordinate work of this section with other sections. Coordinate
with other trades as required.
Submittals
Samples
.1
.2
Submit one (1) representative 24” x 24” (600 mm x 600 mm) model of each window and door type.
.3
Submit samples of operating hardware
.4
Include frame, sash, sill, vision glass, operating unit and surface finishes
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340.
.2
Indicate materials and details in scale full size for head, jamb and sill, profiles of components, interior and
exterior trim junction between combination units, elevations of unit, anchorage details, location of isolation
coating, description of related components, and exposed finishes, fasteners, and caulking. Indicate location
of manufacturer's nameplates.
.3
Submit design calculations that confirm window assemblies / insulated glass units / doors shall
withstand wind loads and where required act as a guard in accordance with the Ontario Building
Code. Calculations shall be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the Province
of Ontario.
Test Reports: Submit test reports from approved independent testing laboratories, certifying compliance with
specifications, for:
Living
project no 1504
.1
.2
SECTION 08520
Page 08521-2
Windows: Provide test reports for the window that demonstrate the windows / doors comply with CSA-A440
ratings as defined in section 1.4 – Performance Requirements including; air leakage “fixed” rating for nonoperating windows, rating for operating windows, water leakage rating, wind load resistance , forced entry
rating.
Insulation Value
.1
Overall and combined thermal resistance value inclusive of frame and insulated glazing unit of
R5.
1.3.4
Warranties
.1
Submit a warranty covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of nine (9)
Conditions. Structural failure, leaking, loosening, fading, discolouration, deforming, delamination or
separation of finish cladding from window member shall be judged as defective work. Total warranty period
shall be ten (10) years.
.2
Submit a warranty covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of nineteen
(19) years from the expiration of the standard one (1) year warranty included in the Contract under the
General Conditions. Seal failure; interplane dusting, misting or condensation shall be judged as defective
work. Total warranty period shall be twenty (20) years.
1.3.5
Manufacturer’s Instructions
.1
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product
catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, referenced standards and data
sheets.
1.4
1.4.1
Performance Requirements
System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind
acting normal to plane of window as measured in accordance with the Ontario Building Code and in accordance with
CAN/CGSB-12.20M – Structural Design of Glass for Buildings.
Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/200 of the longer dimension with full recovery of glazing materials.
Assembly: To accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and
perimeter framing, deflection of lintel.
Classification rating to CAN / CSA-A440.1 “User Selection Guide to CSA Standard CAN / CSA-A440-00, Windows.” CSAA440 air leakage “fixed” rating for non-operating windows and “A3” rating for operating windows, water leakage rating B7,
wind load resistance C3, and forced entry rating F10.
System Internal Drainage: Drain incidental water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating
moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network within glazing network.
Air and Vapour Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside
pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
Acceptable Manufacturers
Drawings and specifications for work of this Section are based the following manufacturers and styles;
.1
Fixed Windows: Donat Flamand Collection – DF 3103 Picture Windows as manufactured by Jeld Wen
Windows & Doors.
.2
Casement Windows: Donat Flamand Collection Series – DF 3103 Casement Windows as manufactured by
Jeld Wen Windows & Doors.
.2
Exterior Doors: United Series, Single Steel Entry Door, as manufactured by Jeld Wen.
2.2
System Descriptions
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08520
Page 08521-3
2.2.1
Windows: Donat Flamand Collection DF 3103 Casement Windows as manufactured by Jeld Wen.
.1
Windows shall have the following characteristics;
.1
Window Frame: shall be 3 1/4” deep, complete with a 3 1/2” brickmould and 6 1/8” PVC clad pine
jamb extensions on the interior. Refer to drawings details for additional information and installation
requirements.
.2
Operating Unit: shall be casement style. Where required operators shall have locks to restrict opening
of window greater than 4” in conformance with the Ontario Building Code 9.7.1.6 (1b).
.3
Hardware: Each operating unit shall be ‘Encore’ folding hardware with multi point locking hardware.
Finish colour to be white.
.4
Glazing: Refer to section 08800 Glass and Glazing
.5
Interior Finish: All exposed interior hemlock shall be stained finish as selected by the Owner at a later
date.
.6
Screens: glass fibre mesh, colour: black, located on interior of window in rolled aluminium, prefinished
frame, sit with adjustable locking hardware.
.7
Simulated Divided Lites: interior and exterior applied grilles shall be 7/8” wide and denoted as ‘SDL’ on
the drawings. Colour shall match exterior window frame.
.8
Weatherstripping: shall be polyethylene pile, thermoplastic elastomer bulb seal and extruded sill seal,
permanently resilient, profiled to effect a continuous tight fitting weather seal.
.9
Fasteners: shall be concealed, stainless steel.
2.2.2
Exterior Doors: Steel Entrance Doors as manufactured by Jeld Wen.
.1
Exterior Doors shall have the following characteristics;
.1 Basis of Design: Doors are based on the JELD-WEN®’s Gladiator Steel Doors.
1. Gladiator Ovolo
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
MATERIALS
Wood Frames: Western Pine, preservative treated with AuraLast™ in accordance with WDMA I.S.4.
Steel Skins: 24 gauge cold-rolled galvanized steel.
Stiles and Rails
Wood Edge Construction: 1 inch Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL).
Core: Custom-fitted Polystyrene.
STEEL ENTRANCE DOORS
Thickness: 1-3/4 inch
Edge Construction: Wood.
Door Design
a.
Door Surface: Smooth
b.
Door Shape: Squared Top.
c.
Door Style: Solid
d.
Face Pattern: 3-Panel craftsman
Sticking Profile: Standard
Finish: Two coats of neutral, low sheen, baked-on enamel primer.
Hardware: None. Prep door for owner supplied hinge and lockset.
Hardware Finish: Refer to Finished Hardware 08710
PREHUNG HARDWOOD SYSTEMS
Profile: System 01, Single Door
Jamb: Solid pine Auralast wood.
a.
Profile: Rabbeted]
b.
Width: 6-9/16 inch.
Living
project no 1504
O.
P.
Q.
1.3
SECTION 08520
Page 08521-4
Casing: Brickmould
Hinges: Solid brass concealed-bearing.
a.
Finish: Zinc Dichromate
Sills: Aluminum with Polished Aluminum Finish.
Hardware: Operating hardware shall include ball bearing hinges, multipoint locking system, deadbolt, extruded aluminum
threshold, top / bottom bolts and astragal. All hardware shall have brushed nickel finish. Lockset / handles shall be
elected by the Owner supplied by others. Coordinate installation of this hardware with the multipoint locking
system on the doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
FABRICATION
Fabricate framing and sash members with mortise and tenon joints. Glue and steel pin joints to hairline fit,
Finger joints not permitted in units.
Form metal cladding with integral nailing flange, sloped for wash.
Form glass stops of solid wood sloped for wash.
Form attachment flange integral to perimeter of unit.
Fabricate components with consistent clearances, shim spaces around perimeter of assembly, enabling installation and
dynamic movement of frame and perimeter seal.
Arrange fasteners concealed from view.
Assemble insect screen frame with reinforced frame corners. Stretch mesh taut into frame and secure. Fit frame with
spring loaded steel pin retainers.
Double weatherstrip operable units.
Factory glaze window units.
EXAMINATION
Prior Inspection of the Structure: After lines and grades have been established, and before beginning installation in any
area, examine all parts of the structure on which work of this section is to be placed in that area. Should any conditions
be found which will prevent the proper execution of work, report such conditions in writing to the Consultant. Do not
proceed with installation work until such conditions are corrected or adjusted to the satisfaction of the Consultant and the
installation Contractor.
Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapour seal materials are ready to receive work of this section.
INSTALLATION
Lines and Grades: Obtain bench marks for elevations and building line offset marks for alignment on each floor level.
Should any error be found in their location, notify the Consultant in writing. Do not proceed with installation work in the
affected area until the errors have been corrected.
Install windows and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.
Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
Install jamb extensions.
Inject low expansion polyurethane foam into spaces at perimeter of window frame assembly to maintain continuity of air,
vapour, and thermal barrier.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapour barrier materials.
Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria using Type A sealant, backing materials,
and installation criteria in Section 07900 – Sealants
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08520
Page 08521-5
3.4
3.4.1
ERECTION TOLERANCES
Erect the work within the following tolerances:
.1 Maximum variation from plane or location shown on reviewed shop drawings: 1/8” (3mm) per 10’-0” (3000 mm)
of length or 6 mm in any total length.
.2
Maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line or side by
side: 1/32” (0.8 mm).
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
ADJUSTING
Adjusting installed work.
Adjust door for smooth / balanced door movement and full closure
Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
CLEANING
Clean installed work. Clean off dirt resulting from erection on surfaces exposed to view.
Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces.
Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces
clean.
Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively- finished or tool-marked components and replace with new.
surfaces of all work of this Section. Use proper cleaning materials and methods to prevent damage to surfaces, finishes,
sealer or work of other trades. Make good such damage to Consultant's satisfaction.
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.6.7
3.6.8
3.6.9
3.6.10
3.6.11
3.6.12
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
Protecting installed work.
Do not permit continuing construction activities near unprotected finish surfaces.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08521
ALUMINUM WINDOW AND DOOR SYSTEM
Page 08521-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
General: Window manufacturers referenced standards and the following;
CAN/CSA-A440-M00
Windows
CAN/CSA-G164-M92
CAN/CSA-S157-M83
Strength Design in Aluminium
CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90
CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91
Flat, Clear Float Glass
CAN/CGSB-12.4-M91
Glass, Heat Absorbing
CAN/CGSB-12.8-97
Insulating Glass Units
CAN/CGSB-1.108-M89
Bituminous Solvent Type Paint
CAN/CGSB 19.24-M90
Multi-component, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound
NAAMM AMP-505-88
The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, Applied
Coatings
NAAMM AMP-501-88
The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, Finishes for
Aluminium
AAMA 605.2
American Architectural Manufacturer's Association "Voluntary Specification
for High Performance Organic Coating on Architectural Extrusions and
Panels".
CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89
Structural Design of Glass for Buildings
ASTM E283-04
Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Window & Door system, Window & Door Systems, and Doors Under
Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen
ASTM E330-02
Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Window & Door Systems by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
ASTM E331-00
Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Window & Door Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
1.2.13
1.2.14
1.2.15
1.2.16
1.3
1.3.1
.1
.2
Design of Window & Door system
Design Window & Door System to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/1.S.2/A 440 -08 and the SB10 of 2012 Ontario Building Code
Design glazed aluminum Window & Door System following rainscreen principles.
Ensure horizontal members are sealed to vertical members to form individual compartments in accordance with
rainscreen principles.
.3
Ventilate and pressure equalize air space outside exterior surface of insulation to exterior.
.4
Window & Door System systems including glazing, must meet RSI (R-VALUES) described in SB10 of the 2012 Ontario
Building Code.
1.3.2
Design aluminum components to CAN/CSA S157.
1.3.3
Design and size Window & Door system components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction
of wind, acting normal to plane of wall using design pressure of 25 psf.
.1
Design Window & Door system for expansion and contraction caused by cycling temperature range of
95
degrees C over
12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components.
Living
project no 1504
.2
to
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-2
Thermal expansion: Ensure Window & Door system can withstand temperature differential of 85 degrees C and is able
accommodate interior and exterior system expansion and contraction without damage to components or deterioration
of seals.
.3
Design vertical expansion joints with baffled overlaps and compressed resilient air seal laid between mullion ends.
.4
Ensure system is designed to accommodate:
.1
Movement within Window & Door system assembly.
.2
Movement between system and perimeter framing components.
.3
Dynamic loading and release of loads.
.4
Deflection of structural support framing.
.5
Shortening of building concrete structural columns.
.6
Creep of concrete structural members.
.7
Mid-span slab edge deflection: 6 mm maximum.
.5
Thermal resistance
.1
Vision glass areas: Insulating Glass Unit U 0.35 for operable units
.2
Vision glass areas: Insulating Glass Unit U 0.30 for Window & Door system
.6
Limit mullion deflection to [flexure limit of glass 19 mm , 0.75 inches, L/175 maximum
with full recovery of glazing materials.
.7
Deadload prevention: Design Window & Door system with separate, integrated support for insulating glass units.
.8
Glass dimensions: Size glass units to CAN/CGSB-12.20.
.9
Flatness criteria: 6 mm, 0.25 inches maximum in 6 m, 20 feet for each panel.
.10
Air infiltration: 0.3 L/s/m2 (0.63 cfm) maximum of wall area to [AAMA 501] [ASTM E283] at differential pressure
across assembly of 300 Pa (0.044 psi).
.11
Water infiltration: None to [AAMA 501] [ASTM E331] [ASTM E1105] at differential pressure across assembly of
720Pa (0.104 psi).
.12
Ensure interior surfaces have no condensation before exposed edges of sealed units reach dew point temperatures
during testing to [AAMA 501].
.13
Maintain continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout building envelope and Window & Door system
assembly.
.14
Ensure no vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to
other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system occur.
1.3.4
Window & Door system and operators shall meet the following design requirements as per CAN/CSA A440.
.1
Air tightness: A3.
.2
Water tightness: B3.
.3
Wind load resistance: C3.
.4
Condensation resistance: Temperature Index, I58.
.5
Forced Entry: F10.
1.3.5
The drawings and specifications do not intend to identify or solve the requirements of thermal, structural, vapour and air
movement, drainage, methods of anchorage, flatness and other requirements. The responsibility of performance rests
solely with the Window & Door system by manufacturer. Base Window & Door system design on the "rain screen
principle", as advocated by the National Research Council, with all voids within components having: .1
Such gaskets, baffles, overlaps, and seals as required to provide a barrier "rain screen" to effectively prevent
rainwater entry into any of the cavities and to interior rooms. Include in this section, all metal air/vapour
barriers, and liners required for the project.
.2
Provisions in the form of openings, between cavities and the building exterior, these orifices being of
sufficient cross-sections to provide instantaneous pressure equalization. In addition, baffle all openings
against direct rainwater entry. NOTE: Place all "air barriers" at locations to eliminate any contact between
interior humid air and exterior cold air, and structure components and to subsequently prevent any moisture
and ice build-up on the said surfaces during cold weather.
.3
A thermal break that will provide absolute separation between the exterior and interior metal. The resultant
frame resistance to heat transfer at all points shall equal or exceed that of the glazing.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-3
.4
1.3.6
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.3.9
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
Provide at Window & Door System, a vented vapour flow bypass chamber to trap from interior of building and
drain resultant condensation to exterior, thereby preventing its passage to space between the interior and
exterior glass lights.
.5
Overall and combined Imperial thermal resistance value of all window frame/glazing assemblies shall have
the following minimum range; R3 +.
Have work of this Section designed by a Professional Engineer licensed to design structures in the Province of Ontario.
Comply with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code.
Comply with the design and performance requirements specified in the building codes, and as specified in this Section,
and design and engineer the work accordingly. In designing and engineering the work, the following principles shall be
followed:
.1
Follow profiles and sizes shown on the Drawings.
.2
Window & Door system glazing shall be replaceable from the interior.
.3
Glass shall have a uniform appearance and colour.
.4
The exposed components of the system shall have a uniform appearance.
.5
Locate sealants, air/vapour seals, thermal breaks, thermal separations, drainage slots as required to meet
requirements of this Section.
.6
Provide an air and water tight seal at interior glass.
.7
The pressure glazing bead shall contain provisions for thermal expansions and contractions.
.8
Conceal fastenings, except where specified otherwise. Should some exposed fastenings be necessary and
it can be demonstrated accordingly to the satisfaction of the Consultant, the exposed fastenings shall be in
the same finish and colour as the member in which they occur.
.9
Provide accessories required and necessary to complete the work including all framing accessories and door
adapters at door jambs and heads.
.10
Provide galvanized steel reinforcing within mullions and/or framing to support Window & Door system where
and as required.
.11
The work shall have a method of attachment to the structure which shall take into account site peculiarities
and so that there shall be no possibility of site and air vibrations or normal temperature movements of the
building to loosen, weaken, and/or fracture the connection between the units and the structure or between
the units themselves.
.12
Design, assemble, and secure the assembly in a manner that will keep any stresses on sealants within the
manufacturer's recommended maximum.
.13
Provide all reinforcing within aluminium members as required by design to provide structurally sound
assembly. In any case, mullion size shall not be increased due to provision of reinforcing.
.14
Thermally break frame members. Provide thermal breaks between exterior and interior components,
insulate and isolate assemblies to provide total absence of condensation on interior metal or glass surfaces
under maintained design conditions.
.15
Design frames so that edges of inner pane of insulating glass units do not fall more than 8C below the
temperature of the centre of the inner pane.
.16
Window & Door system fastener supports shall coordinate and take into account conditions where exterior
cladding relies on bent metal clips for fastening.
All glass shall conform to CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, and CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89.
Provision For Thermal Movement, Structural Deflection and Creepage, and Interfacing With Other Trades
Design, fabricate and install the wall assembly to provide for such expansion and contraction of component materials as
will be caused by an ambient temperature for the location of the building, without causing buckling, delamination, oilcanning, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental defects.
Similarly design, fabricate and install frames, and structural supports to accommodate structural deflection and column
creep of 3/4” (19 mm) maximum without detriment to the work. Interface and co-ordinate with adjacent work of other
trades particularly the air/vapour barrier and roofing trades to ensure that the final result will be a permanent watertight,
and air/vapour tight assembly.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-4
1.5
1.5.1
Wind, Snow, Ice, and Glass Cleaning Loading
Design, fabricate and install all work to support a wind force pressure and snow and ice loads for the locality in
accordance with The Ontario Building Code. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 and/or 20mm maximum. Submit
structural calculations as requested by Consultant or authorities having jurisdiction. Also make allowance for pressures
which window washing equipment will place on cladding.
1.6
1.6.1
Alignment of Structural Supports
Be responsible for final horizontal and vertical setting and supply, installation and alignment of structural supports.
1.7
1.7.1
Quality Assurance
Qualification of Subcontractor: Execute work of this Section using a fabricator and erector who has adequate plant,
equipment and skilled tradesmen to perform work expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible for satisfactory
installations during a period of at least ten (10) years. Submit proof of experience upon request of Consultant.
Testing and Inspection
.1
The Contractor shall retain an independent inspection company to inspect work of this section and to perform
additional shop and field inspection as required.
.2
The inspection company will verify that shop drawings show that the work of this Section has been designed
in accordance with established Building Envelope design principles.
.3
The costs of such inspection and testing will be paid for by the Contractor in accordance with the
requirements of 01400, Quality Control.
.4
Third party testing to provide copy of reports to consultant within three (3) days.
.5
Refer to section 1400 Quality Control
.6
Refer also to section 01830 Facility Commissioning- Building Envelope.
Coating Applicator: The metal finishing shall be performed by a finisher / applicator approved in writing by the
manufacturer of the coatings and under the supervision of the manufacturer's qualified representative.
Work of this section must take into consideration and coordinate work of this section with other sections. Coordinate with
other trades as required.
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.8
1.8.1
Submittals
Samples
.1
.2
Submit one (1) representative 12” x 12” (300mm x 300 mm) model of each Window & Door systems.
.3
Include frame, sash, sill, vision glass, spandrel panel and weatherproofing method, and surface finish.
1.8.2
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340.
.2
Indicate materials and details in scale full size for head, jamb and sill, profiles of components, interior and
exterior trim junction between combination units, elevations of unit, anchorage details, location of isolation
coating, description of related components, and exposed finishes, fasteners, and caulking. Indicate location
of manufacturer's nameplates.
.3
Indicate size location of steel reinforcing located in aluminium mullions.
.4
Shop drawings shall bear the seal and signature of a qualified Professional Structural Engineer licensed to
practise in the Province of Ontario.
.5
Shop drawings for windows and Window & Door System must coordinate with exterior cladding design and
shop drawings. Shop drawings include plywood box. Indicate frame to plywood box fastening installation.
1.8.3
Test Reports: Submit test reports from approved independent testing laboratories, certifying compliance with
specifications, for:
Living
project no 1504
.1
.2
.3
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-5
Windows: CSA-A440 air leakage “fixed” rating for non-operating windows and “A3” rating for operating
windows, water leakage rating B3, wind load resistance C3, condensation resistance temperature index
minimum 59, with insulating glazing units.
Window & Door System
.1
Structural performance shall be based on CSA Standard CAN3-S157 "Strength Design in
Aluminium" and a maximum deflection of 1/175 (and 20mm maximum) of the span.
.2
Air infiltration shall not exceed 0.0003 m³/s-m² when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a
pressure differential of 300 Pa.
.3
There shall be no water infiltration when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 with a pressure
differential of 720 Pa. Thermally, the grid members shall have a condensation resistance equal to
or better than the area along the bottom of a 25 mm sealed glass unit as defined in Item 2.2
Materials of this Section.
Insulation Value
.1
Overall and combined thermal resistance value inclusive of frame and insulated glazing unit of
R3+.
1.8.4
Warranty
.1
Submit a warranty covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of four (4)
Conditions.
.2
Structural failure, leaking, loosening, fading, discolouration, deforming and failure of glazing units shall be
judged as defective work.
.3
Total warranty period shall be five (10) years.
1.8.5
Manufacturer’s Instructions
.1
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product
catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, referenced standards and data
sheets.
1.8.6
Manufacturer's Letter of Compliance
.1
Manufacturer will submit a sealed letter to the consultant, confirming compliance with all
requirements noted above for every window system listed below.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
Drawings and specifications for work of this Section are based the following manufacturers and styles;
.1
CS 68 Windows & Doors System (Functional style) as manufactured by Reynaers Inc.
.2
Vision 50 (Interior Aluminum Screen) as manufactured by Reynaers Inc.
Glazing used for windows consists of 25.4mm thick insulated units, refer to section 08800 – Glass and Glazing.
Aluminium sills shall be manufactured by the window supplier as detailed on drawings.
Products and systems by other manufacturers of similar profile and conforming to all required design and performance
requirements of the drawings and specifications are also acceptable.
.1
Reynaers Inc, www.reynaers.us/contact.
Wherever possible all components (except glass products) shall come from a single source.
Living
project no 1504
2.2
2.2.1
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-6
Systems Descriptions
CS 68 Windows & Doors System (Functional style)
.1
Frames
CS 68 is an aluminium framed window and door system, depths of sections 2 5/16” (59mm), glass weights and anticipated
design wind loadings advised for the site. Opening windows and doors can be incorporated. Main system types are as
follows.
Aluminium WindowsReynaers CS68 system (openings)
Type CS68 opening vents, side hung top hung and tilt & turn casements with fixed lights
Designed system as dry glazed pressure equalised façade solution.
Mullion supported with cleats in to centre chambers integrated transom profiles.
EPDM gasket seals throughout, gasket setting connection seals between transom and mullion suspension profiles to
accommodate expansion movement..
Allow complete drainage evacuation to the outside via transom weeps drainage, additional transom drainage to the exterior
where recommended by system manufacturer.
Ventilation allowance to be provided at perimeter of all infill panels and double / triple glazed units.
Provide for all screen and building tolerances within the façade system including;
- Sufficient edge cover on all infill panels to ensure and maintain weather seal
- edge clearance from infill panels to accommodate expansion contraction and imposed loading bending accommodation
within the façade system.
Maximum thermal separation from internal and external aluminium surfaces to combat thermal bridging.
Integrated hidden mechanical fixation of all external standard mullion and transom,
Integrated hidden mechanical fixation of transom to mullion internal connection in combination with transom overlap detail
to mullion profiles.
Exterior visible dimensions, 2 5/16” (59mm)
Interior visible dimension, 2 5/16”(59mm), depth of profile dependent on span.
Exposure category,
Design Wind Pressure advised as Project specific Design Wind Loading
Site Wind speeds and design wind pressures for the building envelope shall be calculated in accordance with current
national codes for determination of wind load on buildings. BS-6399-2.
Weather performance:
Exposure category:
Performance to be equal to the following;
Air permeability EN 12153, EN 12152, Test Pressure Class A4 to 600Pa
Water tightness EN 12155, EN 12154, Test Pressure Class RE to 900Pa
Wind Load resistance to frame deflection EN 12211, EN 12210, Test Pressure Class C to ≤ 1/300
Wind resistance EN 12211, EN 12210, Test Pressure Class 5 to 2000Pa
Thermal performance:
Performance and testing to conform to EN 10077-2
Average outerframe & vent combination ‘U’f values 1.8W/m2K to 2.9W/m2K
Typical window ‘U’w whole window value of 1.6W/m2K, with dgu 1.1W/m2K centre pane value. Warm edge spanners
to be used throughout.
Thermal Stress in Glazing
Glass panes/ units: Must have adequate resistance to thermal stress generated by orientation, shading, solar control
and construction.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-7
Acoustic performance:
Performance and testing to conform to EN ISO 140-3, EN ISO 717-1
As advised on the Contract tender documents and Glazing Schedules
40dB (Tra) to glazed elements of the Building Perimeter
25dB (Tra) to glazed elements of the Courtyard
Glazing Type;
Insulated DGU’s up to 44mm overall thickness
Pane materials
Thickness of DGU’s to be generally 28mm except where alternative prescriptions are required to meet the
performances of Acoustic and Thermal properties. In so far as is possible a similar glass thickness is to be maintained
on the building or at least on each façade.
Where alternate glazing thickness are proposed detailed performance data sheets are to be provided to access
performance ratings and light transmission. Samples for visual assesement must be provided to the satisfaction of the
design team.
Safety Glazing to be provided in accordance with current Building Regulations and codes of practice. Any window with
glazing panels less than 800mm above GFL or FFL to comply with BS6206 Class C. Any glazing panel within a door
located internally or externally and below 1.5m from FFL or within 300mm to the side of the door to comply with BS6206
Class A. Where the glazing panels are greater than 900mm width they shall satisfy the requirements of BS6206 Class
B
Or as specifically defined in window schedule
Polished glass edges to all panes.
Glass to glass corners to be provided with stepped edge overlap unit. Please refer to Architects section details to
identify primary surface for stepped edge.
Glass thicknesses and safety glasses to BS 6206 will comply with the requirements of BS 6262.
Glazing system:
Dry glazed with EPDM gaskets as per Reynaers recommendations. External E type gasket connection to frame with
wedge type gasket to the interior at all times.
Glass thickness’ and safety glasses to BS 6206 will comply with the requirements of BS 6262.
Avoidance of Condensation
Requirement: Notional psychrometric conditions under which condensation should not form on building interior surfaces
of framing members or any part of infill panels/ facings are:
External summer: +20 Deg C .
External winter: -1 Deg C .
Internal summer: +22 Deg C +/- 2DegC .
Internal winter: +22 Deg C +/- 2DegC .
Internal RH levels 40%
Where compliance with all condensation risk parameters is not necessarily achievable indication of actual performance
on the Window & Door Systeming framing only and Window & Door Systeming in combination with proprietary
insert door solutions to be calculated and presented to the Architect / Design team on tender submission for
consideration.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-8
Finish:
All aluminum profiles to be polyester powder coated, Syntha Pulvin powder unless otherwise stated to RAL 9003 Signal
white Standard colour finish in single colour application inside and out.
Coating and finish to BS 6496.
Minimum film thickness
60 microns standard application
Special Characteristics:
Satin finish ironmongery hinges and handles to the interior.
DPM membrane material to be used for flashing connection and material separation in all locations within the screen
construction. Perimeter connections of punch open window / or glazier into Window & Door Systems all to be provided with
a proprietary shroud element bonded and mechanically fixed to the aluminum frames and available for bonding / sealing to
the building envelope. Air-tight building connections required in all instances. For a quality production all aluminum shroud
connections to be made in factory controlled environments for all profiles being delivered to the site.
Particular care and attention to be given to the head and jamb building in details and interface junctions with other building
materials. Fully insulated connections to be made to all reveals to reduce or eliminate cold bridging at these locations.
Proprietary air sealing materials to be used on all junction connections between windows and doors system. Please refer to
Architects typical details to identify proposed sealing products.
All building connections to be highly insulated so as to ensure continuity of thermal performance designed for in both the
glazed façade solution and the surrounding wall and floor constructions.
Vapour control check layer to be provided on warm side of all perimeter insulations fitted by the glazing contractor to
ensure no migration or trapping of moisture behind external weather seals.
2.3
2.3.1
Vision 50 (Interior Aluminum Screen) By Reynaers Inc.
.1
Drawings and Specifications are based on Vision 50 Series (Interior Aluminum Screen) manufactured by
Reynaers Aluminum. Drawings designate this series by the abbreviation ‘AL#’ - the number that
follows the letters AL references the store front locations / configuration.
Detailed description
Door with square profile corners. Inward or outward opening. Non thermally broken. Side hung on pivot
available in single or double door format. Manufactured under a quality assurance scheme to ISO
9001:2000. Guaranteed for ten years. Rated to Secured by Design standards. Product guidance - As
Standard
Material:
Aluminium frames with a glass fibre reinforced polyamide thermal break, dry-glazed with EPDM or
neutral silicone gaskets.
Ironmongery/ Accessories:
All handles, locks and rollers to be supplied by Reynaers Inc for details.
Options
Finish as delivered:
Powder coating is available in any standard RAL colour, anodized finish also available. Different colours
may be used internally and externally.
Product specification
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-9
Manufacturer: Reynaers Inc
Opening Double doors / Single door
Configuration Manufacturer's standard - Sliding doors.
Inward opening /Outward opening
Pivot Manufacturer's standard
Anti-finger trap
Configuration Manufacturer's standard - Sliding doors.
Inward opening / Outward opening
Pivot Manufacturer's standard
Anti-finger trap
Finish as delivered Anodized
Polyester powder coated
Colour to be RAL 9003 Signal white Standard colour finish
External colour to be RAL 9003 Signal white Standard colour finish
Internal As external
.2
.3
.4
.5
.7
.8
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
2.3.11
2.3.12
Face dimension (sightline) of principal members shall be 2” (50.3mm). Depth of members shall 3 15/16”
(100mm).
Aluminum Screen shall be of “single component” design, whereby the entire system shall be fabricated
and installed as individual components. Assembly shall be by means of shear block.
Assemble system using #400 stainless steel fasteners. Fasteners shall maintain integrity of system when
subjected to specified loads and movements.
Aluminum Screen shall accept glass units of 6mm overall thickness.
Provide anodized aluminum closers and trim as detailed to suit project.
Provide Door Adapters complete with door stop and weatherstripping.
Materials – General
Provide materials generally as described below, and in accordance with the window and/or glazing manufacturer’s
requirements respectfully.
Aluminium Extrusions and Sheet: AA6063-T54 alloy for extrusions; AA alloy 3003-H14 for sheets and plates.
Screws, Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Rivets, and Other Fastening Devices: Stainless austenitic grade (300 Series) steel and of
sufficient strength for the purpose. Pressure plate screws and anchor bolts, cadmium plated.
Isolation Coating: to CAN/CGSB-1.108.
Anchors, Steel Bracing and Supports: Prime-painted steel, conforming to CAN/CSA-G40.21, to suit indicated conditions
and as required to properly support and anchor system.
Thermal Break: Fabricate thermal break members of extruded PVC to suit glazing unit and in accordance with
glazing/window manufacturer.
Glazing Gaskets: Tremco "Visionstrip" exterior flexible tubular extruded EPDM, interior extruded polymer with integral
spacer shim.
Glazing Tape: 13/64” (5 mm) thick x height required 100% solid polyisobutylene-butyl, reinforced preformed tape with
built in spacer.
General Sealant Compound For Joints and Air/Vapour Foam Seals: ‘Silpruf’ as manufactured by General Electric
Canada or ‘795’ as manufactured by Dow Corning, including primer as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Colour
to match adjacent cladding colour.
Heel Bead Sealant: Conforming to CAN/CGSB 19.13-M87.
Foamed-in-place Insulation Air Seals: "Enerfoam" by Dow, "Froth-Pak" by Dow or other approved manufacturer.
Sealant Backing Rod: Extruded, foamed, closed cell, round polyethylene rod, 25% wider than joint width.
Setting Blocks and Spacer Shims: Neoprene or oil-resistant rubber or silicone, as approved by glass manufacturer.
Living
project no 1504
2.3.13
2.3.14
2.3.15
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-10
Metal Air / Vapour Barriers – NOT USED
Air / Vapour Barrier (AVB) Transitions: Self adhesive sheet membrane as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, W.R.
Grace, Monsey-Bakor, or Soprema. Provide complete with primer. Ensure compatibility with building air/vapour barrier
installed by Others.
Sills (typical) to be 1.2mm thick extruded aluminium sills as detailed on drawings. Finish to match (exterior) windows. At
joints in sills provide a layer of Air Vapour Barrier (AVB) Transition for 4” on either side of joint in sills. Cover AVB with
another layer of extruded aluminium sill, min 10” long.
2.4
2.4.1
Glass and Glazing
Supply and Install in accordance with Section 08800.
2.5
2.5.1
Aluminium Finishes
Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum frames, closures, panels and other exposed components in accordance with
Aluminium Association Designation System for Aluminium Finishes.
Interior Finishes: All interior exposed aluminum surfaces except as otherwise specified or shown shall be factory finished
with an anodic oxide treatment to obtain an Architectural Class 2 clear anodized aluminum in accordance with
Aluminium Association Specifications AA-M12C22A31.
Exterior Finishes: All exterior exposed aluminum surfaces shall be factory finished with an anodic oxide treatment to
obtain an Architectural Class 2 clear anodized aluminum in accordance with Aluminium Association Specifications AAM12C22A31.
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.7
2.7.1
Fabrication - General
Structural performance shall be based on CSA Standard CAN3-S157 "Strength Design in Aluminium" and a maximum
deflection of 1/175 of the span.
Fabricate windows in accordance with CAN/CSA-A440 supplemented as follows:
.1
Fabricate units square and true with maximum tolerance of plus or minus 1/16” (1.6 mm) for units with a
diagonal measurement of 6’-0” (1800 mm) or less and plus or minus 1/8” (3 mm) for units with a diagonal
measurement over 6’-0” (1800 mm).
.2
Brace frames to maintain squareness and rigidity during shipment and installation.
.3
Finish steel clips and reinforcement with shop coat primer to CAN/CGSB-1.40, 380 g/m² zinc coating to
CAN/CSA-G164.
.4
Fabricate framing from extrusions of sizes and shape shown on shop drawings. Framing shall be one part
construction with a two part chemically curing, high density, polyurethane thermal barrier. Join the thermal
barrier to the extrusion in such a way as to provide positive interlock, in addition to the adhesive bond,
between the two materials. Ensure that the positive interlock in the event of any loss of adhesion, the
thermal differential expansion/contraction of the composite section will be limited to 0.05% of the original
length, and the composite section will continue to act structurally as an integral unit. Maintain the thermal
integrity by the mechanical removal of the bridging element of the extrusion after curing.
.5
Design framing for screw spline corner construction. Accurately machine all framing joints to allow site
assembly and sealing, providing neat weathertight connections. Design coupling mullions to eliminate any
seam joint on the exterior while providing a functional split to permit modular construction and allow for
thermal expansion. Vent and drain glazing pockets to the exterior. All applied glass stop bases shall be
mechanically fastened and sealed to the window frame and concealed with a snap on cover.
Isolation Coating
Isolate aluminum from following components, by means of a heavy application of isolation coating:
.1
Dissimilar metals except stainless steel, zinc, or white bronze of small area.
.2
Concrete, mortar and masonry.
.3
Wood.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08521
2.8
2.8.1
Interior Closures
Fabricate aluminum closures of minimum 1/8” (3 mm) thick aluminum sheet.
2.9
2.9.1
Aluminium Doors:
Provide aluminum doors in accordance with the requirements of Section 08120, Aluminium Doors.
Page 08521-11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
Installation
Lines and Grades: Obtain bench marks for elevations and building line offset marks for alignment on each floor level.
Should any error be found in their location, notify the Consultant in writing. Do not proceed with installation work in the
affected area until the errors have been corrected.
Prior Inspection of the Structure: After lines and grades have been established, and before beginning installation in any
area, examine all parts of the structure on which work of this section is to be placed in that area. Should any conditions
be found which will prevent the proper execution of work, report such conditions in writing to the Consultant. Do not
proceed with installation work until such conditions are corrected or adjusted to the satisfaction of the Consultant and the
installation Contractor.
Workmanship: Erect windows and all parts of the Window & Door System plumb and true, in proper alignment and
relationship to established lines and grades, as shown on reviewed shop drawings. Make the finished work rigid, neat in
appearance, free from defects.
Erection Tolerances: Erect the work within the following tolerances:
.1
Maximum variation from plane or location shown on reviewed shop drawings: 1/8” (3mm) per 10’-0” (3000
mm) of length or 6 mm in any total length.
.2
Maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line or side by
side: 1/32” (0.8 mm).
Anchorage: Anchor the work to the structure by permanent methods, in strict accordance with reviewed shop drawings.
Design supporting brackets so as to provide three-dimensional adjustment and accurate location of wall components
after the wall is properly positioned. Rigidly fix by welding or other approved means, all connections so designated on
reviewed shop drawings.
Window & Door System Window and Panel Installation
.1
Install in accordance with CSA-A440-4.
.2
Arrange components to prevent abrupt variation in colour.
Sill Installation
.1
Install metal sills with uniform wash to exterior, level in length, straight in alignment with plumb upstands and
faces. Use one piece lengths at each location wherever possible. Install “S” Locks at joints. Leave at least
3/8” (10 mm) within “S” Lock for expansion.
.2
Secure sills in place with continuous beads of caulking anchoring devices located at end joints of continuous
sills and evenly spaced 24” (600 mm) o.c. in between.
.3
Carry sills under jambs, and seal with caulking. Install drip deflectors at jambs.
Metal and Self Adhered Air / Vapour Barrier Transitions
.1
Preparation
.1
Ensure that surfaces to receive sealant or glazing tape are dry, firm, straight, slightly textured for
bond, and free from loose material, projections, ice, frost, slick, grease, oil or other matter
detrimental to bond or uniform bedding of the material.
.2
Supply inserts where required for attachment of supplementary framing to the concrete trades for
casting-in-place.
.3
Maintain surface and ambient temperatures constantly between 10C and 35C during
application and curing of adhesive except as permitted otherwise by the Consultant in writing.
.2
Erection
Living
project no 1504
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
3.1.9
3.1.10
Glazing
.1
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-12
Secure barriers to concrete and masonry using pneumatic fixings and to metal using self-tapping
screws.
Gun-apply a continuous 1/4” (6 mm) bead of sealant to all joints and barrier junctions and
adjacent construction. Liberally butter screw fastenings where exposed to building interior. In
addition to sealing, set barrier edges which abut concrete in a continuous bedding of glazing tape.
Ensure the continuity of the air, vapour and thermal barrier within the construction specified herein
and with adjacent barrier construction.
Provide continuous air/vapour barrier seals at head and sill of windows.
Provide air seals at locations where metal air/vapour barrier abuts other construction, between
connections in air/vapour barrier components and elsewhere as shown.
Perform sealing in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 07900, Sealants, as if
fully cited herein, unless otherwise specified herein.
Fill spaces in cavities behind closures with foam and semi-rigid insulation as detailed.
Where indicated within Window & Door System and window assemblies install self adhered airvapour barrier transitions (noted as AVB) to maintain continuity with building air/vapour barrier
installed by Others.
Accurately measure glass openings and calculate glass size based on manufacturer's installation tables
allowing for proper minimum edge engagement, rabbet width, rabbet depth, and expansion.
.2
Before glazing, verify openings to see that they are square, plumb, and in true planes. If found otherwise, do
not proceed with glazing until proper corrections are made.
.3
Set insulating glass units on setting blocks placed at 1/8 points from each corner of glass.
.4
Dry glaze by means of EPDM gaskets on interior and preformed glazing tape with built-in shim on exterior.
Sealant and Air / Vapour Sealing
.1
Arrange with the sealant manufacturer for a visit to the job site by one of its technical representatives before
beginning the sealing installation to discuss with the Consultant the procedures to be adopted, to analyze site
conditions and inspect the surfaces and joints to be sealed, in order that recommendations may be made,
should adverse conditions exist. Discuss the following items:
.1
Weather conditions under which work will be done.
.2
Anticipated frequency and extent of joint movement.
.3
Joint design.
.4
Number of beads to be used in the sealing operation.
.5
Have manufacturer send report to the Consultant.
.2
Seal all joints required for a weatherproof installation and against air/vapour leakage. Use materials in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, and apply only by mechanics specially trained or
experienced in their use. Before applying sealants or compressible foam air seal, completely remove all
mortar, dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign matter from surfaces it will contact. Mask adjoining surfaces
when required, to maintain a clean and neat appearance. Tool sealing compounds to fill the joint and provide
a smooth finished surface.
.3
Before sealant application, fill all spaces deeper than 1/2” (12.7 mm) with bedding material packed tightly in
place to within 3/8” (10 mm) of finished surfaces. Bedding material shall be non-staining.
.4
Prime surfaces to receive sealant as required to provide positive permanent adhesion and to prevent
staining.
.5
Fill remaining space with sealant compound. Application of sealant compound shall be by approved,
recognized, skilled applicators and done in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions, under the
supervision of and using pressure guns and equipment approved by the sealant compound manufacturer.
Apply sealant compound to clean, dry, dust-free and grease and oil free surfaces. Exposed sealant
compound shall be smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, air pockets and imbedded foreign materials.
.6
Remove excess sealant compound or droppings which would set up or become difficult to remove from
finished surfaces. Chemicals, scrapers or other tools which affect the finished surfaces shall not be used for
Living
project no 1504
.7
SECTION 08521
Page 08521-13
such removal.
The fact that the drawings do not show all locations to be sealed does not limit responsibility to seal all
locations required to create and secure a continuous enclosure.
3.2
3.2.1
Caulking
Apply sealant in accordance with Section 07900, Sealants. Conceal sealant within units except where exposed use is
permitted by Consultant.
3.3
3.3.1
Closures, Trim and Flashings
Install closures, trim and flashings. Provide closures at bottom of extrusion cavities and where required to provide
backup support for air/vapour barrier.
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
Cleaning and Repairing
Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively- finished or tool-marked components and replace with new.
Clean off dirt resulting from erection on surfaces exposed to view.
surfaces of all work of this Section. Use proper cleaning materials and methods to prevent damage to surfaces,
finishes, sealer or work of other trades. Make good such damage to Consultant's satisfaction.
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
Page 08710-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
Throughout the specification, type of materials are specified by manufacturer's name and catalogue number in order to
establish standards of quality and performance and not for the purpose of limiting competition. Unless specifically stated
otherwise such as locks/locksets, the bidder may use the alternate products specified, except that the burden is upon
the bidder to prove such quality. Supply samples if required, to permit a fair evaluation of the proposed substitute with
respect to quality, serviceability, warranty and cost.
1.2
1.2.1
Work Included in This Section
Prepare a hardware schedule based on the drawings and specifications. Review schedule with Owner / Construction
Manager and Architect. Coordinate Owners and project requirements as required prior to finalizing schedule and
ordering hardware.
Supply to the site, all finish hardware specified complete with templates and installation instructions, together with all
required screws, expansion shields, anchors and other related accessories for satisfactorily attaching or installing all
finish hardware.
Package hardware separately for each opening and state clearly on each package the number and description of the
opening for which the hardware is intended.
1.2.2
1.2.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
Hardware Consultant
Provide the services of a fully experienced Architectural Hardware Consultant (A.H.C.) to prepare the hardware
schedule and to field review as required during installation at normal working hours to co-ordinate and check shop
drawings and provide consultation services when required and on-site inspections.
All hardware shall be inspected after installation by the Manufacturer's and/or Owner's representative who shall certify in
writing to the Owner, that all hardware has been supplied and installed in accordance with the specifications and
Hardware List, and are functioning properly.
At project completion instruct the Owner's Representative on all aspects of maintenance and adjustments of all Finish
Hardware.
Following award of contract, arrange to meet with Owner and Consultant to finalize the keying schedule.
Co-ordination of Related Work
Co-ordinate the hardware with other allied trades such as carpentry, millwork, aluminum door and screens, wood doors,
hollow metal doors and frames, electrical and others.
Power for door hardware including all raceways and boxes to wall switches and wiring to alarm system is to be supplied
by Electrical Division 16. The automatic door operator supplier to co-ordinate and supply installation of electrical devices
only in conjunction with the electric strike if required.
All other electrical work shall be provided at each opening by the electrical contractor as required.
The work of other trades to required to be performed to ensure proper installation and function of the automatic door
operators shall be as follows:
.1
.2
.3
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
Wiring and conduit between control devices and operator. Wiring, conduit and electrical equipment required
to interface with door operators/controls and any other electrical control/monitoring systems supplied and
installed by others.
Preparation of wall and frame to provide adequate support for operator header.
120 Volt electrical service.
Handling and Storage
Handle and store materials on job site in such a manner that no damage will be done to the materials.
Deliver and store materials undamaged in a dry area.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
Page 08710-2
1.5.3
Wrap all hardware in separate packages complete with all trimming and screws required for each item, distinctly labelled
and numbered for each opening to correspond with the final reviewed Finish Hardware Schedule.
1.6
1.6.1
Hardware Reinforcement
Provide all necessary hardware reinforcing required to provide a firm support for hardware described in these
specifications; and, it shall be the responsibility of this section to check that all doors, frames and panels are reinforced in
a satisfactory manner to provide a firm support. Coordinate any such requirements for doors, frames or panels with
other trades.
1.7
1.7.1
Fire and Building Codes
All hardware shall comply with applicable fire and building codes and requirements of local authority having jurisdiction
over hardware. All electrical items must have CSA approval.
For all doors indicated on Door Schedule as requiring a fire-resistance rating, hardware shall have been tested and
listed by ULC as meeting requirements for use on labelled fire doors, and shall bear labels or markings attesting to such
listing.
1.7.2
1.8
1.8.1
Barrier Free Requirements
The building is designed to meet the needs of barrier free access. All hardware shall be supplied and installed in
accordance with the Ontario Building Code and CAN/CSA-B61-M90.
1.9
1.9.1
Submittals
Shop Drawings
.1
It shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier to examine the plans and schedules to satisfy itself that
all hardware listed can be used as specified.
.2
Prepare and submit to the Consultant for review a copy of hardware schedule showing all hardware required
for each opening.
.3
Fully detail schedule as to actual factory catalogue numbers, quantities, hardware locations, etc. Include
catalogue cut sheets of each item of hardware.
.4
Arrange schedule in the same format and numerical sequence as that in the accompanying schedule.
.5
All pages of the schedule shall be printed on 8-1/2" x 11" sized paper.
1.9.2
Samples
.1
Submit samples of the complete line of hardware and finishes to the Consultant in accordance with Section
01300, if and when requested, to accompany any proposal for substitution. Fully label each sample as to
manufacturer, type, size, and location for which its use is proposed.
.2
Remove samples from the Consultant's office promptly upon request of Consultant.
.3
Substitute new samples for any samples that are not considered by the Consultant to be equal to the
hardware scheduled. Final approved samples will be retained by the Consultant until the project is
completed.
.4
Do not order hardware from the manufacturers until the samples have been approved by the Consultant, and
the hardware and finishes supplied are identical with the approved samples.
1.9.3
For Maintenance Use
1.9.4
Submit the following to the Consultant:
.1
One (1) set wrenches for locksets, exit devices and door closers.
.2
Three (3) sets of manufacturer's installation instructions for locksets.
.3
Three (3) sets of manufacturer's instructions in regard to proper care of hardware including lubrication of
locksets, exit devices and door closers.
.4
One (1) complete set of template schedules.
Living
project no 1504
.5
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
Page 08710-3
Catalogue cuts of all hardware installed.
1.10
1.10.1
Changes
Check all changes to the work of this section, that may be issued and revise the reviewed hardware schedule
accordingly. Submit all revisions to the hardware schedule to the Consultant for review.
1.11
1.11.1
Warranty
Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals, covering the repair or replacement of defective work
within specified periods.
Provide total warranty of five (5) years for door closers and two (2) years for all other hardware.
State in the warranty that any defective (material and operation) item of hardware shall be replaced immediately upon
notification that item is defective at no expense to Owner.
1.11.2
1.11.3
1.12
1.12.1
Hardware Location of Doors
Standard hardware location dimensions shall be in accordance with Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames
(Modular Construction) prepared by Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturer’s Association unless indicated or
scheduled otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1.1
All hardware shall be supplied by manufacturers approved within the hardware heading specifications to be provided at a
later date.
2.1.2
Supply hardware as per attached hardware schedule.
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
2.3
2.3.1
Keying System and Interchangeable Core Type Cylinder
Develop new keying system for the building in consultation with Owner and Consultant. Keying system shall include
keying alike, keying differently, keying in groups, sub-master keying and grand-master keying locks as required. Factory
register all locks to a new system.
Provide all locksets, dead bolts and exit devices with cylinders to be keyed alike and used as construction cylinders
during construction.
Prepare and submit keying chart and related explanatory data to Consultant for approval. Do not commence lock work
until written confirmation of keying arrangements is received from Consultant.
Supply three (3) keys per lockset. Stamp each key DO NOT DUPLICATE on one side and on the other with a key
symbol consisting of not more than four letters or numbers.
Supply for temporary construction use, Construction Master Keyed (CMK) cylinders, keyed alike as required. When no
longer required, replace CMK's with permanent cylinder(s). Check operation of lock and keys.
Supply keys, including a grand master and master keys, packed in separate envelopes for each group (key symbol)
marked with the architectural door number(s) operated by the keys.
Deliver all permanent keys to the Consultant and obtain a signature for same.
Mortise and rim cylinders shall be interchangeable core type; all locks.
All Cabinet locks shall be Master Keyed under one or more Master Key Systems.
All keys STD Bow wherever possible shall be Large Bow GM-Large Bow.
Supply following keys:
.1
3 - grand-master keys, large bow - DO NOT DUPLICATE
.2
3 - master keys (to later detail), large bow - DO NOT DUPLICATE
.3
4 - change keys for each lock
.4
10 - construction master keys
Supplementary Material Requirements:
The following supplements the Finish Hardware Schedule. Where conflict occurs, the Finish Hardware Schedule shall
govern:
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
Page 08710-4
.1
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
Locks and Latches
.1
Supply strikes in stainless steel C32D.
.2
Where lever handles are specified, locks and latches shall be specially designed for lever
handles. Lever trim shall be through-bolted.
.3
Latch bolts to be anti-friction three piece bolts.
.2
Exit Devices: Exit devices shall be approved labelled device for fire rated and exit doors.
.3
Closers
.1
All door closers shall be hydraulically controlled and full rack and pinion in operation.
.2
Each closer shall have adjustable general speed, latch speed and back check control.
.3
Supply special closer keys and wrenches as usually packed with closers.
.4
Supply all necessary attaching brackets, mounting channels, cover plates, etc. where necessary
for correct application of door closers.
.4
Thresholds
.1
Supply thresholds in required widths and lengths to suit door openings.
.2
Cut ends of thresholds to follow exactly the door frame profile.
.5
Pulls, Pushplates, Kickplates
.1
Door pulls shall have concealed mounting.
.2
Length of kickplates shall be 1-1/2” (38 mm) less than door width for single door and 1” (25 mm)
less than door width for door in pairs.
.3
All stainless steel plates are to be 1/16” (1.6 mm) thick and of one manufacturer's product, free
from burrs and sharp edges. Use Type 304 stainless steel only.
.4
Provide pushplates and kickplates with temporary strippable plastic coating.
.6
Seals, Thresholds
.1
All seals (sound, light, weather) to be black sponge neoprene with aluminum extrusions of the
same gauge, dimensions, quality and finish of those specified. Hollow metal exterior doors where
parallel arm closers are used to have seal / stop type where brackets can be mounted on
extrusions.
.2
Supply thresholds complete with countersunk holes, and with screws and anchors as required for
proper anchorage.
.3
Modify sills to receive flush finish of adjacent floor finish.
Templates
All hardware applied to metal doors and frames shall be made to template.
Check Hardware Schedule, Drawings and Specifications, and furnish promptly to applicable trades any templates,
template information and manufacturer's literature, required for proper preparation for and application of hardware, in
ample time to facilitate progress of work.
Fasteners
Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, and other fastening devices as required for the satisfactory installation and
operation of the hardware. Provide Robertson or Phillips heads.
Fastening devices shall be of the same finish as the hardware which is to be fastened.
Where a pull is scheduled on one side of the door and a pushplate on the other side, issue installation directions to the
trade responsible for fixing, so that the pull is secured through the door from the reverse side, and the pushplate installed
to cover the screws. Supply flush pulls with machine screws for attaching as specified above.
For fastenings in concrete for floor stops and thresholds, use machine screws in expansion shields.
For door closers for doors in wet areas, mount on non wet side with stainless steel or brass screws (nickel plated) to
prevent corrosion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Living
project no 1504
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
3.2.1
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
Page 08710-5
Examination
Before furnishing any hardware, carefully check all Architectural Drawings of work requiring hardware, verify door
swings, door and frame material and operating conditions, and assure that hardware will fit work to which it is to be
attached.
Check shop drawings and frame and door lists affecting hardware type and installation, and certify to correctness
thereof, or advise Consultant in writing of required revisions.
Installation
In accordance with the requirements of Section 06210.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
Page 08800-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90
CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91
CAN/CGSB-12.6-M91
CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90
CAN/CGSB-12.5-M86
CAN/CGSB-12.8-97
NFPA 80
Glass, Polished Plate or Float, Flat, Clear
Wired Safety Glazing
Transparent (One Way) Mirrors
Mirrors, Silvered.
Insulating Glass Units
National Fire Protection Association, Fire Doors and Windows.
General: Design to requirements of Ontario Building Code and recognized standards of this trade.
1.3
1.3.1
Submittals
Samples: On request, submit samples of glass in accordance with Section 01300 for Consultant's approval.
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.3
Extended Warranty
Submit a warranty for mirrors in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals, covering the repair or replacement of
defective work within one (1) year warranty stated in the General Conditions.
Warranty shall apply against defects in workmanship and materials and, against silver deterioration and loosening of
fastenings, broken seals of the insulated units, condensation within the insulated unit or other indication that the
insulated unit is not sealed and is permitting air / vapour to move in and out of the insulating unit.
Submit ten (10) year manufacturer’s warranty covering the repair or replacement of any portion of the insulating unit
resulting from defects in the manufacture of the insulating unit. Manufacturer’s Warranty to start at the date of substantial
completion of the project. Manufacturer’s warranty shall cover labour and materials and include repair and replacement,
to extent required, of all work of this Section in event of failure of the insulated units.
Total warranty period shall be eleven (11) years.
1.5
1.5.1
Samples
On request, submit samples of glass and mirror in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals for Consultant's approval.
1.4.2
1.4.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
Materials - General
General: Factory label every sheet of glass and keep in place until final cleaning.
Wired Plate Glass (GWG): 1/4” (6 mm) thick "Georgian" polished wire plate, conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.11 and
CAN/CGSB-12.20.
Shims, Spacers and Setting Blocks: Neoprene with Durometer hardness of 70-90, Shore ‘A’ for setting blocks;
Durometer 40-60, Shore ‘A’ for shims and spacers. Use ULC approved materials for fire rated assemblies. Note:
Spacers shall be as required to provide intended thermal design properties of low conductance black] stainless steel
warm edge spacer to reduce heat/cold transfer.
Glazing Channels: Extruded neoprene, EPDM or PVC channel gaskets.
Tempered Glass (TGL): 6mm thick minimum, conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1 and CAN/CGSB-12.20.
Float Glass (FGL): 6mm thick minimum, conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.3 and CAN/CGSB-12.20.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl with continuous spacer, Shore "A" 10-15 durometer hardness paper release, black
colour, 1/8” (3 mm) x 3/8” (10 mm).
Acid Etched Glass: Acid etched glass shall be ‘opaque clear’ texture manufactured by Walker Glass Co. Ltd.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
Page 08800-2
(www.walkerglass.com)
2.2
Glass Insulating Units
.1
Provide glass insulating units of the following types and configurations;
.1
Configuration for insulating glazing type GL-1
Outboard Lite: 6 mm clear glass with Solarban 70XL reflective coating on surface 2 by PPG
Industries Inc.
Type: tempered
Inboard Lite: 6 mm clear glass by PPG Industries Inc.
Type: tempered
Space to be filled with: Argon – minimum Argon Concentration = 90%
Overall unit thickness: 25.4mm
.2
Outboard Lite: 5 mm clear glass with lowE³ 366 coating on surface 2 by Cardinal Glass Industries
Inc.
Type: tempered
Inboard Lite: 5 mm clear glass by Cardinal Glass Industries Inc.
Type: tempered
Overall unit thickness: 22mm
.3
Outboard Lite: 6 mm clear glass with Solarban 70XL reflective coating on surface 2 by PPG
Industries Inc.
Type: tempered
Inboard Lite: 6 mm clear glass by PPG Industries Inc. with acid etching on surface 3.
Type: tempered
Overall unit thickness: 25.4mm
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
3.1.1
Take critical site dimensions to ensure that adjustments in fabrication or installation are provided for, and that clearances
to other constructions have been maintained.
3.1.2
Ensure that anchors and inserts installed by others are adequate to meet specified requirements, and make adaptations
before installation.
3.1.3
Accurately measure openings and calculate light size based on manufacturer's installation tables, allowing for proper
minimum edge engagement, rabbet width, rabbet depth, and expansion.
3.1.4
Free rabbets, stops and glass edges of dust, dirt, moisture, oil and other foreign matter detrimental to or obstructing the
glazing material.
3.1.5
Follow manufacturer's recommendations for preparation.
3.2
Installation - General
3.2.1
Unless otherwise specified, dry glaze all interior glass.
3.2.2
Remove and replace glazing stops in original locations using original fasteners, securely set and undamaged.
3.2.3
Use setting blocks and spacers as required to properly support the glass, centred in place in glazing space independent
of the materials and to uniformly distribute its load.
3.2.4
Use a minimum of 2 setting blocks, locate at 1/8 points. Locate spacers at jamb edges of glass, uniformly spaced at 24”
(600 mm) o.c. maximum, and 12” (300 mm) maximum from top and bottom.
Living
project no 1504
3.2.5
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
Page 08800-3
Ensure rattle-free cushioning.
Glass Insulating Units
Surface Conditions
.1 Prior to installation carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify work is completed to the point where work
of this section may proceed.
.2 Verify that the glass is installed in accordance with original design and in accordance with all pertinent codes and
regulations.
Installation
.1 Comply with window, storefront or curtain wall manufacturer guidelines for glazing Heat Mirror in their framing
systems.
.2 Setting blocks should be 85 Shore A durometer neoprene, 4” length, width equal to glass thickness and placed at the
1/8 points of the glazing unit base. Anti-walk (edge) blocks should be 55-65 Shore A.
.3 Be sure exterior of the unit is set toward the building exterior.
.4 Proceed with glazing only when glazing surfaces are accumulating no moisture from rain, mist or condensation.
.5 When temperature of glazing surface is below 4 degrees Celsius, obtain approval of glazing methods and protective
measures which will be used during glazing operations.
Cleaning
Remove deposits which affect appearance of units on completion of installation.
Clean surfaces by washing with clear water, or with water and soap or detergent, followed by a clear water rinse.
Clean and restore stained metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace if cleaning is
impossible.
Clean glazing with methods and materials recommended by glazing material manufacturer.
* * *
END OF SECTION
project no 1504
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 09250-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
CAN/CSA-A82.27-M91
CSA-A82.31-M1991
GA-214-90
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
Package finish materials.
Store materials in a protected dry area. Store gypsum board flat in piles with edges protected.
Ensure that finish metal members are not bent, dented, or otherwise deformed.
Deliver products only supplied under the work of this Section to those who are responsible for installation, to the place
they direct, and to meet installation schedules.
Package fire-rated materials with Underwriters Laboratories of Canada labels attached.
1.3.5
Gypsum Board Products
Gypsum Board Application
Gypsum Association.
1.4
1.4.1
Job Conditions
.1
Install work only in areas closed and protected against weather, and maintained between 10C and 21C.
In cold weather, ensure that heat is introduced in sufficient time, before work commences to bring
surrounding materials up to these temperatures, and maintained until materials installed by this Section have
cured.
.2
Do not install work in any area unless satisfied that work in place has dried out, and that no further
installation of damp materials is contemplated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
Materials
Gypsum Board: Conforming to CAN/CSA-A82.27, as manufactured by Canadian Gypsum Company, Domtar
Construction Materials or Certain Teed Canada Inc as follows:
.1
Plain Gypsum Board: In thicknesses indicated, with tapered edges.
.2
Fire-Rated Gypsum Board: Firecode C Core (qualifies as Type "X"), in thicknesses indicated, with tapered
edges, classified for fire hazard by Underwriters Laboratories of Canada, and labelled in conformance with
the ULC Label Service for the application specified.
Joint Materials
.1
Joint Reinforcing Tape: 2” (50 mm) wide x 0.3 mm thick perforated paper with chamfered edges.
.2
Joint and Skim Compounds: gypsum with latex resin, possessing good adhesion, mixed with fresh,
unadulterated water, having no detrimental effect on compounds.
Accessories: As manufactured by Canadian Gypsum Company, Domtar Construction Materials, Westroc Industries
Limited or Bailey Metal Products Limited as follows:
.1
Corner Beads: #25 steel, zinc-coated with flanges suitable for thickness of wallboards on which applied, and
suitable for taping and plastering over.
.2
Casing Beads: #25 steel, zinc-coated, channel-shaped, suitable for taping and plastering over.
.3
Ceiling and Wall Reveals / Edge Trims: purposed made, extruded aluminum, edge trims / reveal mouldings
as manufactured by Pittcon Industries or Fry Reglet Corporation or alternate approved by Architect. The
use of "J" moulding or roll formed steel is not permitted.
.4
Control Joints: Crimped, roll-formed zinc, as CGC #093, with flanges for tape reinforcement or two casing
beads set with gap for movement, and backed with flexible air seal membrane.
.5
Thermal Break Tape: No.220D pvc tape manufactured by Sellotape Canada Ltd. or other reputable
manufacturer.
Fastenings and Ties
.1
Screws: Self-drilling, self-tapping, case-hardened, Phillips head, gypsum board screws with corrosion-
project no 1504
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.1.9
2.1.10
2.1.11
2.1.12
2.1.13
2.1.14
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 09250-2
resistant finish. #6 x 1” (25 mm) for single thickness panel fastening, and #7 x 1-5/8” (40 mm) for double
thickness panel fastening.
.2
Tie Wire: 1/16” (1.6 mm) diameter galvanized soft annealed steel wire.
.3
Twist Clips: Caddy acoustical tee combination washer - wing nut, as manufactured by Erico Products Ltd.
.4
Concrete Anchors: Phillips Red Head TW-614 or other make of tie wire sleeve anchors conforming to US
Federal Specs. FF-S-325, Group II Type 3, Class 3, and QQ-2-235, Type II, Class 3. Do not use powder
activated fasteners for ceiling support.
Steel Studs: Depth and gauge to suit span. Minimum load is 5 psf. Max deflection is L/240. Provide studs with
increased depth where indicated on the drawings. Minimum requirements include; knurled flanges 1-1/4” (32
mm) wide with edges doubled back at least 3/16” (4.8 mm); #20 gauge steel galvanized, typical, with girts as
required and with service access holes.
Retainer Studs: As manufactured by Bailey Metal Products, or Insulock Systems.
Partition Runners: As specified for studs with flanges a minimum 5” (125 mm) high, and to suit depth of studs as
required to serve as backing for carpet base or terrazzo where carpet or terrazzo occurs.
Bracing Channels: For partitions, 3/4” wide x 1-1/2” high x 16 gauge thick (19 mm x 38.1 mm x 1.6 mm) cold-rolled,
galvanized steel.
Furring Channels: #25 gauge galvanized, nominal size of 7/8” (22 mm) deep by 1-1/4” (32 mm) face, hat type with
knurled face.
Resilient Channels: CGC RC-1 or equivalent by other reputable manufacturers.
Ceiling Hanger System
.1
Hangers: Galvanized annealed steel wire, #12 gauge to support a maximum weight of 68 kg. per hanger. #9
gauge to support a maximum weight of 140 kg. per hanger, and galvanized annealed steel rod 3/16” (4.8
mm) diameter to support a maximum weight of 250 kg. per hanger.
.2
Inserts and Hanger Connection: Steel, galvanized after forming, suitable for structure and ceiling conditions
and loading.
.3
Runner Channels: Galvanized steel channels, #16 gauge (1.6 mm) overall thickness, 1-1/2” high (38.1 mm)
with 3/4” (19 mm) wide flanges, for primary furring member in suspended gypsum board ceilings.
Acoustical Caulking: "Acoustical Sealant" by Tremco (Canada) Limited.
Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation: “AFB” – acoustical fire batts by the Roxul Company
Control Joint Strip: Roll formed zinc coated metal with a tape protected void, 1/4” (6 mm) wide throat size x 1/2” (12.7
mm) deep with flanges for embedding in joint compound.
Skim Coating: "Durabond 90" compound or equivalent manufactured by Domtar Gypsum.
Exterior Grade Sheathing: Den Glass Gold, 16mm thick exterior grade sheathing as manufactured by GP Gypsum
Corporation.
Cement Board: Cementitious Fiber-Mat Reinforced Sheathing: ASTM C 1325, ANSI A118.9, cementitious backer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
Examination
Before application of gypsum board commences, ensure that services have been installed, tested and approved by
relevant Jurisdictional Authorities and Consultant; that conduits, pipes, cables and outlets are plugged, capped or
covered; and that fastenings and supports installed by others are in place.
Ensure that environmental conditions and work preceding that of this Section are satisfactory.
Verify that work performed under other Sections as a part of a ULC specification for a fire-rated assembly has been
done in accordance with that specification.
Installation in General
Install furring, studs, gypsum board, accessories, and all other related products in strict accordance with CSA Standard
A82.31, including Appendix B "Control Joints". Where the standard does not incorporate specific products and
methods, follow the manufacturer's directions. Use 5/8” (16 mm) thick gypsum board for interior work unless detailed
otherwise.
Install work within 1/8” (3 mm) of dimensioned location unless approved otherwise by Consultant, and flat to tolerance
of 1/8” (3 mm) maximum in 10’-0” (3 m) and 1/16” (1.6 mm) maximum in any running 12’ (300 mm).
Co-ordinate the work of this Section with that of other Sections. Ensure that adequate preparation is made for the
project no 1504
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.12
3.2.13
3.2.14
3.2.15
3.2.16
3.2.17
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 09250-3
attachment of hangers, fasteners, stiffeners, and reinforcing. Provide for carrying and integration of flush-mounted and
recessed components only after consultation and verification of methods with those performing the work of Divisions 15
and 16. Do not use through-the-roof hangers.
Do not install metal framing, trim, casings, or accessories which have been bent, dented, or otherwise deformed.
Securely attach trim, casings, framing and accessories. Attachment by means of tape is unacceptable.
Framing and furring shown on Drawings is indicative, but do not regard it as exact or complete. Construct work to
provide adequate strength to withstand stresses imposed by use without distortion and to maintain dimensions
indicated on drawings.
Erect supporting and finish materials to dimensions indicated on drawings, plumb, level, straight, and square to
adjoining elements.
Provide for movement at intersections with structural members to avoid transference of loads to this work. Construct
vertically sliding deflection space at top of partitions by means of double channels. Secure top channel to structure and
bottom channel to stud work. Secure board only to bottom track making allowance for up to 3/4” (19 mm) deflection of
structure. Cut board short at top and caulk this joint.
Make allowance for thermal movements in gypsum board systems.
Provide control joints in gypsum board work in locations as indicated on Drawings and at no greater spacing than 20’-0”
(6000 mm) in each direction, at perimeters of ceilings where they abut walls and other vertical surfaces, at abutting
structural elements, at dissimilar walls and ceilings, at structural expansion and control joints, and at other locations
where stresses are likely to develop as recommended by board manufacturer. Line up control joints with joints in other
construction or with centrelines of mullions, columns, piers, or similar building elements.
Form control joints using continuous furring channels along each side of joint locations, and filling control joint space
with specified joint strip, secured in place, making straight joints.
Install casings and thermal breaks at junctions of gypsum board with exterior door, window, or screen joints.
Do not support the work of this Section from, nor make attachment to ducts, pipes, conduit or the support framing of the
work of other Sections. Place supplementary steel supports as required to maintain hanger spacing and to keep
mechanical ducts free from hangers being secured to.
Do not apply gypsum board in close proximity to hot pipes or heating ducts.
Install materials with the minimum of joints. Tightly butt joints without force and neatly align them.
Frame openings on each side with suitable sections. Provide clearances required at mechanical and electrical services
such as grilles, diffusers, access panels and lighting fixtures only after verification of requirements in each case.
Co-operate with those installing the work of other Sections. Where the work of others penetrates gypsum board
construction, fit openings snugly, and to ensure cover by escutcheons or plates utilized.
3.3
3.3.1
Fixture, Cabinet, Toilet Partition and Urinal Screen Supports
Verify location of supports within gypsum board assemblies to support wall mounted lights, fitments, cabinets, plumbing
fixtures, wall plates required for grab bars and any other item attached to drywall. Co-operate and co-ordinate with all
trades and provide information in ample time to ensure supports are provided in the correct locations, and are adequate
to support the loads.
3.4
3.4.1
Partition Stability
Where partitions do not extend to structure, provide suitable internal reinforcement to prevent lateral movement of the
partitions. Secure head runners to acoustic tees by means of "twist clips".
3.5
3.5.1
Concrete Anchors
Locate anchorage points in reinforced concrete floor slab underside in accordance with gypsum board manufacturers
suspension requirements. Drill holes with carbide-tipped drill bits conforming to ANSI B94.12. Install anchors;
minimum installation depth and method of expansion shall be as recommended by the anchor manufacturer.
3.6
3.6.1
Installation of Suspended Ceiling Framing and Furring
Include in the work of this Section the supply of hangers and supervision of their proper location, or inserts for hanger
attachment, when either or both are embedded in concrete.
Space hangers for runner channels to suit structure, to support ceiling load, at a maximum distance of 4’-0” (1220 mm)
o.c. and at no greater distance than 6” (150 mm) from ends of runner channels.
Install runner channels at 3’-0” (915 mm) o.c. generally, and at no greater distance than 6” (150 mm) from terminations
3.6.2
3.6.3
project no 1504
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.6.7
3.6.8
3.6.9
3.6.10
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.7.6
3.7.7
3.7.8
3.7.9
3.7.10
3.7.11
3.7.12
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 09250-4
of supported cross-furring members. Bend rod hangers sharply under bottom flange of runners, and wire securely in
place with saddle ties.
Splice runner channels by lapping at least 12” (300 mm), with interlocking flanges and wires at each end with two loops.
Splice only where unavoidable. Do not bunch or line up splices.
Install cross-furring at 24” (600 mm) generally, and at no greater distance than 6” (150 mm) from walls, openings,
breaks in continuity of ceilings, and changes of direction. Space furring in all cases to suit incorporated services, and
so as to avoid contact with perimeter walls. Span hat-type furring no greater than 4’-0” (1220 mm). Use metal studs for
greater spans: 1-5/8” (40 mm) deep spanning to 5’-0” (1525 mm), 2-1/2” (65 mm) deep to 6’-0” (1830 mm) and 3-5/8:
(92 mm) deep to 8’-0” (2440 mm).
Secure cross-furring to supports with double wire ties or approved equivalent attachment. Splice by nesting and tying
together with8” (200 mm) overlap.
Erect entire hanger and suspension system to adequately support the ceiling assembly, including services incorporated
with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of span of each component member, and free from horizontal movement.
Enclose ducts, pipes or beams that occur below the general finished ceiling level with metal furring and gypsum board,
in rooms where gypsum board is specified.
Enclose ducts, pipes, or beams that occur below the general finished ceiling level with metal furring and gypsum board,
in rooms where acoustic treatment for ceilings is specified.
Form recesses for light coves where indicated on drawings. Enclose all light coves with gypsum board.
Metal Stud Partition Framing
Secure runner channels at floor and tops of partitions for their full lengths, at 24” (610 mm) o.c. with concrete fasteners
or as suitable for the substrate material. Install runner channels also at heads and sills of openings. Secure runners at
openings by cutting flanges, turning up webs, and screwing to studs.
Butt, not mitre, runners at wall intersections and corners. At ceilings, lap and screw channels together.
Space studs at 16” (400 mm) o.c. generally, and at no greater distance than 2” (50 mm) from abutting walls, partitions
and corners.
Secure studs to runners by screws, crimping, or welding as required by stud type to conform with manufacturer's design
specification.
Utilize only proper stud sizes to meet all the requirements of this specification. Span studs of 1-5/8” (40 mm) depth no
greater than 8’-10” (2700 mm) between supports, 2-1/2” (65 mm) depth, 11’-9” (3600 mm) and 3-5/8” (92 mm) depth,
15’-9” (4800 mm).
Double studs at all door jambs. At each jamb of doors exceeding either 36” (915 mm) width or 2-1/2” (63 mm) in
thickness or both, install a structural channel reinforcing extending from floor structure to structure above, and
adequately anchored at each end.
Brace studs with stiffeners over doors in partitions of greater height than 10’-0” (3000 mm) spaced as preceding, and
above and below window type openings spaced not more than 6” (150 mm) from the top and bottom of openings.
Stiffeners shall be 3/4” (19 mm) bracing channels, wire tied or welded to each stud, and extending horizontally across
entire length of each braced partition and across two full stud spaces at each side of door and window openings.
Splice studs only when unavoidable by nesting with 8” (200 mm) minimum lap, and fastened with one screw in each
flange.
Co-ordinate work with others installing horizontal runs of service lines so that work of all is done simultaneously. Where
standard holes are too small for installed services, notch studs and splice notched flange with a splice piece 12” (300
mm) longer than notch, fastened with two screws.
Unless shown otherwise on drawings, all partitions, together with wallboard facing, shall extend above ceilings to
underside of structure above.
Ensure that electrical and telephone boxes are not installed back to back.
Screw frame anchor clips of frames supplied and installed under the work of another Section, to jamb studs and head
and sill runners. Provide adequate fastening to prevent movement of frames within partitions.
Furring at Masonry and Concrete Walls
Install furring horizontally at 24” ( 600 mm) o.c. Space furring no greater than 2” (50 mm) from abutting walls, floors,
ceilings, and openings.
Secure furring to walls with fasteners, spaced at 24” (600 mm) o.c. on alternating or opposite channel flanges. Shim as
required with metal spacers or use adjustable wall furring brackets.
project no 1504
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 09250-5
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
Return furring into reveals.
Close all exposed open ends of furred space with suitable metal closure.
Where wall furring is indicated clear of wall on drawings, construct framing as for metal stud partitions.
3.9
3.9.1
Acoustically Treated Walls and Bulkheads
Install board 1/2” (12.7 mm) short at top, bottom and edges and fill with caulking. Caulk on both sides of wall. Caulk
after gypsum board is in place, not before.
Stagger all joints in double layer gypsum board construction.
Pack partition cavities with acoustical insulation. Friction fit insulation securely between studs.
Fill all butt joints of gypsum board with joint filler prior to taping or finishing.
Caulk or plaster fill all penetrations through gypsum board for electrical boxes, wiring, pipes, ducts and all similar items.
Caulk airtight around electrical and communication boxes before plate is installed.
Do not let fastening screws extend through to opposite set of studs.
Build bulkheads above acoustically rated doors and partitions and folding partitions as detailed.
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.9.4
3.9.5
3.9.6
3.9.7
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
3.10.5
3.10.6
3.11
3.11.1
3.11.2
3.11.3
3.11.4
3.11.5
3.12
3.12.1
3.12.2
3.13
3.13.1
3.13.2
Installation of Gypsum Board
Extend boards into door, window, and other opening reveals.
Back all joints with a framing member.
Install boards in maximum lengths and widths to minimize joints, and never in lengths of under 6’-0” (1800 mm).
Stagger end joints where they are unavoidable. Locate joints in ceilings and soffits where least prominently discernible.
Form neat joints at mill ends and at field-cut edges of wallboard panels. Cut paper on face with a knife. Smooth by
sanding and rubbing edges together.
Fasten boards to metal support members by sheet metal gypsum board screws at 12” (300 mm) o.c. no closer than
3/8” (10 mm) to and no farther than 1/2” (12.7 mm) from centre of joints. Do not force adjacent boards into place. Allow
moderate contact. Provide extension slips where required. Drive screws to form a slight depression, but no so paper
cover is broken.
Where curved gypsum board is indicated, wet boards and bend to required radius, and block in position until dry.
Finished curved surface shall be smooth and even.
Treatment of Gypsum Board Joints
Fill joints, screwholes, and depressions on board surfaces exposed to view to provide smooth, seamless surfaces, and
square, neat corners. Use jointing compounds and reinforcing tapes in conformance with manufacturer's specifications.
Ensure that board is tight against framing members, fasteners are properly depressed, and adhesives have sufficiently
cured.
Fill joints, edges and corners by Gypsum Association Level 5 three coat tape and joint filler method.
At external corners, install corner beads secured to framing at 6” (150 mm) o.c. on alternate flanges. Fill to nose of
corner bead with joint filler and topping cement, as specified for bevelled joints.
At casing beads installed at all edges of board exposed to view, where board butts against other materials, with no trim
to conceal junction at control joints, at perimeter of ceiling surfaces, at top of partitions where they stop against
continuous ceiling surfaces, and where otherwise shown on drawings, secure casing beads to framing at12” (300 mm)
o.c.
At screwheads, fill holes and depressions with a two-coat application of joint filler.
Joint and Surface Treatment of Cement Board - Typical
Apply 2” (50 mm) glass fibre tape over joints and corners. Press firmly and uniformly in place to avoid bumps. Apply in
accordance with manufacturer's directions.
Where board is to serve as substrate for paint or coating, apply 1/8” (3 mm) thick uniform water resistant skim coat,
ready to receive paint or coating.
Installation of Accessories
Install accessories such as access panels, and grilles when supplied by other sections. Obtain prior Consultant's
approval of locations of accessories prior to installation.
Gypsum board infill at access panels shall have taped edges. Apply gypsum board with adhesive. Fill and sand
smooth perimeter edges as specified for joint finishing.
project no 1504
3.14
3.14.1
3.14.2
3.14.3
3.14.4
3.14.5
3.15
3.15.1
3.15.2
3.15.3
3.15.4
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
Page 09250-6
Fire Separations
Construct gypsum board assemblies where located at fire separations of metal framing covered on both sides by firerated gypsum wallboard.
Fit assemblies tightly to all enclosing constructions to maintain integrity of the separations. Install casing beads at all
perimeter edges. Ensure that caulking work under Section 07900 relative to non-sound rated assemblies, i.e. perimeter
joints in concealed locations is done, before continuing with the work of this Section.
For two layers of gypsum board, attach one layer of gypsum board to each side of studs with long edges on studs by
screws at 16” (400 mm) o.c. as well as at intermediate studs and runners. Attach second layer of gypsum wallboard by
screws at 16” (400 mm) o.c. at studs and 12” (300 mm) o.c. at runners. Stagger joints at first and second layers 12”
(300 mm) tape joints only where exposed to view. Fill screw holes. For tested assemblies secure in accordance with
test data.
Assemblies constructed other than those indicated may be approved by the Consultant on presentation of affidavits
which validate fire resistance ratings by acceptance of the Jurisdictional Authorities.
For walls containing fire dampers provide gypsum board end covers over studs between duct and stud.
Cleaning and Patching
Remove droppings and excess joint compound from work of others and from work of this Section, before it sets.
Make good to cut-outs for services and other work, fill in defective joints, holes, and other depressions with joint
compounds.
Make good defective work, and ensure that surfaces are smooth, evenly textured, and within specified tolerances to
receive finish treatments.
Clean off beads, casings, and other metal trim, and leave all surfaces ready for specified finishes.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 09300
CERAMIC TILE
Page 09300-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
Do tile work in accordance with 1998 Specification Guide 09300 Tile Installation Manual, produced by Terrazzo Tile and
Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC), except where specified otherwise.
ANSI A108.1-1992
Installation of Ceramic Tile
ASTM C206-84 (1992)
Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime
ASTM C207-79 (1992)
Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime For Masonry Purposes
CAN/CSA-A5-93
Portland Cement
CAN3-A23.1M77
Dry Washed Concrete Sand
CAN/CGSB-75.1-M88
Tile, Ceramic
CSA A82.56-M1976
Aggregate For Masonry Mortar.
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.6
1.6.1
Quality Assurance
Work of this Section shall be executed by company that is a member in good standing of Terrazzo, Tile and Marble
Guild of Canada, as applicable, except where specified otherwise.
Submit evidence of such qualifications to Consultant upon request.
Submittals
Samples
.1
Submit two (2) samples of each type and colour of tile an all accessories in accordance with Section 01300.
Validation of Standards: Submit a letter of validation from the supplier that materials supplied under these requirements
meet CGSB Standards.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions issued by TTMAC to Consultant in accordance with Section
01300, for incorporation in Manufacturer's Data Book.
Maintenance Material: Provide minimum 3% of each type and colour of tile and trim required for the project for Owner's
future maintenance use. Deliver where directed by Consultant. Tile and trim shall be from the same production run as
those installed.
Extended Warranty
.1
Submit a warranty of the work of this Section in accordance with Section 01300, covering the period for one
(1) years beyond the expiration of the standard one (1) year warranty included in the General Conditions.
.2
Defective work shall include, but not be limited to loss of bond, loosening, leaking, cracking, splitting, and
warping, corrosion or other deformations of the tile and related accessories.
.3
Job Conditions
Environmental Temperature: Install tile only when base surfaces and air temperatures have been maintained between
10C and 21C for 72 hours preceding installation, and will be so maintained during installation and until setting
materials have cured.
Protection
.1
Prevent traffic and work on newly-laid floors by barricading areas for at least 48 hours following installation.
.2
In areas where flammable adhesives are used, ensure that adequate ventilation and spark-proof electrical
equipment are provided, and that smoking is prohibited. Store materials to prevent spontaneous
combustion.
Mock-Ups
Erect sample installations where designated on site, approximately 5’-0” x 5’-0” (1500 mm x 1500 mm) in size, typical for
floor and washroom wall. Mock-ups to illustrate floor tile, wall tile, accent tile as required, grout joints, control joints, floor
profiles, stair nosing profiles. Modify or replace mock-up to obtain Consultant’s approval. After acceptance, retain mockup as standard of quality for installation.
Living
project no 1504
1.7
1.7.1
SECTION 09300
CERAMIC TILE
Page 09300-2
Maintenance
Provide minimum 2% of each type and colour of tile required for the project to a maximum of six(6) extra cartons of tile
for Owner’s future maintenance use. Deliver where directed by Consultant. Tile and trim shall be from the same
production run as those installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.2
Mortar and Adhesive Materials
General:
Materials for work of this Section are based on products manufactured by Laticrete International Inc. Products of other
manufacturers are also acceptable, provided they conform to the requirements of these specifications.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
.1
Laticrete International Inc.
.2
Mapei Canada
.3
Proma Adhesive Inc.
.4
TEC Accucolor
.5
Slurry Bond Coat: For, levelling substrate variations up to 1/4” (6 mm) shall be Laticrete Underlayment by Laticrete
International Inc. or Planicrete 20 by Mapei Canada Inc. or equivalent by Proma.
Unmodified Thin Set Mortar: Mapei Kerabond and conforming to ANSI A118.1
Grout: TEC Accucolor polymer enhanced sanded grout for joints from 1/8”-1/2” wide meets with ANSI 118.6 as
recommended by manufacturer and distributed by Centura or alternate equal by Mapei or Mapei Canada Inc. Colours as
selected by Consultant.
Ceramic Floor Tile (PCT F):
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.3
Ceramic Floor Tile (PCT W):
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
Refer to Floor Pattern Layout drawing A-2.1 for floor type location.

F7 - Regal Series (Flamed) distributed by Olympia, unglazed finish, non-slip, through body
porcelain tile. Typical size 12” x 24” x and conforming to CAN/CGSB-75.1-M88 Type 4 MR1.
Colour to be “Light Mocha”. Tile to be installed in orthagonal patterns to be confirmed by Consultant at later
date.
Provide matching tile bases with finished edges for use at exposed top edge of base and for external angles
and projections.
Porcelain wall tiles to be install in Kitchen, refer to Floor Plan for location.

Plains-Polished Series (PURO White) distributed by Olympia, unglazed finish, non-slip,
through body porcelain tile. Typical size 12” x 24” x and conforming to CAN/CGSB-75.1-M88 Type
4 MR1.
Colour to be “Light Mocha”. Tile to be installed in orthagonal patterns to be confirmed by Consultant at later
date.
Provide matching tile bases with finished edges for use at exposed top edge of base and for external angles
and projections.
Miscellaneous
Water: potable, non-staining from domestic water supply.
Caulking Compound: Tremco THC 900 or approved equivalent, for tile control joints. Comply with application
requirements specified in Section 07900. Colours shall match grout colour.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 09300
CERAMIC TILE
Page 09300-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.2
3.2.1
3.4.2
3.4.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.5.2
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
Workmanship
Prepare materials and set tile in accordance with specifications and details in the Tile Installation Manual published by
the Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada, except where specified otherwise.
Make joints between tiles not larger than 1/16” (1.6 mm) wide – (use the blue spacers), plumb, straight, true, even
and flush with adjacent tile. Align patterns and maintain uniform joint appearance. Maximum surface tolerance shall be
1:800.
Layout work so that fields are centred on areas, with no tiles of less than half-size included. Maintain heights of panels
in full courses to nearest indicated dimension.
Apply tile and backing materials to clean and sound surfaces and in accordance with setting system specified.
Fit tile around corners, fitments, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects. Cut and grind tile accurately, and without
damage, to fit openings and at intersections and against trim finish. Drill tile for hardware and for pipes where possible;
otherwise at pipes and fittings, fit tile closely so that escutcheons cover cuts. Rub exposed edges smooth with abrasive
stone.
Sound tiles after setting and replace hollow sounding units to obtain full bond.
Use round trim at termination of wall tile panels, except where panel abuts projecting or right angle surface or flush
adjacent surface.
Allow minimum 24 hours after installation of tiles before grouting. Prepare and apply grout to manufacturer's
instructions.
Clean installed tile surfaces after grouting cured.
Installation of Tile
All tile shall be set in thin-set bond coat installed in accordance with respective TTMAC specifications and
manufacturer's instructions.
Beat tile into position to ensure no less than 95% coverage of mortar coat to each unit.
Lightly tap tiles with a solid object. If there is a hollow sound, remove tile, check for adhesion and re-tile area.
Control Joints
Install control joints in accordance with Detail EJ171-98 of the Tile Council of America; Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation and / or TTMAC Detail 301MJ-2002 Unless shown otherwise, control joints shall be 5mm wide and at
4200mm on centre (maximum) and as shown on the drawings.
Install anti-fracture membrane at each control joint.
Where applicable coordinate location of control joint to match sawcut control joints located in concrete slab.
Provide control joint at all door thresholds.
Provide space for movement of tile at all floor/wall intersections.
Grouting
Conform to grout manufacturer’s printed recommendations.
Remove all spacer string, wet joints and tile that have become dry before grouting. Force maximum grout into joints for
full depth of joints using trowel, squeegee or brush application method.
Make joints watertight, well tooled and dense. Remove excess grout from surface of tile.
Caulking
Caulk tile control joints and around piping and fittings extending through tiled surfaces. Tool to a smooth, flush surface,
free from air bubbles and contamination.
Refer also to the requirements of Section 07900.
Patching and Cleaning
Before project completion, remove and replace defective, damaged, loose and unbonded tile, and point defective joints.
After grouting has cured, clean and polish tile. Cleaning shall be in strict accordance with TTMAC recommendations for
treating new work as specified in its “Maintenance Guide”; the specific system shall be as required for the type of tile to
Living
project no 1504
3.6.3
SECTION 09300
CERAMIC TILE
be cleaned. Do not use acid for cleaning.
Re-point joints after cleaning as required to eliminate imperfections. Avoid scratching tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Page 09300-4
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 09510-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
ASTM C635-94
1.2.2
ASTM C636-92
1.2.3
1.2.4
CAN/CGSB-92.1-M89
ULC
1.3
1.3.1
Submittals
Samples: Submit duplicate 12” x 12” (300 mm x 300 mm) samples of each acoustical unit and 12” (300 mm) long grid
system, (main and cross tees, and intermediate tee if specified) in accordance with Section 01300.
Fixture And Air Boot Suspension Confirmation
.1
In accordance with Rule 30-302(1) November 1995 of the Ontario Hydro Code submit written confirmation
from an independent testing company and inspection company to the Consultant that the suspended ceiling
has been designed and installed to support the additional weight of the fixtures and any associated wiring, in
accordance with the Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code, and air diffusers and pressure of flexible ducts.
.2
In addition, submit an engineering report from the lay-in suspension system manufacturer certifying that the
suspension system used can safely support the loads imposed on it.
Maintenance Materials: Deliver a quantity equivalent to 2% of each pattern and type of acoustical units required for this
project for maintenance use. Put in cartons. Store where directed. Clearly identify contents. Maintenance materials to
be same production run as installed materials.
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
Specifications For Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel
Ceilings
Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension System for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.
Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units
Commence installation after building is enclosed and dust-generating activities have been completed.
Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.
Maintain uniform minimum 15C and humidity of 20 to 40% prior to, during, and after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Suspension System Manufacturers: Products for Work of this Section shall be as manufactured by Armstrong World
Industries Canada Ltd. Or Certain Teed Canada and to the following specifications:
2.1.1
Basic Steel Material and Finish: Commercial quality cold rolled steel minimum 0.179" (26 ga) thick, galvanized to zinc
coating designation Z275. Exposed surfaces of metal products shall be factory finished with satin white enamel.
2.1.2
Main Tees: 12'-0” (3650 mm) long, 15/16" (23.8 mm) face width double web design, rectangular bulb at top of web, 11/2" (38.1 mm) web height.
2.1.3
Main Tee Splices: Designed to lock lengths of main tees together so that joined lengths of tee function structurally as
single unit with tee faces at joint perfectly aligned and presenting tight seam
2.1.4
Cross Tees: 4’-0” (1220 mm) long, 1” (25 mm) web height structural cross-section, design same as main tees, designed
to connect at main tees forming positive lock without play, loss or gain in grid dimensions with offset over-ride of face
flange over main tee flange to provide flush joint
2.1.5
Edge Moulding: Materials and finish to match tees.
2.1.6
Accessories: Miscellaneous clips, splicers, connectors, screws, nails, and other standard accessories shall be zinccoated and shall be of strength and design compatible with the system specified. Provide all special accessories to
complete work.
2.1.7
Hangers and Anchors:
.1
#12 galvanized annealed steel wire for support of a maximum weight of 68 kg. per hanger; #9 galvanized
Living
project no 1504
2.1.8
2.1.9
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 09510-2
annealed steel wire for support of a maximum weight of 140 kg. per hanger; 3/16” (4.5 mm) diameter
galvanized annealed steel rod to support a maximum weight of 250 kg. per hanger.
.2
Inserts and attachments to structure for hanger connections shall suit conditions and loading, and galvanized
after forming. Minimum tensile strength 390 MPa.
.3
Concrete anchors shall be Phillips Red Head TW-614 or other make of tie wire sleeve anchors conforming to
US Federal Specifications FF-S-325, Group II Type III, Class 3, and QQ-2-325, Type II, Class 3.
Tie Wire: #12 galvanized annealed steel.
Hold-Down Clips: Spring steel clips by CGC Inc. or Armstrong.
Suspended Ceiling Grid System
Suspended Ceiling Grid System (Typical): shall be “Prelude XL” Series as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries
Canada Ltd., www.armstrong.com or Certain Teed Canada. All exposed suspension system materials shall be factory
finished, colour ‘’white’’. Provide this suspension system for all acoustic lay-in panels types.
System Trim: where detailed shall be “Axiom Classic” Series, 10” (200mm) x ¾” (19mm) as manufactured by Armstrong
World Industries Canada Ltd. www.armstrong.com or Certain Teed Canada. All exposed suspension system materials
shall be factory finished, colour ‘’white’’.
Acoustic Lay-in Panels
ACT (typical – as denoted on the room finish schedule): shall be 24” (610 mm) x 48” (1220 mm) x 3/4” (19 mm) square
tegular edge panels and 24” (610 mm) x 24” (610 mm) x 3/4” (19 mm) square tegular edge panels, “Optima Open Plan 3257”, colour ‘white’, NRC 0.95, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd. Or Certain Teed Canada.
ACT-2 (as denoted on the room finish schedule): shall be 24” (610 mm) x 48” (1220 mm) x 3/4” (19 mm) square edge
panels, “Clean Room Mylar - 1716 ”, colour ‘white’, NRC 0.55, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Canada
Ltd. Or Certain Teed Canada.
ACT(W) (as denoted on the room finish schedule): shall be 5.553” x 8’-0” x 3/4", tongue and groove edge panels,
Woodworks Channeled Natural Variations Ceiling Plank System (W9)(Dark Cherry NDC), NRC 0.60, as manufactured
by Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd. Or Certain Teed Canada.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
Installation
General
.1
Installation shall be by skilled tradesmen and in strict accordance with system manufacturer's printed
directions to produce a first-class flush-finished surface, in true planes, and free from uneven joints, and
dropping, warped, damaged tile or panels. Butt joints evenly.
.2
Install suspension system in general conformity with ASTM C636.
.3
Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceiling has been inspected by Consultant.
.4
Hangers for systems shall be spaced at approximately 4’-0” (1220 mm) centres both ways, and where
normally required in good standard practice for the systems specified. Supporting and grid members shall
provide adequate support for the ceiling and services incorporated with a maximum deflection of 1/360 in
each grid member span. Support luminaries and diffusers with additional hangers placed within 6” (150 mm)
of each corner and at a maximum of 24” (600 mm) around perimeter of luminaire and/or diffuser.
.5
Secure hangers firmly to grid and to anchors. Twist wire a minimum of two (2) turns around vertical hanging
wire.
.4
Erect suspension system at required elevation and level to tolerance of 1/8” (3 mm) over 12’-0” (3650 mm).
Frame around recessed fixtures, diffusers, grilles and openings, and where normally required in good
standard practice. Furr around ducts, beams, bulkheads or the like, as shown or required in best standard
practice. Tape or adhesive attachment is unacceptable.
.5
Install main grid with intersections arranged in a basket weave pattern.
.6
Co-ordinate the work with all trades affected by the work of this Section. Provide a layout of hangers and
Living
project no 1504
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
3.1.2
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 09510-3
framing suitable to accommodate fittings and units of equipment. Failure to follow this procedure will require
that the hangers and channels be revised to suit as necessary without additional cost to the Owner.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest adjacent
hangers and all related carrying channels and furring as required to span the greater distance.
Lay out work in accordance with reflected ceiling plans. Allowable tolerance of finished acoustical ceiling
system: 1/8” (3 mm) in 12’-0” (3650 mm), and1/64” (0.04 mm) between adjacent metal members.
Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
Hang suspended ceilings independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the longitudinal axis of face plane of adjacent members.
Centre acoustical ceiling installation on room axis leaving equal border pieces but not less than half the size
of the panel specified. Provide a row of hangers adjacent to and parallel with the walls for the support of the
ends of the main tee runners at not more than 6” (150 mm) from the ends of runners. Carefully fit
Install components to form a level ceiling with all parts flush and true, parallel to the module lines, and to the
pattern shown. Install panels in level, uniform plane free from twist, warp, dents and flush, without gaps and
exposed face of carrying members. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces. Ensure that flanges of
recessed light fixtures fit snugly and flush to ceiling plane.
Install cut panel at sprinkler heads.
Install hold-down clips on lay-in panels to hold such panels tight to grid system where within 20’-0” (6100
mm) of exterior doors or interior vestibule doors.
Adjustments: Adjust any sags or twists which develop in the suspension system and replace any part of the complete
system which is damaged or faulty.
* * *
END OF SECTION
project no 1504
SECTION 09650
VINYL TILE FLOORING
AND BASE
Page 09650-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
ASTM F1700
ASTM E648-06
1.2.3
ASTM C1028
1.2.4
1.2.5
ASTM F925
ASTM F1515
1.2.6
ASTM D3884
1.2.7
ASTM F2199
1.2.8
1.2.9
ASTM F970
ASTM F137
1.2.10
ASTM F 1514
1.2.11
ASTM E 989
1.2.12
ASTM F 2170
1.2.13
ASTM F 2055
1.2.14
ASTM F 1914
1.2.15
CAN/CSA A126.5-M87
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
Submittals
Samples: Submit samples of tiles and base for Consultant's and Owner’s approval, in accordance with Section 01300.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions in accordance with Section 01300, for incorporation into
Manufacturer's Data book.
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
Package flooring materials and identify contents of each package.
Store materials at 21ºC, for at least 48 hours before installation.
1.5
1.5.1
Job Conditions
Environmental Temperatures
.1
Verify that moisture content of concrete slab is within allowable tolerances of flooring manufacturer.
.2
Install vinyl flooring only when base surfaces and air temperatures have been maintained between 21ºC and
32ºC for 72 hours preceding installation, and will be so maintained during installation and for 7 days
thereafter.
Protection
.1
Prevent traffic and work on newly laid floors by barricading until work has set.
1.5.2
Solid Vinyl Floor Tile
Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction
of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal
Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method
Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Vinyl Flooring
Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Vinyl Flooring by
Color Change
Standard Guide for Abrasion Resistance of Textile Fabrics (Rotary
Platform, Double-Head Method)
Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensional Stability of Vinyl
Floor Tile after Exposure to Heat
Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit
Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Vinyl Flooring Materials with
Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus.
Standard Test Method for Measuring Heat Stability of Resilient
Flooring by Color Change.
Standard Classification for Determination of Impact Insulation Class
(IIC).
Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete
Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.
Standard Test Method for Size and Squareness of Resilient Floor Tile
by Dial Gage Method.
Standard Test Methods for Short-Term Indentation and Residual
Indentation of Resilient Floor Covering.
Vinyl Wall Base.
project no 1504
SECTION 09650
VINYL TILE FLOORING
AND BASE
Page 09650-2
.2
After floors have set, and until project completion, cover work by methods which will ensure that they are not
damaged by traffic.
.3
Ensure that adequate ventilation and spark-proof electrical equipment are provided, and smoking is
prohibited, in areas where flammable adhesives are used. Store materials to prevent spontaneous
combustion.
1.6
Maintenance Material
1.6.1
Deliver to Owner on completion of work, 2% (to nearest full carton) of vinyl flooring of each material and each colour
installed, in labelled packages.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
Vinyl Tile Flooring (VTF): Acceptable Manufacturer: Karndean Designflooring, available from: GO resilient Canada; #33250 Harvester Road, Burlington, ON L7L 1P7; Toll Free Tel: 866-819-6825; Fax: 905-336-2180; Email:.request info
[email protected]; Web:www.karndean.com or equivalent as approved by Architect; Refer to Floor Pattern Layout
drawing A-2.1 for floor type location.
 F1 – Opus series, Terra, SP212
 F2 – Art Select series, Winter Oak, RL04
 F5 – Van Gogh series, Jatoba, VGW42T
 F6 – Opus series, Vita, SP713
 F8 – Da Vinci series, Canadian Maple, RP61
 F9 – Art Select, Alderney, LM03
2.1.2
Rubber Base (RB): Top set, coved for hard floor surfaces, vinyl, continuous coil lengths (no joints permitted) and 4” (100
mm) high x 1/8” (3.18 mm) thick.
2.1.3
Filler: As recommended by vinyl tile manufacturer.
2.1.4
Primers and Adhesives: As recommended by manufacturer of each material for each subfloor condition.
2.1.5
Cleaner: as recommended by manufacturer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
Installation
Lay each material in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Products must be laid only on subfloors with
moisture level below 75%RH when tested with a hygrometer (in line with BS8203-4; 2001 - Installation of
resilient floor coverings). If hygrometer readings are above 75%RH it would be necessary to install a surface
damp proof membrane (DPM), regardless old or new floors. Flooring contractor to provide RH testing.
Karndean does not mandate any one brand of resilient flooring underlayment. Permanent HVAC system shall be
turned on and set to a minimum of 65 degrees F (20 degrees C) for a minimum of 48 hours prior to, during and 48
hours after installation. After the installations, the maximum temperature should not exceed 125 degrees F (37
degrees C).
1. All products shall be allowed to acclimate at least 24 to 48 hours before installation. This means product shall
be placed in the same room as the install that is taking place and removed from its factory packaging.
2. Material shall be visually inspected prior to installation.
3. Ensure that all recommendations for sub-floor and jobsite conditions are met prior to beginning the
installation. Once the installation is started, Contractor and installer have accepted those conditions.
4. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions for each product type and application
specified.
5. In order to achieve a random natural wood look, take planks and cut nominal lengths to be used on the first
course; example: 10 inches (254 mm), 40 inches (1016 mm), 15 inches (381 mm), 25 inches (635 mm),
8 inches (203 mm). At the end of the first course, all cut planks remaining should be used on the next
course. Position planks so the end seams are no closer than the width of the plank being installed.
Maintain this approach to staggering the planks throughout the entire installation.
project no 1504
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION 09650
VINYL TILE FLOORING
AND BASE
Page 09650-3
6. Center tiles or planks in rooms and hallways so borders are not less than half a tile or plank when possible.
7. Cut edges shall always be installed against a wall.
8. Install using tile and plank installation techniques recommended by manufacturer.
9. Install tiles, planks, borders and feature strips in locations and configurations indicated on the Drawings.
10. Any spread glue has to be covered with material and rolled within the recommended time frame described on
the adhesive container.
11. If troweled adhesive skims over, scrape up and reapply.
12. Install in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations.
13. Refer to manufacturer's literature for selection criteria for trowel size, type.
14. Using proper trowel size, apply adhesive in accordance with label on adhesive.
15. Spread a 4 inch (100 mm) wide band of adhesive around the perimeter of the area designated as an extreme
condition area.
16. An additional 4 inch (100 mm) band should be spread at approximately 10 foot (3 m) intervals.
17. For transitional areas, from loose lay to another floor covering of a different height, a 4 inch (100 mm) band
of adhesive should be spread across the length of the transition.
CLEANING
A.
Wipe off any adhesive on floor as installation proceeds. Wait 48 hours before applying the cleaning and
maintenance products.
B.
Prior to installation of permanent fixtures or furniture, remove all dirt, debris, or residual adhesive and clean
the floor. If desired, a protective covering may be applied at this time. Specific products and instructions are
available from the manufacturer.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proper cleaning and maintenance of the products.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 09756
CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING
Page 09756-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
Submittals
Maintenance Instructions: Submit two (2) copies of maintenance instructions to Consultant in accordance with Section
01300, for incorporation into Manufacturer's Data book.
1.3
1.3.1
Special Precautions
Immediately after using, immerse and store used wiping cloths in water and remove from site each night after operation.
Take every precaution to prevent spontaneous combustion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
Materials
Refer to Floor Pattern Layout drawing A-2.1 for floor type location.

F4 - Concrete sealer and hardener shall be ‘Ashford Formula’ as manufactured by Curecrete Chemical
Company Inc. or Sika S3 or equivalent as approved by the Architect. Use for floor areas with the abbreviation
"CS" as indicated on the Room Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
Examination
Before commencing with the work examine floors to be sealed, and verify compatibility between curing sealing agent if
one was used to seal floors and final concrete sealer applied under work of this Section. Sandblast, acid etch, lightly
grind, whichever is required to prepare floors to ensure bonding if curing-sealing agent has been used to cure concrete.
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
Application
Apply sealer in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendation with respect to this project.
Apply sealer in temperatures between 1.7 and 57 degrees C.
For coloured concrete commence sealing as soon as concrete surfaces have cured for the minimum period
recommended by the sealant manufacturer, and after tests indicate moisture and chemical conditions are satisfactory for
application.
Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use wheelabrator
method. Clean concrete of any dirt, dust, oil, grease, stains, paint, or other contamination detrimental the bond of sealer
and final appearance.
Apply sealer in dust-free conditions suitable for achieving good results. Apply sealer in strict accordance with
manufacturer's printed directions. Apply sealer to present uniformly-coloured surfaces, free from runs, bubbles, brush
marks, crawls, dirt or dust particles, or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
3.2.4
3.2.5
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND FINISHING
Page 09900-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
Examine the Specifications and Drawings for the work of other Sections regarding the provisions for prime and finish coats.
Paint or finish all materials installed throughout the project which are required to be painted and which are left unfinished or
unpainted by other Sections. The only exception to this requirement is where the drawings, specifications, or schedules
state positively and explicitly that a surface is not to be finish painted.
Refer also to the Door Schedule and the Room Finish Schedule.
1.2
1.2.1
SSPC
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
1.2.13
1.2.14
1.2.15
1.2.16
1.2.17
1.2.18
1.2.19
1.2.20
1.2.21
1.2.22
1.2.23
1.2.24
1.2.25
1.2.26
1.2.27
ASTM D523-89
CAN/CGSB-1.2-M89
CAN/CGSB-1.4-92
CAN/CGSB-1.5-M91
CAN/CGSB-1.40-M89
CAN/CGSB-1.57-M90
CAN/CGSB-1.59-M89
CAN/CGSB-1.68-M91
CAN/CGSB-1.76-M91
CAN/CGSB-1.100-M89
CAN/CGSB-1.119-M89
CAN/CGSB-1.135-M91
CAN/CGSB-1.143-M90
CAN/CGSB-1.181-92
CAN/CGSB-1.188-M90
CAN/CGSB-1.195-M90
CAN/CGSB-1.209-93
CGSB 85-GP-16M
CGSB 85-GP-32M
CAN/CGSB-85.100-93
ECP
ECP-07-89
ECP-12-89
OPCA
ULC
CAN/ULC-S102-M88
1.3
1.3.1
Submittals
Samples
.1
Submit 2-12” x12” (300 mm x 300 mm) samples of every colour required in accordance with Section 01300.
Include a complete list of paint and finish materials to be used, showing the name of the manufacturer, the
catalogue number, grade and quality of the materials proposed for use.
.2
Colours shall match those specified in the Material and Colour Schedule. Colours selected for work of this
Section shall be based on products manufactured by Para Paints Canada Inc.
.3
Apply samples of finishes in a testing area in the building in the presence of the Consultant. Apply samples with
the correct material, number of coats, colour, texture and degree of gloss required. Refinish if required, until
approval of the Consultant is obtained. Location of testing area shall be as approved by the Consultant.
Steel Structures Painting Council, "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol.
2"
Test Method for Specular Gloss
Boiled Linseed Oil
Petroleum Spirits Thinner
Low Flash Petroleum Spirits Thinner
Alkyd, Interior, Semigloss Enamel
Alkyd, Exterior Gloss Enamel
Solvent Type Primer-Sealer for Interior Wall
Interior and Exterior Heat Resistant Enamel
Interior Latex Type, Flat Paint
Primer-Sealer, Wall, Interior Latex Type
Flat Alkyd Enamel for Equipment
Heat Resistant Aluminum Enamel, Silicone Alkyd
Ready Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating
Emulsion Type Filler Masonry Block
Interior Semi-gloss Latex Paint
Low Sheen Latex Interior Paint
Painting Galvanized Steel
Painting Concrete Floors
Painting
Environmental Choice Program
Water-borne Surface Coatings
Solvent-borne Paints
Ontario Painting Contractors Association
Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials and
Assemblies
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 09900
Page 09900-2
.4
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
Leave test areas undisturbed until completion of the work. Approved work in the test area shall serve as a
standard for similar work throughout the project. Work which does not match the approved finishes shall be
corrected and refinished at no expense to the Owner.
.5
Submit opaque paint samples in triplicate on 4” x 8” (100 mm x 200 mm) draw down cards on black and white.
Submit samples of stains and clear finishes in triplicate on 2" x 4" x 3/8” thick (50 mm x 100 mm x 10mm) piece
of wood of same species as scheduled to receive stain or clear finish.
List of Materials: Submit a list of materials proposed for use on the work, for review at least thirty (30) days before the
materials are required. The list shall bear the manufacturer's official certification that the materials listed thereon are the
best quality made by the company.
Extra Materials: Supply Owner with one clearly identified sealed 4 litre can of each colour and type of paint, stain, and
varnish for this work for future maintenance. Take such materials to designated storage area in the building.
Storage and Safety Precautions: Store containers of paint, varnish, thinner, and other volatile materials in well-ventilated
designated room under lock and key, where they will not be exposed to excessive heat or direct rays of the sun. Keep
containers tightly closed when not in actual use. Remove used cloths from building every night, and when not in use. Take
precautions against spontaneous combustion by burning, drenching in water, or placing in air-tight covered metal
containers. Provide warning signs where toxic materials and explosive solvents are used. Provide CO2 fire extinguisher of
9 kg. capacity in this room while area is used for paint storage.
Ventilation: Ventilate, heat and maintain storage area at minimum temperature of 10 deg C (50 deg F) and protected from
direct rays of sun.
Protection: Protect the work of other trades from damage. Post signs at freshly-painted surfaces immediately following their
completion. Any soiling of concrete pavement attributable to this section due to spillage, mixing of material, or any other
cause whatsoever, to be entirely reinstated under this Section at no expense to the Owner.
Job Conditions
Environmental Temperature: Do not paint or finish in unclean or improperly ventilated areas. Maintain ambient and
substrate temperatures and humidity conditions within acceptable limits as recommended by paint manufacturer. Maintain
adequate ventilation at all times to control excessive humidity.
Protection
.1
Provide metal pans or adequate tarpaulins to protect floors in areas assigned for the storage and mixing of
paints.
.2
Use sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for the full protection of floors, furnishings, and work not being
painted. Protect mechanical, electrical, and special equipment hardware, all other components of the building
which do not require painting from paint spotting and other soiling during the painting process.
.3
Leave above areas clean and free from evidence of occupancy upon completion of painting.
.4
Protect paint materials from fire and freezing.
.5
Keep waste rags in metal drums containing water, and remove from building at end of each working shift.
Lighting: Provide a minimum of 161 lux lighting on surfaces to be painted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
Materials
Paint
.1
Highest grade, first line quality product of the manufacturer. Painting and finishing materials shall comply
with or exceed CAN2-85-100 for Premium Grade Work and complying with the specified generic formula guide
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Refer to Material and Colour Schedule for colours. Paints are identified as (P). Colours will be selected from
Para Paints Canada Inc. and shall be matched by paint supplier. The following manufacturers are acceptable:
.1
Para Paints Canada Inc.
.2
ICI Paints Canada (Glidden)
Living
project no 1504
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
2.1.2
2.1.3
SECTION 09900
Page 09900-3
.3
Pratt and Lambert Inc.
.4
PPG Canada Inc.
.5
Sherwin-Williams Company of Canada Limited
.6
Colour Your World
.7
Benjamin Moore Paints
.8
Sico Inc.
The Consultant reserves the right to refuse any paint or finishing material if in his opinion it is incapable of
matching specified colours or is not suitable or adequate for the use which it is proposed.
Paint and finishing materials for each procedure listed in Finish Schedule shall be products of single
manufacturer.
Paint products shall meet or exceed requirements of ECP-07 Guidelines for water based paints and ECP-12
Guidelines for solvent based paints. In addition, paint products shall meet or exceed applicable performance
standards issued by CGSB or other such standards approved by accredited standards writing organizations.
Paint shall have excellent flowing and brushing properties. Paint shall cure free of sags, runs, wrinkles to yield
desired finish specified.
Sheen shall be as selected by Consultant.
Paints shall have low VOC content in accordance with applicable legislation.
Stain: Pigmented type conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.145-M90, Solvent-Based, pigmented stain, in colour selected by
Consultant.
Polyurethane Varnish: Unless specified otherwise interior grade, oil modified conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.175-M89. Sheen
shall be as selected by Consultant.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
Inspection
Verify moisture content of surfaces with electronic moisture metre. Do not proceed without written directions if moisture
reading is higher than 12-15%.
Ensure temperature of surfaces to be finished is between 10 and 20 deg C (50 and 68 deg F). Proceed with work only
when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production of a first-class job. Report to Consultant, in writing, any
surfaces which are found to be unsatisfactory. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of substrate surfaces.
Remove dust, grease, rust, and extraneous matter from all surfaces, except that rust occurring on items specified to be
primed under other Sections shall be removed and work re-primed under those Sections.
Preparation
Concrete and Masonry
.1
Test surfaces for alkalinity with pink litmus paper or other standard industry method.
.2
Where extreme alkalinity occurs, wash surface with 4% solution tetrapotassium pyrophosphate where latex base
paint is to be used, and with zinc sulphate solution where other paint bases are to be used.
.3
Etch normal concrete surface to receive alkyd paint with commercial muriatic acid solution (1 part to 20 parts
water by volume). Follow with complete rinsing with clean water.
.4
Rub down surfaces of different textures and remove mortar spots and sharp edges with a scraper. Patch where
required. Fill masonry and concrete surfaces with primer/block filler to fill all holes and pores.
Gypsum Board: Inspect to ensure joints are completely filled and sanded smooth. Inspect surfaces for "nail popping", screw
heads not recessed and taped, breaks in surface or other imperfections and have repaired as required. Fill small nicks or
holes with patching compound and sand smooth.
Unprimed Ferrous Metal Surfaces: sandblast / spongeblast / grind metal surface to SSPC-SP6 (to remove all rust and
expose metal surfaces) specifications before application of the primer coat.
Galvanized and Pre-Primed Surfaces
.1
New Metal With Wipe Coated Galvanizing: Thoroughly clean to remove all grease, oil, dirt and all other
contaminants which may be present on the surface. Mineral Spirits or Xylol are acceptable solvents to use for
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 09900
Page 09900-4
this purpose - that is, to remove grease, oil, dirt and similar contaminants. Remove scale by wire brushing.
Weathered Metal With Wipe Coated Galvanizing: For old and weathered galvanized and preprimed metal,
thorough surface preparation is essential - to ensure that all contaminants have been removed from the surface
and pretreat as for New Metal.
.3
Spangled Type Galvanizing: Treat with vinyl wash primer to provide proper bond for paint finish.
Hardware: Remove finish hardware, switch plates and accessories, removable trim, grilles, etc; mask any that are not
removable. Re-install these when paint is thoroughly dry and clean them. Do not clean hardware with solvent. Primepainted hardware items shall be painted to match the surface on which they are installed.
Preprimed Pumps, Motors, and Similar Equipment: Prior to painting pre-primed pumps, motors, and similar equipment,
remove paint protective coating such as silicone, to ensure good paint adhesion.
.2
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.5
3.5.1
Protection
Provide scaffolding, staging, platforms and ladders, as required for execution of work. Erect scaffolding to avoid interference
with work of other trades. Comply with Occupational Health and Safety Act.
Provide drop cloths or adequate plastic sheets to protect floors in areas assigned for storage and mixing of paints.
Mask and cover all surrounding surfaces to provide neat, clean, true juncture lines, and to keep paint from adjacent
surfaces. Upon completion, remove masking and clean adjacent surfaces free of overspray spatters, drips, smears and
overspray.
Mask labels and specification plates occurring on equipment to be painted and ULC labels on doors and frames.
Remove finish hardware, electrical switch and outlet covers to protect from paint splatter. Mask items not removable. Use
sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for full protection of floors, furnishings, mechanical, electrical and special
equipment, all other components of building which do not require painting or to be removed, from paint spotting and other
soiling. Re-install items when paint is dry. Clean any components that are paint spotted or soiled.
Keep waste rags in covered metal drums containing water and remove from building at end of each day.
Prohibit traffic, where possible, from areas where painting is being carried out and until paint is cured. Post “wet paint” or
other warning signage during and on completion of work.
When handling solvent coating materials, wear approved vapour/particulate respirator as protection from vapours. Dust
respirators do not provide protection from vapours.
Protect and keep sprinkler heads free of paint.
Workmanship
Apply work using skilled tradesmen working under direction of a capable foreman, and according to manufacturer's
specifications; in a workmanlike manner; with suitable clean equipment in good condition; in dust-free and under adequate
illumination and suitable conditions for production of best results; evenly, uniform in sheen, colour and texture, free from
brush marks, sags, crawls, runs, or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance; and in a manner to prevent
spattering or spilling over finished surfaces.
Mix paint on site and use unadulterated, except where specified otherwise in manufacturer's directions.
Use same brand of paint for primer, intermediate, and finish coats.
Do not apply succeeding coats until preceding coat is dry and hard.
Lighten preceding coats 25% white (tint white coats) from the colour called for in the Colour and Material Schedule.
It is generally intended that material be applied by brush or roller. Spray painting will be permitted in areas where
advantageous, but Consultant shall be consulted and shall approve each area before spray painting commences.
Consultant may at any time prohibit the use of spray painting for such reasons during application as carelessness, poor
masking, or protective measures, paint fogs drifting into prepainted surfaces or other finishes, disturbance to other trades, or
failure to obtain a dense, even, opaque finish.
Sand lightly between coats with No. 00 sandpaper.
Do not apply last coat of varnish on stained wood surfaces until all gloss varnish applications have been inspected and
approved by the Consultant.
Application
Note: In addition to specific notes included in this specification refer to Material and Colour Schedule for additional
Living
project no 1504
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
3.5.9
3.5.10
3.5.11
3.5.12
3.5.13
3.5.14
3.5.15
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
SECTION 09900
Page 09900-5
requirements. Provide finish uniform in sheen, colour and texture, free from streaks, shiners and brush or roller marks or
other defects.
Follow manufacturer's preparation and application instructions.
Paint all exposed surfaces where specifically noted on Room, Material and Finish Schedule.
Unless specifically noted, do not paint stainless steel, chrome, baked enamel, plastic laminate, solid phenolic plastic, glass,
tile, porcelain enamel, ceramic surfaces, equipment name or specification plates, fire resistance labels, washroom fixtures,
manhole and catch basin covers, floors or sprinkler heads. Make good paint finish on items where painted surfaces have
become marred or defaced.
Examine the Drawings and Specifications for the work of other sections regarding the provisions for prime and finish coats.
Paint or finish all materials installed throughout the project which are required to be painted and which are left unfinished or
unpainted by other sections. The only exception to this requirement is where the Drawings, specifications or schedules
state positively and explicitly that a surface is not to be finish painted.
In areas where painting is not called for, painting is not required, with the following exceptions, which require paint: plywood
backboards, all other exposed wood and hollow metal doors and frames. Colours selected by Consultant.
Paint interior of all pipe and duct spaces, visible through grilles and slots in suspended acoustic tile ceiling grid, black matte
finish. Paint interior of lighting coves and valances, including interior of angles supporting louvres, white.
Paint glazing rebates and stops of hollow metal sections before glass is installed.
Paint convectors, grilles, conduit, pipes, ducts, hangers, brackets, panels, access panels, exposed steel, concrete inserts,
bus ducts, and other articles on or near finished surface shall to match the colour of the surface on which the article
appears, except where noted otherwise on Schedules.
Identification paint schedule as follows:
.1
Fire protection system: red, alkyd enamel.
.2
Systems posing safety hazards: yellow, alkyd enamel.
.3
Safe systems: green, alkyd enamel.
Do not paint circuit breakers, switches, and receptacles, or similar electrical components.
Paint surfaces where mirrors will be directly applied to prevent moisture bleed through wall.
For finished interior wood that is to be painted, apply one coat of approved best grade white interior trim primer, reduced
with thinners in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions, to ALL surfaces of wood as soon as material is delivered
and before it is built in. Use brushes for applying material to interior wood.
Paint entire plane of areas exhibiting incomplete or unsatisfactory coverage and of areas which have been cut and patched.
Patching not acceptable.
Do not paint over ULC labels on doors and frames and over identification labels on mechanical and electrical equipment.
Disposal of Paint Waste
Be responsible for removal and disposal of material and waste generated by this Section.
Remove empty and partly used containers from Site and recycle or disposed of as Hazardous Waste in accordance with
local municipal, provincial and federal environmental regulations. Provide proof of such action in form of receipts of tipping
fees, disposal fees or bills of lading, as applicable.
Remove from Site peripheral items, such as clean up solvents, paint brushes, rags, and similar items and dispose of where
necessary in accordance with local municipal, provincial and federal environmental regulations
Do not rinse off of latex paints from brushes and rags under running water tap. While work is ongoing, whether using latex
or alkyd products, rinse off all brushes and rags in container with appropriate solvent (water or paint thinner). Leave such
container in well lit and well ventilated area, away from any flammable conditions. Dispose of emulsion created in
accordance with local municipal, provincial and federal environmental regulations.
Finish Schedule
The following Formulae are intended to provide completely opaque surfaces. If surfaces are not completely opaque, apply
additional coats at no additional cost to the Owner.
Consult Consultant before painting any surface not included in the formulae as listed.
Existing Painted Masonry or Concrete:
One (1) coat of primer if required
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 09900
Page 09900-6
Two (2) coats of latex, eggshell finish.
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.7.6
3.7.7
3.7.8
3.7.9
3.7.10
3.7.11
3.7.12
New Masonry or Concrete:
One (1) coat of surface filler
Two (2) coats of latex, eggshell finish
Exposed Gypsum Board Wall Surfaces:
One (1) coat of primer - sealer,
Two (2) coats of interior latex, pearl finish.
Exposed Gypsum Board Ceilings, Coves and Bulkheads:
One (1) coat of primer - sealer,
Two (2) coats of interior latex, pearl finish.
Ferrous Metal Surfaces (if not shop primed):
One (1) coat of rust inhibitive primer
Two (2) coats of latex, semi-gloss finish. Use exterior grade for exterior work and interior grade for interior work.
Ferrous Galvanized Metal Surfaces (if not shop primed):
One (1) coat of rust inhibitive acrylic primer
Ferrous Metal Surfaces (if shop primed):
Touch-up only with same paint as that applied in the shop
Exposed Exterior Ferrous Metal Surfaces (unprimed ferrous metal) – for exterior columns
Prepare steel in accordance with 3.2.3.
One (1) coat zinc rich primer
Shop apply intermediate one (1) coat International Interguard epoxy 345. Provide touch ups in field where required.
Shop apply one (1) top coat Interthane 990.
Interior Natural or Stained Wood - Clear Finish:
One (1) coat wiping stain
One (1) coat waterborne urethane thinned 25%, satin finish,
Two (2) coat waterborne urethane full strength, satin finish.
Prepare surfaces as required by applying proper primers on the surface to which paint is applied. For surfaces above
ceilings, paint surfaces after all services have been installed and prior to ceiling installation.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 10160
TOILET PARTITIONS
Page 10160-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
ASTM A446/A446M-89
Specification For Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized by the Hot Dip
Process), Structural (Physical) Quality
CGSB 1-GP-88M
Enamel, Alkyd, Air Drying and Baking, Gloss
CAN/CGSB-1.81-M90
Air Drying and Baking Alkyd Primer for Vehicles and Equipment
Submittals
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, for Consultant's review before fabrication
indicating material, finish, dimensions, details of connections and fastenings, elevations, plans, sections, hardware and
other pertinent information.
Samples: Submit samples of finish hardware and baked enamel in selected colour in accordance with Section 01300,
for approval of Consultant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
Approved Manufacturers
The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they comply with the requirements of these specifications:
.1
Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.
.2
Shanahans Mfg. (distributed by W.G. Wood Sales)
.3
Ambico Sales Ltd.
.4
Ontario Accurate Partitions
.5
Wm. Aikenheads Bldg. Specialties
.6
Watrous Inc.
.7
CDA Industries Inc.
.8
General Storage Systems.
Design: Toilet partitions shall headrail braced toilet compartments.
Materials-General
Steel: Zinc coated steel, ASTM A446 Grade A, fully pickled and free from scale and internal defects. Surfaces shall be
free from perceptible waves, buckles, and other imperfections. Minimum nominal core thickness shall be as follows:
panels and doors 22 gauge (.762 mm), pilasters 20 gauge (.914 mm), headrails 18 gauge (1.2 mm).
Hardware: Brushed finish, extruded aluminum alloy of chrome plated zinc die coatings. Bolts shall be stainless steel.
Stainless Steel Sheet: Type 304 alloy, No. 4 finish, 24 gauge (0.610 mm) nominal thickness.
Aluminum: Extruded alumimum sections with anodized finish.
Shop Finish: Spray applied baked enamel conforming to CAN/CGSB 1-GP-81M (primer) and CGSB 1-GP-88, Type II,
(finish), or baked polyurethane powder coating, colour as selected by Consultant from manufacturer's ‘standard
colours’ range.
Fabrication
Face both sides of doors, partitions, urinal screens and pilasters with flush steel panels which are flat and free from
distortion.
Fabricate cores of honeycomb laminated to faces under pressure with waterproof binder. Cores of doors and partitions
may be fibreboard in place of honeycomb.
Close edges of doors, partitions, urinal screens and pilasters with crowned steel welded and continuously sealed to
faces. Mitre and weld corners.
Fabricate pilasters minimum 1-1/4” (32 mm) thick, and doors minimum 1” (25 mm) thick. Fabricate urinal screens 18”
(450 mm) wide x 42” (1070 mm) long.
Unless detailed otherwise, provide closure pilasters as required at end units of compartment banks.
Reinforce doors, partitions, urinal screens and pilasters for hardware and for partition mounted tissue dispensers, in the
Living
project no 1504
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
SECTION 10160
TOILET PARTITIONS
Page 10160-2
case of partitions.
Provide panel brackets, pilaster attachments, concealed gravity type hinges, door stops, pilaster shoes, coat hooks,
bumpers, latches, and pull on the outside of doors in the case of accessible compartments. Coat hooks in accessible
compartments shall be on the side wall, and shall project 1” (25 mm) maximum. Locate coat hooks at 48” (1220 mm)
above finished floor.
Where grab bar is connected to partition, reinforce partition to receive it.
Use metal end caps only, in colour to match partition panels.
Shop Finishing
Clean, degrease and neutralize steel components with phosphate or chromate treatment.
Apply finish to doors and pilaster/panels, and urinal screens and oven bake to achieve a minimum coating of dry film
thickness of 25.4 microns.
3.1
Installation - General
3.1.1
Install partition assemblies and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.1.2
Set partitions, screens and doors 12” (300 mm) above the finished floor in accurate position, plumb, level and free from
sag and distortion.
3.1.3
Fasten all pilasters, partitions and screens to masonry walls with "U" brackets. Provide three (3) brackets per panel.
3.1.4
At partitions adjacent to a urinal, provide a 16” (406 mm) wide x 36” (915 mm) high stainless steel panel. Fasten with
concealed fasteners.
3.1.5
Ensure spaces between panels and pilasters, between panels and walls and between pilasters and walls are of uniform
consistent width and sized to ensure it is not possible to see persons using the compartments.
3.1.6
Perform drilling of steel, masonry and concrete necessary to install the work of this Section.
3.1.7
Co-ordinate installation with the work of trades providing wall and floor finishes, washroom accessories and other
adjacent components and construction.
3.1.8
Use non-corrosive anchors and fasteners. Ferrous metals are not acceptable.
3.2
Adjustment
3.2.1
Upon completion of the work or when directed, remove all traces of protective coating or paper, and wipe partitions.
3.2.2
Test hinges, locks and hatches and where necessary, adjust and lubricate. Set hinges so that doors stand open 30
degrees when compartment is not in use. Ensure that partitions are in working order.
3.3
Schedule of Metal Toilet Partitions
3.3.1
Install headrail braced toilet compartments in the following washrooms, refer to drawings for additional details and extent
of partitioning required:
.1
W.R. 139
.2
W.R. 140
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 10800
WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
Page 10800-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
ASTM A167-87
1.2.2
ASTM A525
1.2.3
CAN/CSA-G164-M92
1.3
1.3.1
Submittals
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, for Consultant's review before fabrication.
Shop drawings of units for use by the handicapped shall be distinctly marked and cross-referenced to the corresponding
article in the specifications.
Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet
and Strip
Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet Zinc Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process (Metric)
Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.3
2.3.1
2.5.2
Materials - Generally
Metals
.1
Ferrous Steel: Sheet, cold-rolled furniture steel, double annealed, mill stretched and levelled, and fully
pickled. Otherwise, steel shall be hot-rolled or cold-rolled of alloy to suit needs of fabrication, use, and
appearance.
.2
Stainless Steel: Type 304, No. 4 finish.
.3
Galvanized Steel: For sheet, Z275 zinc coating designation in accordance with ASTM Specification A525.
For irregular sections, hot dip galvanized to comply with CSA G164.
Anchors and Fastenings: Where exposed, use stainless steel and otherwise to match metal anchored. Where nonexposed, use the same as that specified for exposed, or use galvanized steel. Anchors and fastenings shall be of the
type appropriate for the substrate to which accessory unit is secured.
Washroom materials shall be of same materials, construction and finishes, similar in function, design, appearance and
conforming to standards of those specified, as manufactured by:
.1
Bobrick Washroom Equipment of Canada Limited.
.2
Watrous Inc.
.3
Twin-Cee Ltd.
.4
Frost Products Limited
.5
Mitsubishi
.6
The listed product manufacturers are all acceptable. The Contractor shall not intermix products of different
manufacturers in his submitted list of washroom accessories, unless chosen manufacturer cannot provide required
product or as specified otherwise.
Refer to schedule of accessories and co-ordinate locations of all accessories as specified in the following lists.
Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD)
Toilet tissue dispenser shall be Cast aluminum, satin finish. Plastic spindles, concealed locking device; theft-resistant.
Holds two rolls up to 6" (150mm) diameter (2000 sheets). Unit 12 1⁄2" (320mm) wide, proj. 4 7⁄8" (125mm) from wall.
No controlled delivery.
Acceptable Products:
.1
Bobrick Model No. B-2740
.2
Equivalent as manufactured by Watrous, Twin-Cee or Frost.
Living
project no 1504
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.2
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.2
2.10
2.10.1
SECTION 10800
Page 10800-2
Surface Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD)
Surface mounted paper towel dispenser shall have the following characteristics; satin-finish stainless steel, tumbler
lock on top of cabinet, door swings down for loading towels. Dispenses 400 C fold or 525 multifold towels. Cabinet
slots indicate refill time. Unit 10 13⁄16" W, 13 1⁄4" H, 4 7⁄8" D (275 x 335 x 125mm).
.1
.2
Sanitary Napkin Disposal Bins (SND)
Satin-finish stainless steel. Cover is drawn, one-piece construction; secured to cabinet with full-length stainless steel
piano-hinge. Capacity: 1.0-gal. (3.8-L). Unit 7 1⁄2" W, 10" H, 3 13⁄16" D (190 x 255 x 95mm).
.1
.2
Grab Bars (GB-1) (GB-2) (GB-3)
Equip water closet compartments designated for the handicapped with grab bars in conformance with the Ontario
Building Code and as follows.
.1
One (1) L-shaped bar with 2’-6” (762 mm) long horizontal and 3’-0 (915 mm) long vertical component
mounted on wall adjacent to the water closet. (GB-1)
.2
One (1) bar 2’-0” (610 mm) long mounted horizontally on wall behind water closet. (GB-2)
.3
One (1) bar 2’-0” (610 mm) long mounted vertically on wall next to urinal (GB-3)
.3
Grab bars shall have concealed non-corrosive anchorage systems of types approved by Consultant. Grab
bar material and anchorage shall withstand downward force of 2.2 kN (500 lbs.).
.4
Fabricate grab bars with minimum 16 gauge (1.6 mm) thick, 1-1/4” (32 mm) diameter peened surface tubular
stainless steel with welded concealed flanges.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
.1
Bobrick
.2
Watrous
.3
Twin-Cee
.4
Frost
Mirrors (M-1)
Surface mounted frameless mirror shall be Type 304 polished stainless steel #8 architectural bright finish with all-welded
construction.
Unit size shall be approximately 23-1/2” (600 mm) wide x 35-1/2” (900 mm) high.
Acceptable Products
.1
Bobrick Model No. B-1556 2436 frameless
.2
Mirrors (M-2)
Surface mounted Barrier Free Tilt Mirror gapless fit mirror shall be Type 304 polished stainless steel #8 architectural
bright finish with all-welded construction.
Unit size shall be approximately 24” (610 mm) wide x 36” (910mm) high.
Acceptable Products
.1
.2
Recessed Paper Towel Disposal (PTD/DIS)
Surface mounted paper towel dispenser unit shall have the following characteristics;
.1
Cabinet — 18-8, type-304, heavy-gauge stainless steel. All-welded construction.
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 10800
Page 10800-3
Flange — 18-8, type-304, 22-gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel with satin finish. Drawn, one-piece, seamless
construction.
Door — 18-8, type-304, 18-gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel. 9/16" (14mm) 90° return edges for maximum
rigidity. Secured to cabinet with a concealed,
full-length stainless steel piano-hinge. Equipped with a stainless steel cable door-swing limiter and friction
catch.
Paper Towel Dispenser — 18-8, type-304, 22-gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel. Capacity: 300 C-fold or 400
multifold paper towels.
Waste Container — Removable, leakproof, rigid molded plastic. Capacity: 1.6-gal. (6.1-L).
Recessed paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle shall be type-304 stainless steel with all-welded construction.
Exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Flange shall be drawn, one-piece, seamless construction. Door shall be 18
gauge (1.2mm); have 9/16" (14mm) 90° return edges; be secured to cabinet with a concealed, full-length stainless steel
piano-hinge; and equipped with a stainless steel cable door-swing limiter and friction catch. Door conceals flange from
view. Paper towel dispenser shall be capable of dispensing 300 C-fold or 400 multifold paper towels without adjustment
or use of adapters. Waste receptacle shall be furnished with a removable, leakproof, rigid molded plastic waste-container
with a capacity of 1.6-gal.
2.10.2
.1
.2
2.11
2.11.1
Soap Dispensers (SD)
Soap Dispenser to be made of 0.8 mm thick, (22 gauge) 1.4301, Type CrNi 18/10, AISI 304 stainless steel with a
brushed, satin finish; plastic container for soap cartridges (up to 500 ml), as well as for bulk refill of soap (up to 500 ml);
lockable and soap level indicator.
2.11.2
.1
.2
2.12
2.12.1
.1
.2
Acceptable Product:
Bobrick B-287 – Folding Utility Shelf
Equivalent as manufactured by Watrous, Twin-Cee or Frost
Coat Hook (CH)
Clothes hook shall be type-304 stainless steel with satin finish. Faceplate shall have sloped edges and be constructed of
14-gauge (2mm). Hook shall release at a load of 40lbs or greater. Unit shall be furnished with tamper-resistant mounting
screws. Unit is constructed of of 14-gauge (2mm) type 304 stainless steel with exposed surfaces polished to a satin
finish. Auto-release hook is tested to hold a minimum of 20 lbs. and release at 40 lbs. or greater. Faceplate shall have
sloped edges.
2.13.2
.1
.2
2.12
Acceptable Product:
Bobrick B-26627 – Foam Soap Dispenser
Shelf (SH)
Folding utility shelf shall be type-304 stainless steel with all-welded construction; exposed surfaces shall have satin
finish. Shelf shall be equipped with a heavy-duty internal spring. Shelf holds 100 lbs (45.36 Kg) when properly installed.
Shelf shall automatically return to upright position when not in use.
2.12.2
2.13
2.13.1
Acceptable Product:
Bobrick B-36903 – Recessed Paper Towel Disposal/Disposal
Acceptable Product:
Bobrick B-983 – Vandal Resistant Clothes Hook (Collapsible)
Component Minimum Requirements
Living
project no 1504
2.12.1
2.12.2
2.12.3
SECTION 10800
Page 10800-4
Construction
.1
Fabricate with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors and fasteners of adequate
strength to withstand intended use.
.2
Where specified as frameless, provide stainless steel accessories with one-piece fronts having 90 degree
formed returns at their edges and openings.
.3
Where accessory fronts are framed, frame edges, both inside and outside, with 90 degree formed returns
continuously welded and ground smooth at the corners. Doors shall also have 90 degree formed returns as
specified.
.4
Unless otherwise specified, hinges shall be semi-concealed stainless steel piano hinges extending full-length
of hinged element. Provide hinged elements with concealed, mechanically-retained rubber bumpers for
silent closing, and shall close flush with faces of fronts or frames.
.5
Ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion and permanent
deformation.
.6
No exposed fixings permitted. Cut edges and openings square and smooth. Chamfer corners of edges and
cut-outs 1/16” (1.6 mm).
Assembly
.1
Accurately cut, machine and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions between components fit
together tightly and in true planes.
.2
Fasten work with concealed methods, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
.3
Weld all connections where possible, bolt where not possible and cut off bolts flush with nuts. Countersunk
bolt heads, and provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastening.
.4
Welded joints shall be tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals. Make welds continuous at joints
where entry of water into voids of members or assemblies is possible.
.5
Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblies with surrounding work.
.6
Welds in exposed locations shall be ground and polished smooth.
Finish Work
.1
Provide holes and connections for work installed under other Sections of this specification.
.2
Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials, including holes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Inspection of Site
3.1.1
Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction around obstructions and
projects in place, or as shown on drawings, and to suit service locations.
3.2
Installation
3.2.1
Securely fasten accessories plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together and to
surrounding work. Install in locations shown and specified herein. Mounting heights as shown or in accordance with the
OBC in the case of barrier-free accessories.
3.2.2
Work shall include anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields, toggles, straps, sleeve
brackets, clips, and other items necessary for secure installation, as required by loading and by Jurisdictional Authorities.
3.2.3
Attach work at wood by screws through countersunk holes in metal.
3.2.4
Attach work to masonry with lead plugs and non-corrosive fastenings, to support load with a safety factor of 3. Perform
all drilling necessary to install the work.
3.2.5
Insulate between dissimilar metals or between metals and masonry or concrete with bituminous paint, to prevent
electrolysis.
3.2.6
Co-ordinate installation with the work of other trades adjacent to accessories to achieve the reveals or other edge
conditions shown, where their front faces are flush with the finished wall surfaces.
3.2.7
Install accessories in rooms as scheduled herein. Exact locations to be confirmed by Architect at later date.
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
Cleaning Up and Adjustment
Upon completion of the work, or when directed, remove all traces of protective coatings or paper.
Test mechanisms, hinges, locks and latches, and where necessary, adjust and lubricate and ensure that accessories
are in perfect working order.
Living
project no 1504
3.4
Schedule of Washroom Accessories
3.4.1
Universal Toilet 138
mirror (M-2)
toilet tissue paper dispenser (TTD)
paper towel dispenser/disposal (PTD/DIS)
soap dispenser (SD)
grab bars (GB-1)(GB-2)
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
Female 139
mirror (M-1)
sanitary napkin disposal
soap dispenser (SD)
Men 140
mirror (M-1)
soap dispenser (SD)
grab bars (GB-1)(GB-2)(GB-3)
Staff W.R. 143
mirror (M-1)
sanitary napkin disposal
soap dispenser (SD)
SECTION 10800
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
* * *
END OF SECTION
Page 10800-5
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 10990
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
Page 10990-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
Tolerances
1.2.1
Fabricate work of this Section within tolerances specified for work in which it is built.
1.3
Shop Drawings
1.3.1
Submit shop drawings for each specialty product, for Consultant's review before fabrication, in accordance with Section
01340.
1.4
1.4.1
Package or crate and brace products to prevent distortion in shipment and handling. Label packages and crates, and
protect finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.
1.4.2
Deliver products to location at building site designated by Construction Manager.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Horizontal Mailboxes
2.1.1
Horizontal mailboxes shall be model 1200(front loading) as manufactured by Canadian Mailbox Company or approved
equal. Provide two units tallying up to sixty (63) mailboxes.

Unit 1 to have type A mailboxes 5” high, 6” wide x 17” deep in banks of 7 units high X 6 units wide with 4 type
C 10 3/8” high by 1’-0” wide. Mailboxes shall be front loaded.

Unit 2 to have type A mailboxes 5” high, 6” wide x 17” deep in banks of 7 units high X 3 units wide with 1 type
C 10 3/8” high by 1’-0” wide and 1 type BV 10 3/8” high by 6” wide. Mailboxes shall be front loaded.
HIGH SECURITY PANEL (HSP): Extruded 6063 aluminum alloy 3/32" (2.38mm) thick x 4" (101.6mm) wide with a
clear anodized finish
COMPARTMENTS: Shelves and dividers are 24 gauge satin coated steel with extruded aluminum support bars
assembled with metal screws
DOORS: Extruded 6360 aluminum alloy 3/32" (2.38mm) thick with a clear anodized finish
FRAME: Extruded 6063 aluminum alloy with a clear anodized finish
LOCKS: 5 pin cylinder cam locks with 1000 different changes. Each lock has three (3) keys
DOOR IDENTIFICAITON: Each door has an oval indentation 5/8" (15.88mm) High x 2-1/4" (57.15mm) Wide to
accomodate adhesive gravoply plastic (black engraving on gray background)
FINISH: All surfaces are clear anodized finish.
2.2
Gas Fired Fireplace
2.2.1
Gas Fireplace shall be the Ascent Multi-View model BHD4STFC as manufactured by Napoleon or approved equal.
Living
project no 1504
2.2.2
SECTION 10990
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
Page 10990-2
Fireplace characteristics:
1.
Overall size is 45” in width and 38 ¼” in height.
2.
BTU input of 30,000
3.
Venting 5” x 8”
4.
Glass type – tempered
5.
Glass area - 2024
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
Strictly follow manufacturer's installation procedures. Install work square, plumb, straight, true, and accurately fitted.
Provide all accessory components as required to completed installation
3.1.2
Include anchors, dowels, and fastenings necessary to anchor work together and to work of other trades.
* * *
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 11521
ACCESS / ROOF HATCH
Page 11521-1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
1.4
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Roof framing and opening support.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store attic access door hatch in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store attic access door hatch until installation inside under cover in dry area out of direct sunlight.
WARRANTY
A.
Limited Warranty: One year against defective material and workmanship, covering parts only, no labor or freight.
Defective parts, if deemed so by the manufacturer, will be replaced at no charge, freight excluded, upon
inspection at manufacturer's plant which warrants same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
Battic Door Energy Conservation Products.
Box 15, Mansfield, MA 02048-0015 U.S.A.
Phone: (508) 320-9082; Fax: (508) 339-4571
e: info@batticdoor,com;
i: www.batticdoor.com
As distributed by Home Depot
2.2
FABRICATION
A.
2.3
OVERVIEW OF PRODUCT
A.
2.4
Manufacture each access panel assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.
Model DELUXE 22 x 30 Attic Access Door System is an R-42 insulated and triple-gasketed door that installs in
minutes and provides an air sealed, insulated access opening to residential attic space. Door is provided with wood
trim attached to the wood frame. The door face and trim are pre-finished satin white and the unit is shipped ready to
install. Exceeds 2009, 2012 and 2015 IBC and IECC requirements. Deluxe model comes with 2 recessed handles
and a 4 point, keyed, locking latch system that is designed when door handles and / or security is desired. Also may
be used in knee wall applications. An R-50 Version is also available.
MATERIALS
A.
Wood frame and door. Unit installs into a 22-1/2” x 30-1/2” framed opening. Fits within the standard space between
trusses spaced 24' o.c. or joists 16" o.c. to simplify installation. Pre-painted satin white door face and trim. R-42
insulated door core is 10" thick Extruded Polystyrene (EPS). Door face is mineral board facer and is painted satin
white. Wood trim is attached to door frame and is painted satin white. Triple rubber gaskets provided for air tight
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 11521
ACCESS / ROOF HATCH
Page 11521-2
seal. Solid wood frame and trim. Two recessed handles and a 4 point, keyed, locking latch included. Four keys are
included with each door. Doors are available keyed alike or different as desired.
An R-50 Version is also available.
2.5
ACCESS DOOR AND FRAME FOR ATTIC ACCESS IN RESIDENTIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Non-rated attic access doors and frames.
1.
Door: White mineral board face, extruded polystyrene (EPS) R-42 core 10" thick, and fire rated rubber
sealing gasket over top of EPS core. Door is pre-finished and painted satin white to match trim. R-50
Version also available.
2.
Frame: Plywood frame is installed into a wood framed 22-1/2” x 30-1/2” rough opening. Frame is 12” tall
and provides insulation dam. Wood trim is pre-secured to frame. Rubber gasket is installed on trim on each
side of frame.
3.
Trim: Tapered wood trim 2" wide is pre-secured to frame and painted satin white to match door.
4.
Finish: Pre-finished satin white painted wood door and trim.
5.
Lock: A 4 point, keyed, locking latch system is incorporated into the DELUXE door. 4 keys included. A nonlocking STANDARD door is also available.
6.
Handles: Two recessed handles incorporated into the DELUXE door.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation
before proceeding.
B.
Examine materials upon arrival at site. Notify the carrier and manufacturer of any damage.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Living
project no 1504
SECTION 12480
RECESSED FLOOR GRILLES
Page 12480-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings for Consultant's review before fabrication, in accordance with Section 01340.
Show and describe in detail material, finishes, dimensions, details of connections and fastenings, elevations, plans,
sections, metal thicknesses, hardware and any other pertinent information.
1.3
1.3.1
Package or crate and brace grille to prevent distortion in shipment and handling. Label and protect finish surfaces by
sturdy wrappings.
Deliver to location at building site designated by Contractor.
1.3.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
General
Furnish and install recessed extruded aluminum foot grilles in sizes as scheduled and locations indicated on drawings.
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Fabrication
Fabricate grille frames in single length. Mitre corners and join with corner gusset plates to produce hairline joints.
Fabricate frames to suit grille depth. Engineer, provide and install all necessary framing for matte grille to support a
minimum of 4.8 kN/m2 (100 psf).
All foot grille materials, including support framing shall be clear anodized aluminum alloy type 6351-T6. Foot grille
blades shall be T-shaped, 3/8” x 1/8” x 1.5” (9.5 mm x 3 mm x 32 mm) minimum depth with maximum 3/16” (4.7 mm)
spacing between bars. Alternate bars are striated every 3/8” (9.5 mm) on the top face.
Back coat surfaces of frames which will contact cementitious material with zinc chromate primer or other suitable
material.
Fabricate foot grille in removable sections with concealed lock-downs to facilitate cleaning of recessed pit. Sections
shall be sized to permit operation with lifting hooks / hinge / lock notch by one person – max size of grill
section shall be 3’-0” x 3’-0”.
Foot grilles shall be equipped with 22 ga x 25mm deep stainless steel pan.
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.3
2.3.1
Acceptable Products
Acceptable foot grille profile shall be Model No. BSA-1 complete with ‘TT regular installation VV’ as manufactured by
Bolar Canada Inc. 50 Omer de Serres Blainville, Québec J7C 5H2, tel 1.800.552.6527 or equivalent as approved by
the Architect. The foot grilles shall have the follwoign characteristics;
.1 All aluminum components shall be extruded aluminum alloy 6061-T6
.2 Deflection under live load: The foot grilles shall be so conceived so as to accept a minimum uniform load of
2260 Newton applied over a 4 square inch (100mm) surface in order to obtain a 1/180" deflection over a 2'0" (610 mm) span.
.3 The perimeter frames shall be an inverted "T" shape such as model "VV" by Bolar, in order to anchor the
structure into the concrete. Supplied with sound gasket. For sections larger than 6'-0 * 8'-0 (1828mm x
2438mm) a mechanical joint is to be provided.
.4 Blades shall be "T" shaped, size: 3/8" * 1/8" * 1" (9.5mm * 3mm * 25mm) striated at every 3/8" (9.5mm).
The notch shall be 9/64" (3.2mm) in width by 3/16" (4.7mm). Spacing between blades is not to exceed
3/16" (4.7mm). Such as model BSA-1 by Bolar. Overall depth: 2" (50mm) from finished floor.
.5 Spacing between blades and retaining rods shall be so as to meet manufacturer's specifications for the
minimum weight capacity. Foot grille will be manufactured in sections so as to increase ease of
Living
project no 1504
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
SECTION 12480
RECESSED FLOOR GRILLES
Page 12480-2
maintenance.
The frames will be supplied with a pan. Pan shall be of 22 gauges stainless steel, no drain.
The sections shall have a friction coefficient of 0.94 and a cleaning efficiency of 69%, percentage of
opening shall be 53%.
The deformation under lateral charge is not to exceed 8 (visual) after application of a maximal charge of
6130 Newton (1380 pounds) at a 45 degree angle in relation to the surface.
All sections shall be in accordance with ASTM B117 norms, and be able to sustain a 1000 hours salt fog
without any notable changes.
Hinges and lock notch: All sections of grille will be supplied with hinges and lock notch. The hinges and lock
notch will be fabricated in stainless steel and installed on the grille by the manufacturer. Hinges will be
attached to the frame by the general contractor and operation shall be verified by the architect.
Lifting hooks: All grilles will be supplied with lifting hooks in order to provide easy lifting of sections without
efforts or risk of damaging the grille surface (one per vestibule).
Fabricate foot grille in sizes to permit on person to lift / open a typical section of foot grille.
Sound gasket: All frame sections will be supplied with a sound gasket, as per manufacturer's specifications.
The sound gasket's function will be to buffer noise and vibrations that could occur between frames and
blades.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
Installation
Strictly follow manufacturer's installation procedures.
Install work square, plumb, straight, true, and accurately fitted.
Include anchors, dowels, and fastenings necessary to anchor work together and to work of other trades.
Verify location, and dimensions before installation. Anchor in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
Insulate where necessary to prevent electrolysis between metal to metal or metal to masonry or concrete contact.
Install all foot grilles, square and level with finished floor so as to permit easy manipulation of all sections. All frame
members and intermediary supports are to be level and well supported on all their lengths in order to avoid any
deflection over a long term period.
All frames and pans are to be thoroughly cleaned before installing any grille section in order for them not to exceed
finished floor level. All sound gaskets damaged during installation, are to be replaced before final inspection. Protect
grilles from construction traffic. Install all hinges. Verify that all latches are in a closed position.
* * *
END OF SECTION

1504-Cochrane SH Permit Spec 2015 04 13

Transcription

Similar documents

Cochrane Standard Author Training Course

Greenhawk Cochrane - Opening March 7th

party for a living

Lake Manitouwabing

Jumpin` Jammi Jumpin` Jammin` Pyjama Party Pyjama Party

k rack bro11new - KINETIC solar racking and mounting

Ontario JOB CREATION PARTNERSHIP (OJCP)

[email protected]